Volume-II

Document Sample
Volume-II Powered By Docstoc
					Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                        ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


              HYDERABAD GROWTH CORRIDOR LIMITED


 Name of Work          :   Construction of Eight lane Access Controlled Expressway as
                           Outer Ring Road to Hyderabad City in the State of Andhra
                           Pradesh, India in the stretches from Patancheru – Shamirpet
                           from km.23.700 to km.61.700 (Northern Arc) (Package-3 from
                           Km 46.000 to Km 61.700 Dundigal-Shamirpet).



                   ORR/ JBIC/ Pkg3/ 07-08
(Km 46+000 to Km 61+700 Dundigal - Shamirpet)

          BIDDING DOCUMENTS FOR ITEM RATE CONTRACT
                                      VOLUME II



                                      CONTENTS


  Section                           Description                    Page Numbers


      5       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                                152 - 387




                                          152
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited         ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




                                    153
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




                              SECTION 5
                         Technical Specifications




                                    154
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited         ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




                                    155
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II
                          Technical Specifications

          1. PREAMBLE

         1.1 The Technical Specifications Contained herein shall be read in
             conjunction with the specifications for road and Bridge works issued by
             Ministry of Road Transport and Highways, Government of India
             (Fourth Revision-2001, reprinted in December,03) including up
             gradation as given in Para 2.1

       1.1.1 General

              The Technical Specifications covering the materials and the
              workmanship aspects as well as method of measurements and
              payments are included in this section. These specifications cover the
              items of civil and non-civil works coming under scope of this document.
              All work shall be carried out in conformity with the same. These
              specifications are not intended to cover the minute details. The works
              shall be executed in accordance with good practices followed for
              achieving high standards of workmanship, thus ensuring safety and
              durability of the construction. All codes and standards referred to in
              these specifications shall be the latest thereof, unless otherwise stated.

       1.1.2 Inclusive Documents

              The provisions of special conditions of contract, those specified
              elsewhere in the tender document, as well as execution drawings and
              notes, or other specifications issued in writing by the Engineer shall
              form part of the technical specifications of this project.

       1.1.3 The attention of the Contractor is drawn to those clauses of codes,
             which require supporting specification either by the Engineer or by
             ‘Mutual' agreement between the 'supplier and purchaser’. In such
             cases, it is the responsibility of the tenderer/contractor to seek
             clarification on any uncertainty and obtain prior approval of the
             Engineer before taking up the supply/construction. In absence of such
             prior clarification, the Engineer’s choice/design will be final and binding
             on the contractor without involving separately any additional payment.

       1.1.4 Measurement And Payment

              The methods of measurement and payment shall be as described
              under various items and in the Bill of Quantities. Where specific
              definitions are not given, the methods described in B.I.S. Code will be
              followed. Should there be any detail of construction or materials which
              has not been referred to in the Specification or in the Bill of Quantities
              and Drawings but the necessity for which may be implied or inferred
              there from, or which is usual or essential to the completion of the work
              in the trades, the same shall be deemed to be included in the rates and
              prices entered by the contractor in the Bill of Quantities.




                                            156
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                          ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II
       1.1.5 Defective Works
             All defective works are liable to be demolished, rebuilt and defective
             materials replaced by the contractor at his own cost and without
             involving any time extension.

         1.2 SITE INFORMATION

       1.2.1 The information given hereunder and provided elsewhere in these
             documents is given in good faith by the Employer but the Contractor
             shall satisfy himself regarding all aspects of site conditions and no
             claim will be entertained on the plea that the information supplied by
             the Employer is erroneous or insufficient.

       1.2.2 The area in which the works are located is mostly plain to rolling
             terrain. The Project area is located between 170 11/ 39// - 170 36/
             27.13// N latitude and 780 14/ 15// - 780 41/ 21// E longitude.

       1.2.3 General Climatic Conditions

     1.2.3.1 The variation in temperature in this region is between 10 C and 46 C.
     1.2.3.2 The annual rainfall in the area is in the range of 790 mm to 1000 mm.

       1.2.4 Seismic Zone

              The works are located in seismic zone II as defined in IRC-6-2000

          2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

              The Technical Specifications in accordance with which the entire work
              described hereinafter shall be constructed and completed by the
              Contractor, comprise of the following:

         2.1 Part –I General Technical Specifications

              The General Technical Specifications shall be the “Specifications For
              Road And Bridge Works” (Fourth Revision – 2001, Reprint December
              2003), as corrected in the original issued by the Ministry of Road
              Transport & Highways (MORTH), Government of India and published
              by the Indian Roads Congress (IRC), with a cross reference to relevant
              Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) for materials or other aspects not
              covered by the IRC.

         2.2 Part – II Supplementary Technical Specifications

              The Supplementary Technical Specifications shall comprise of various
              Amendments/Modifications/Additions to the “Specifications For Road
              And Bridge Works” referred as “Part – I” above and “Additional
              Specifications” for particular items of work not already covered in
              Part-I.

       2.2.1 A particular Clause or a part thereof in “Specifications For Road And
             Bridge Works”(Fourth Revision – 2001, Reprint December 2003) as
             corrected in the original referred in Part - I above, where

                                          157
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                        ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II
             Amended/Modified/Added upon, and incorporated in Part-II, referred to
             above, such Amendment/Modification/Addition supersedes the relevant
             Clause or part of the Clause.

       2.2.2 When an Amended/Modified/Added Clause supersedes a Clause or
             part thereof in the said Specifications, then any reference to the
             superseded Clause shall be deemed to refer to the
             Amended/Modified/Added Clause or part thereof.

       2.2.3 In so far as Amended/Modified/Added Clause may come in conflict or
             be inconsistent with any of the provisions of the said Specifications
             under reference, the Amended/Modified/Added Clause shall always
             prevail.

       2.2.4 The Additional Specifications shall comprise of specifications for
             particular items of work not already covered in Part - I.

       2.2.5 The Clauses and Sub-Clauses of the following Sections in the
             “Specifications For Road And Bridge Works” (Fourth Revision –
             2001, Reprinted in December,03) have been amended /modified/
             added upon:

              Sections                             Clauses

              100         102, 103, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 114,
                          115, 116, 121, 122, 123, 123A, 124, 126
              200         201, 202

              300         301, 304, 305, 306

              400         401, 406, 407, 408,409

              500         501, 502, 503, 504, 507, 508, 509, 521

              600         601, 602

              800         801, 802, 803, 805, 809, 810,812,813, 815

              900         901, 902, 903

              1000        1002, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1012, 1013, 1014,
                          1015
              1200        1202, 1204, 1205, 1207, 1214, 1215

              1400        1402

              1500        1501, 1502, 1503, 1504, 1505, 1506,1508, 1509, 1510,
                          1513
              1600        1602, 1604, 1605, 1606, 1607

              1700        1703, 1704, 1705, 1706, 1707, 1709, 1710, 1712, 1713,
                          1715, 1716
              1800        1801, 1802, 1803, 1804, 1805, 1806, 1807, 1808, 1816

                                          158
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                           ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II
              2000         2001, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2009, 2011

              2100         2106

              2200         2204, 2210

              2300         2305

              2500         2504

              2600         2602, 2604, 2607, 2609

              2700         2702, 2706, 2709

              2800         2809, 2811, 2812, 2813, 2814, 2815, 2816, 2817, 2818,
                           2819, 2820, 2821, 2822, 2823, 2824, 2825, 2826, 2827,
                           2828, 2829, 2830, 2831, 2832, 2833, 2834
              2900         2904, 2906, 2907, 2910, 2911

              3000         3001, 3005

              3100         Entire clause is revised .

              3200         3201, 3202, 3203, 3204, 3205, 3206 & 3207.




                                           159
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


 2.2.6          Additional Specifications

                The following Clauses have been added to the “Specifications For
                Road And Bridge Works”(Fourth Revision – 2001, Reprint
                December2003)

         A-01   Diversion of Existing water courses
         A-02   Plantation of low height shrubs
         A-03   Interlocking Concrete blocks
         A-04   Rain water Harvesting Structure
         A-05   Reinforced Retaining Wall
         A-06   Specification for Reinforced Earth Retaining Structures
         A-07   Raised Pavement Markers (Road Studs)
         A-08   Rumble strips
         A-09   Speed Breakers
         A-10   Chute Drains for High Embankment sections
         A-11   Grating across CRS drain
         A-12   Traffic Management & Safety during construction operations including
                solar traffic safety devices.
         A-13   Utility Ducts and Crossing
         A-14   Re-construction of Temples or Religious Places.
         A-15   Curing using Liquid Membrane Forming compound
         A-16   Void Former
         A-17   Water proof cement painting
         A-18   Filling of Open Wells.
         A-19   Levelling and Grading Road Side Land
         A-20   Control Blasting
         A-21   High Mast Lighting
         A-22   Lighting Arrangements

 2.2.7          In the absence of any definite provisions on any particular issue in the
                aforesaid Specifications, reference may be made to the latest codes
                and specifications of IRC, BIS, BS, ASTM and AASHTO in that order.
                Where even these are silent, the construction and completion of the
                works shall conform to sound engineering practice as approved by the
                Engineer and in case of any dispute arising out of the interpretation of
                the above, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding on
                the Contractor.

                Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards
                codes to be met by the materials, plant, and other supplies to be
                furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the latest
                current edition or revision of the relevant standards and codes in effect
                up to 28 days prior to the bid opening date shall apply, unless
                otherwise expressly stated in the Contract where such standards and
                codes are national, or relate to a particular country of region, other
                internationally recognised standards which ensure a substantially equal
                or higher performance than the standards and codes specified will be
                accepted subject to the Engineer's prior review and written approval.
                Difference between the standards specified and the proposed
                alternative standards must be fully described in writing by the
                Contractor and submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days prior to the
                date when the Contractor desires the Engineer's approval. In the event
                                           160
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

             the Engineer determines that such proposed deviations do not ensure
             substantially equal performance, the Contractor shall comply with the
             standards specified in the documents.

             Technical Specifications for Building works shall be the latest
             “Specifications volume I to IV, 1995” as published by the Central Public
             Works Department, Government of India and deemed to be bound into
             this document.

 2.3         PART-III Specifications for Buildings, Subways and Miscellaneous
             Works

             Technical Specifications for Buildings, Subways, and miscellaneous
             works shall be the latest Specifications Volume-I to VI for Civil Works
             and General Specifications Electrical Works Part I-INTERNAL, PART
             II-EXTERNAL for Electrical Works as published by the Central Public
             Works Department (CPWD), Government of India and deemed to be
             bound into this document.

 2.4         The latest edition of all specifications/standards till 28 days before the
             final date of submission of the bid shall be applicable.




                                        161
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




                                     PART – I


                      GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS




                  1. This part shall comprise the “Specifications For Road And
                  Bridge Works” (Fourth Revision – 2001, Reprint December
                  2003), as corrected in the original issued by the Ministry of Road
                  Transport & Highways (MORTH), Government of India and
                  published by the Indian Roads Congress (IRC), Jamnagar House,
                  Shahjahan Road, New Delhi – 110 011, all as deemed to be
                  bound into this document.

                  1    General conditions regarding use of equipment on works:


                  In addition to the general conditions already indicated in Volume-I
                  (of Bidding Documents), the following requirements regarding the
                  use of equipment in works shall be satisfied.

                  a) The contractor shall be required to give a trial run of the
                  equipment for specification and tolerance establishing adequacy
                  to meet the requirements of specifications and completion of work
                  as per programme before commencement of work;

                  b) All equipment provided shall be of proven efficiency and shall
                  be operated and maintained at all times in a manner as specified
                  by the manufacturers or industry practice. Regular reports on
                  proper and adequate maintenance shall be submitted to the
                  Engineer in the format and at intervals as approved by the
                  Engineer.

                  c) No equipment or personnel shall be removed from site without
                  permission of the Engineer.

                  2    Where the term crushed stone is referred to in the
                  Specification for Road & Bridge Works of the MORTH (Clause
                  1007) for use as aggregate in construction of pavement layers or
                  in construction of culverts & bridges or in construction of cross
                  drainage works it shall mean that the aggregates shall be obtained
                  through the use of Cone crusher, Vertical Shaft Impactor and
                  vibratory screens of suitable capacity.

                  1     Quality Control on Works & Materials.

                  Quality control on materials and execution remains the primary
                  responsibility of the Contractor.


                                        162
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                  Nevertheless, the Engineer will inspect the work from time to time
                  during and after construction and get the quality of the work tested
                  (by himself, by his Testing & Quality Control Units and/or by any
                  other agency deemed fit by him) generally as per the
                  requirements of the Handbook of Quality Control for Construction
                  of Roads & Runways (IRC Special Publication No. 11 &
                  Section-900 of MORTH Specifications)

                  2   Surveying & Measuring Equipments

                  The Contractor for his use shall procure equipment for surveying
                  and measurement of the work. The same shall also be made
                  available to the Engineer at site for any work connected with the
                  Contract without any charge.




                                        163
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                                     PART – II

                 SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
        (AMENDMENTS/MODIFICATIONS/ADDITIONS TO EXISTING
      CLAUSES OF GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – PART - I)

 SECTION 100                                          GENERAL
 CLAUSE 102                                        Definitions
                       The following abbreviations shall be added in this Clause.
                        “BIS”          - Bureau of Indian Standards
                        “CPCB”         - Central Pollution Control Board
                        “HDPE”         - High Density Polyethylene
                        “MDD”         - Maximum Dry Density (as per IS: 2720-Part 8)
                        “MORTH”       - Ministry of Road Transport and Highways
                        “HGCL”        - Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited
                        “BOQ”         - Bill of Quantities
                        “QA”          - Quality Assurance
                         “OGL”        - Original Ground Levels
                         “CRMB”       - Crumbed rubber modified Bitumen
                         “DLC”        - Dry Lean Concrete
                         “PQC”        - Pavement Quality Concrete
                         “BM”         - Bituminous Macadam
                         “DBM”        - Dense Bituminous Macadam
                         “BC”         - Bituminous concrete
 CLAUSE 103            Add at the end of the clause

                       The latest editions of these standards till 28 (Twenty Eight)
                       days prior to the bid opening date shall be adopted.

 CLAUSE 105            Scope of Work
 Scope of Work
                         “WMM”        - Wet Mix Macadam
                         “CECRI”      - Central Electro Chemical Research Institute
                         “NHAI”       - National Highways Authority of India
                         “TMT”       - Thermo Mechanically Treated
                         “ASA”        - Acrylic Strene Acrylonintrity
                         “HIPS”       - High Impact Polystrene
                         “CIL”        - Co-efficient of luminous intensity
                         “RPM”        - Reflective Pavement Marker
                          “ECB”       - Emergency Call Boxes
                                        164
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         “VMS”        - Variable Message Signs
                          “DP”        - Double Pole
                         “ER” - Electrical Resistivity
                         “REC”        - Rural Electrification Corporation
                         “APCPDCL”- Andhra Pradesh Central Power Distribution
                                         Company Ltd.
                           “SPCB”     -State Pollution Control Board
                           “ASTM”     -American Society for Testing and Materials
                          “AASHTO” -American Association of State Highway and
                                     Transportation Officials
                          “MUV”       -Multipurpose Utility Vehicle
                          “SUV”       -Sports Utility Vehicle
                           “DCP”      -Dynamic Cone Penetration
                           “FIDIC”    -Federation Internationale des Ingenieurs
                                       Conseils
                          “MNES”      -Minister of Non-Conventional Energy Sources
                          “HYSD”      -High Yield Strength Deformed bars
                           “PSV”      - Polished Stone Value
                          “WPC”       -Wireless Planning and Coordination
                          “AIV”       -Aggregate Impact Value
                          “ACV”       -Aggregate Crush Value
                          “IRC”       -Indian Road Congress
                          “BS”        -British Standard
                          “PMC”       -Polymer Modified Cementitious
                          “MARV”      -Minimum Average Roll Value
                          “ESC”       -Environmental Stress Cracking
                          “PP”        -Poly Propylene
                          “SMF”       -Scaled Maintenance Free
                           “CPWD” -Central Public Works Department
                          “LED”       -Light Emitting Diode
                          “ATM”       -Asynchronous Transfer Mode
                          “ITS”       - Intelligent Transportation System
                          “TIS”       -Traffic Information Services
                          “IRI”       -International Roughness Index
 Clause 105.3          Add the following below the existing clause:

                       “The Contractor shall establish, adhere to, monitor and
                       maintain an adequate quality assurance programme
                       (QA-programme) based on the requirements of EN ISO 9001.
                                         165
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                       The Contractor shall institute and operate a Quality
                       Management System complying with SP-47 (Quality Systems
                       for Road Bridges) and SP-57 (Quality System for Roads). The
                       quality management system shall be described in a Quality
                       Assurance Plan that shall be submitted to the Engineer for
                       acceptance not later than 28 days after the letter of
                       Acceptance.      The costs associated with preparing
                       implementing and monitoring the quality management system
                       shall be deemed to be covered in the scope of the work. The
                       Quality Assurance Plan shall cover the following items.

                       The QA-programme shall cover the quality assurance aspects
                       of all services rendered, all items to be supplied and all
                       construction activities to be performed under the Contract,
                       also including temporary structures and equipment which will
                       influence the quality of the completed works or the progress of
                       the Contract.

                       The QA-programme shall as a minimum cover subjects listed
                       below:

                          Organisation and Management Responsibility
                          Document and data control
                          Construction programme
                          Method statements
                          Process control
                          Working, inspection, testing and documentation
                          procedures
                          Safety and emergency procedures
                          Control and documentation of purchasing and handling of
                          materials
                          Product realisation
                          Non-conformity and corrective / preventive action
                          Measurement, analysis and improvement
                          Internal quality audits
                          Servicing
                          Education and training of staff
                          Site Environmental Plan
                          Competence / skill requirement for Human resources
                          Customer communication

                       The general procedures of the QA-programme shall be
                       submitted to the Engineer for approval not later than
                       twenty-eight days after the date of receipt of letter of
                       acceptance. The special part of the QA-programme shall be
                       submitted successively to the effect that it shall have been
                       approved prior to the commencement of the activities to which
                       the programme shall apply”.

 Clause 105.5          Add the following as clause 105.5

                       The Contractor shall take steps to minimize the negative
                       impact of construction operations on environment.
                                        166
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       Hot Mix Plants should be located at least 1-2 Km from the
                       nearest habitation unless otherwise required by statutory
                       requirements. Vehicles and machinery used for road
                       construction are to be regularly maintained to conform to
                       SPCB (State Pollution Control Board) norms. Blasting as per
                       Indian Explosive Act will be adopted. People living near such
                       blasting site should have prior information of operation hours.
                       Workers at blasting site will be provided with earplugs.

                       Vehicle transporting earth materials will be covered. Water
                       shall be spread to control the dust Degraded materials and
                       wastewater shall be disposed into the Septic Tank and soak
                       pits etc. The contractor will make arrangement to clean up the
                       spoil as soon as the work finishes in a stretch. If such sites are
                       located outside the ROW, restoration of the site to a level
                       acceptable to the landowner will be done with in time period
                       agreed between landowner and the contractor. Spilling of oil
                       and bituminous products during construction phase will be
                       avoided to reduce the chances of contamination of surface as
                       well as ground water. The construction camps shall be
                       situated at places involving least risks of the nature
                       considering the factors like ground slopes, under ground water
                       table and shall confirm to local building regulations, as
                       applicable.

                       Construction camps shall be properly located to avoid
                       contamination of water through wastewater drainage into river
                       and canals. Seasonal pollution issues may arise when flow of
                       river is slow. To prevent such contamination, wastewater
                       generated at campsite will be discharged in soak pits. For
                       human excreta, proper disposal through Septic Tanks or deep
                       trenches will be done.

 Clause 106            CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT

                       Add the following sub Para (g) and (h) after sub Para (f):

                          g)   Adequate standby equipment including spare parts
                               shall be available.

                          h)   All measuring devices and gauges shall be in good
                               working condition. Measuring devices that can affect
                               product quality shall be calibrated prior to use and at
                               prescribed intervals against certified equipment.
                               Calibration procedures shall be established,
                               maintained and documented and corrective actions
                               taken when results are unsatisfactory. Accuracy and
                               fitness of measuring devices shall be ensured by
                               proper maintenance and periodic tests to be carried
                               out to check the accuracy of all such equipment and
                               get certificate from the Engineer”.

 Clause 107            Contract Drawings

                                        167
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 Clause 107.1          Add the following after the end of Para

                       After careful study of the drawings issued by the Employer,
                       the Contractor shall prepare where necessary, all
                       supplementary and working drawings with field / construction
                       information and shall submit the same to the Engineer for
                       approval prior to construction. If any change is required, the
                       proposal shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to
                       construction for his approval and shall be treated as incidental
                       to the work.

 Clause 107.3          Replace the Sub-Clause as Follows:

                       Two copies of design drawings, on the basis of which actual
                       execution of the work to be proceeded shall be given to the
                       contractor by the Engineer progressively according to the work
                       programme        submitted     by    the    Contractor      and
                       approved/accepted by the Engineer. Drawings of particular
                       activity shall be issued to the Contractor at least 21 days in
                       advance of the scheduled date of the start of the activity.

                       After careful study of the drawings issued by the Engineer,
                       The Contractor shall prepare 4 sets of detailed construction
                       drawings / working drawings with necessary field/construction
                       information and shall submit the same to the Engineer for
                       approval along with a construction methodology at least 21
                       days in advance of the scheduled date of the start of the
                       activity.

                       After reviewing the construction drawing, the Engineer shall
                       issue back 2 sets of drawing to the contractor duly stamped
                       “Good for Construction” along with Drawing Number, Revision
                       Number and date, at least 7 days in advance of the scheduled
                       date of the start of the activity.

                       One set of Original “Construction drawings” shall be kept at
                       Construction site and Second set shall be kept at contractors’
                       site office under document control section and should be
                       available for Inspection / Verification at any time. All
                       Superseded / Obsolete drawing should be clearly marked as
                       “Superseded” or “Obsolete”.

                        The contractor shall maintain a document control procedure
                        for “Construction Drawings” also as per QA – Programme in
                        accordance with provision of Clause 105.3. The contractor
                        shall include all the above activities in their Construction
                        Programme which is to be submitted in accordance with the
                        Provision of Sub. Clause 14.1 of Conditions of Particular
                        Application.




                                        168
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 CLAUSE 108             Site Information

 Clause 108.4           This Sub-Clause shall read as follows:

                        The Contractor shall identify quarries, borrow areas and other
                        sources of materials required for the work. He shall satisfy
                        himself that the required materials are available in adequate
                        quantities and complying with the requirements of
                        specifications. No claims shall be entertained on account of
                        non-availability of materials, and increase in leads, etc.

                        As far as possible natural sand shall be used for sand/fine
                        aggregates. If natural sand is not available with in 100Km or
                        Government has stopped sand mining, the contractor shall
                        obtain suitable alternative viz. crushed stone, crushed sand,
                        etc. to substitute the natural sand. All alternative sand shall
                        confirm to IS: 383 and tests for conformity shall be carried out
                        as per IS: 2386 (Parts I to VIII). No separate payment will be
                        made on account of non-availability of natural sand, arranging
                        crusher sand and increase in leads, etc.

                        It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to arrange the
                        quarries, borrow areas etc., on license / lease basis or
                        otherwise, and study in detail before tendering, the scope of
                        taking the quarry on lease. Advance information must be
                        collected by the contractor regarding the procedure laid down
                        and the consequent delay in arranging the quarries on lease
                        and must make alternative arrangement to procure the quarry
                        products from lease holders. No separate payment will be
                        made for arranging such quarries, borrow areas, etc.”

 CLAUSE 109             Setting Out
 Clause 109.6           The Last Sentence of the paragraph i.e. “The contractor,
                        Engineer”, shall be replaced with following sentences.

                        The Contractor shall, in connection with the staking out of the
                        centreline, survey the terrain along the road and cross
                        sections at intervals 20m and 10m in Straight and Curve
                        portions respectively shall be done as per the following guide
                        lines.

                           1. Work request shall be given for joint inspection/survey
                              for taking of “Original ground levels of road cross
                              sections” 7 days in advance before starting of site
                              clearance.
                           2. Preliminary site clearance such as removal of shrubs
                              and bushes has to be done without disturbing the
                              original ground surface.
                           3. Joint survey shall be carried out and the “Original
                              Ground levels (OGL)” along the road centre line and
                              cross sections shall be taken jointly.
                           4. Engineer shall furnish Copy of the approved records of
                              Centre line co-ordinates & OGL field books to the
                                        169
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                                Employer for record.

 Clause 109.7           Replace the first sentence of the paragraph with the following

                        After obtaining approval of the Engineer, work on site
                        clearance can commence and the profile and cross sectional
                        OGLs shall form the basis for measurements and payment.

 Clause 109.8           Add the following paragraph in the Sub-Clause 109.8

        109.8.1         Surveying Equipment and Personnel

                        The Contractor shall provide the necessary surveying
                        equipment, accessories, surveyors and labourers required for
                        setting out and related measurements, including making
                        available these to the Engineer and his representatives at
                        different stages of the work. The surveying equipment shall
                        be of high standard of manufacture as approved by the
                        Engineer, in good working condition with adequate numbers
                        and shall include inter alia the following:

                        i)      Precision automatic level with micrometer attachment
                                with tripod and levelling staff reading to 5 mm
                                accuracy by direct observation and to 1 mm accuracy
                                by estimation or better.

                        ii)     Theodelite with tripod – Electronically operated with
                                computerised output attachment reading to 20
                                seconds of angle accuracy or better.

                        iii)    Total Station with 2 spare batteries and a charger,
                                three tripods plus tangents sufficient for a 4 km range,
                                together with an electronic data reorder, 6 data packs
                                and all necessary software for operation.

                        iv)     Precision staffs 4m & 5m type

                        v)      3 metre straight edge and measuring wedge fitted with
                                handles, wedges 100 mm height and 1 mm accuracy.

                        vi)     Field umbrellas

                        vii)    Ranging rods 50 mm diameter 3 m long straight with a
                                conical metallic shoe at one end and painted
                                alternatively black and white at 300 mm C / C along
                                the length.

                        viii)   Camber templates 2 lane fitted with handles.

                        ix)     Steel tape graduated in metres, centimetres and
                                millimetres




                                         170
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                               a)   10 m long
                               b)   20m long
                               c)   50m long
                               d)   Reference markers and pegs

                        x)     Safety Jackets (Reflective)
                        xi)    Bump Integrator (Wheel mounted)
                        xii)   Nails, chalk piece, paints, brushes etc,

                        The Contractor shall maintain the surveying equipment in
                        good condition during the full duration of works and replace
                        the ones which get worn out or otherwise become
                        unworkable.

                        The surveying equipment and related resources shall be
                        provided under the general obligations of the Contractor
                        requiring no separate payment.

 CLAUSE 110             Public Utilities

 Clause 110.1           This Clause shall be replaced with the following:

                        The information provided in the bid documents about public
                        utilities like water/oil/gas pipelines, sewers, cables etc. may
                        not be exhaustive, and it shall be the responsibility of the
                        Contractor to ascertain the utilities that are likely to be
                        affected by the works through site investigations and
                        collection of information from the concerned utility owners:

                        The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with service
                        provider / concerned authorities for cutting of trees, shifting of
                        utilities and removal of encroachments etc. and making the
                        site unencumbered from the project construction area
                        required for completion of work. This shall include initial and
                        frequent follow-up meetings / actions / discussions with each
                        involved service provider / concerned authorities. The
                        Employer shall make payment for cutting of trees and shifting
                        of utilities as required by the concerned department.

 Clause 110.3           This Sub-Clause shall read as under:

                        “Any utility likely to be affected by the Contractor’s work shall
                        be brought to the notice of the Engineer and such work shall
                        be undertaken only after getting written clearance from the
                        Engineer”.

 Clause 110.4           Any services affected by the Works must be temporarily
                        supported by the contractor who must also take all measures
                        reasonably required by the various bodies to protect their
                        services and property during the progress of Works. It shall
                        be deemed to be part of the Contract and no extra payment
                        shall be made for the same.


                                           171
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 Clause 110.5           The Contractor may be required to carry out certain works for
                        and on behalf of the various bodies and he shall also provide,
                        with the prior approval of the Engineer, such assistance to the
                        various bodies as may be authorized by the Engineer.

 Clause 110.6           For Co-ordinating the work of cutting of trees, shifting of
                        utilities and removal of encroachments, etc., no separate
                        payment shall be made and these shall be incidental to the
                        work.

 CLAUSE 111             Precautions for Safeguarding the Environment

                        This whole clause shall be substituted by following:

 Clause 111.1           General

                        The Contractor shall take all precautions for safeguarding the
                        environment during the course of the construction of works.
                        He shall abide by all rules, regulations and laws in force
                        governing pollution and environmental protection that are
                        applicable to the area where the works are situated.

                        NOISE:

                        The Contractor shall militate against any sustained increase
                        in base line ambient sound levels at sensitive receptors
                        during construction of work.
                        All construction operations shall be performed in a manner to
                        minimise noise and vibration. The parameters for noise are
                        detailed below.
                                70 dB (A) for day and night;
                                50 dB (A) for day and 45 dB (A) for night for sensitive
                             receptors

                        If the noise levels are found to be above these standards and
                        it is determined by the Engineer that these levels are due to
                        the equipment or plant being deployed by the Contractor, he
                        shall undertake, at his own cost measures as approved by the
                        Engineer, to bring these levels down to the specified levels.
                        Blasting should be done as per Indian Explosive Act. People
                        living near such blasting sites shall have prior information of
                        operational hazards. Blasting will not be undertaken at night.
                        Workers at blasting sites will be provided with earplugs.
                        Material haulage roads will be properly regulated.

                        Labour shall be warned against the hunting of wild life, if any.
                        No archaeological site shall be disturbed.

 Clause 111.2           Borrow pits for Embankment Construction

                        Borrow pits shall not be dug within the Right-of-Way of the
                        road. Arable lands will not be used for earth borrowing. The
                        Contractor will ensure that proper excavation techniques are

                                        172
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        used to improve stability and safety of the borrow area. The
                        excavation shall be carried out in such a way that the area
                        does not inundate during monsoons or generate cesspools of
                        water to become mosquito breeding sites. The stipulations in
                        Clause – 305.2.2 shall govern.

 Clause 111.3           Quarry Operations

                        The Contractor shall obtain material from licensed quarries
                        only after the consent of the forest department or other
                        concerned authorities. The quarry operation shall be
                        undertaken within the purview of the rules and regulations in
                        force. The Contractor shall ensure scheduling the movement
                        of transport carrying material to and from the site during
                        non-peak hours. The trucks carrying all the dusty material,
                        red earth, moorum and fly ash/ pond, ash shall be covered
                        with a tarpaulin and provided with adequate free board to
                        prevent spillage. End boards shall be provided in loaders to
                        prevent spillage. Stockpiling of material shall be properly
                        planned so as to ensure that no traffic jam takes place on the
                        highway.

 Clause 111.5           Precautions against Dust

                        The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to minimize
                        dust nuisance during the construction of the works. All
                        existing highways and roads used by vehicles of the
                        Contractor or any of his sub-contractors or suppliers of
                        materials or plant, and similarly any new roads which are part
                        of the works and which are being used by traffic shall be kept
                        clean and clear of all dust / mud or other extraneous material
                        dropped by the said vehicles or their tyres. Similarly, all dust /
                        or mud or other extraneous material from the works
                        spreading on these highways shall be immediately cleared by
                        the Contractor. Clearance shall be effected immediately by
                        manual sweeping and removal of debris, or, if so directed by
                        the Engineer, by mechanical sweeping and clearing
                        equipment, and all dust, mud and other debris shall be
                        removed entirely from the road surface. Additionally, the road
                        surface including haul road from Quarries and Plants shall be
                        hosed or watered using suitable equipment to avoid dust
                        pollution. Special care shall be taken to combat dust problem
                        originating from use of fly ash/pond ash.

 Clause 111.6           Pollution from Hot Mix Plant, WMM Plant, Batching Plant
                        & Crusher and Other Construction Machinery

                        The Contractor shall ensure the use of a relatively new, well
                        maintained hot mix plant (batch type) so that any emission
                        conforms to the CPCB norms and be fitted with a dust
                        extraction unit to avoid prolonged engine powered equipment
                        illness. Hot Mix Plant, WMM plant Batching Plant & Crusher
                        shall be located more than 500 m from any community or
                        residence. The contractor has to obtain necessary
                                         173
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        consent/clearance from State Pollution Control Board to
                        operate Hot Mix Plant, WMM plant Batching Plant & Crusher
                        before commencement of works.


                        All vehicles, equipments and machinery needed for
                        construction will be regularly maintained to ensure that
                        pollution emission levels conform to CPCB norms. All vehicles
                        should be fitted with silencers.
                        Construction vehicles, machinery & equipment will move or
                        be stationed in designated areas to avoid compaction of soil
                        to ensure the preservation of the top soil for agriculture.

 Clause 111.7           Road Safety

                        The Contractor shall provide adequate circuit for traffic flow
                        around construction areas, control speed of construction
                        vehicles through road safety and training of drivers, provide
                        adequate signage, barriers and flag persons for traffic control.
                        If there are traffic jams during construction, measures shall
                        be taken to relieve the congestion with the assistance of
                        traffic police. Safety of workers undertaking various
                        operations during construction will be ensured by providing
                        helmets, masks, safety goggles, etc. One Qualified Safety
                        Officer and one Safety Supervisor must be available in the
                        contractor’s working team for the entire construction period.

 Clause 111.8           Sanitation & Waste Disposal in Construction Camp

                        The Contractor shall ensure that construction camps are
                        located at a distance of minimum 200m from water sources.
                        Special attention shall be paid to the sanitary conditions of the
                        camps. The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient measures
                        are taken i.e. provision of garbage tanks and sanitation
                        facilities. Waste in septic tanks shall be cleaned periodically.
                        Garbage shall be collected in four soakage pits at each
                        construction site and disposed of daily. The Contractor shall
                        provide adequate measures for the health care of workers
                        and arrange their regular medical check-up to ensure that
                        they do not suffer from any communicable disease. At every
                        workplace, good & sufficient water supply will be maintained
                        to avoid waterborne / water related diseases. If any pits are
                        dug at construction / camp sites which are not filled and then
                        may turn into mosquito breeding sites during monsoons,
                        either these shall be filled up properly so that no water
                        accumulates or sprayed frequently with pesticides to prevent
                        mosquito breeding.

 Clause 111.9           Substance Hazardous to Health

                        The Contractor shall not use or generate any material in the
                        works, which is hazardous to the health of persons, animals
                        or vegetation. Where it is necessary to use some such
                        substance which can cause injury to the health of the
                                        174
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        workers, the Contractor shall provide suitable protective
                        clothing or appliances to his workers, viz. earplugs, helmets
                        or dust masks.

 Clause 111.10          Any     structural damage     caused     to    the  existing
                        roads/structures by the Contractor’s construction equipment
                        shall be made good without any extra cost.

 Clause 111.11          Use of Nuclear Gauges

                        Nuclear gauges shall be used only where permitted by the
                        Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a
                        copy of the regulations governing the safe use of nuclear
                        gauges he intends to employ and shall abide by such
                        regulations. Without written approval, no such equipment
                        shall be used at any level of the work.

 Clause 111.12          Environmental Monitoring

                        In order to carry out periodic checks, environmental
                        monitoring will be carried out by the Engineer as per schedule
                        and if any parameter is found above the acceptable
                        standards, mitigation measures / control measures as
                        decided by the Engineer shall be complied with by the
                        Contractor.

 Clause 111.13          Protection of Existing Trees
                        Some of the existing trees within the right of way are likely to
                        be cut down by the Employer prior to handing over of the site
                        to the contractor.

                        The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to ensure
                        safety and protection of the remaining trees from any action
                        whatsoever relating to his construction operations in the
                        adjoining areas.

                        Giant neighbourhood trees recognized locally as important
                        shall be preserved and engineering designs modified to
                        accommodate these wherever possible.

                        Adequate supply of fuel (Kerosene, LPG) shall be provided to
                        the construction labourers to avoid felling of trees for cooking
                        and other household activities.

 Clause 111.14          Disposal of Materials Outside Work Site

                        Notwithstanding other relevant provisions in the contract, the
                        excess material generated by dismantling, excavation, waste
                        material and lubricants, used oil, gasoline and other such
                        substance etc., shall be removed from site outside the right of
                        way at regular intervals and site shall kept clean from all such
                        disposable materials. Grease, cotton and other waste
                        construction materials shall be disposed off in shallow

                                        175
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        soakage wells constructed at each construction site. Such
                        intervals shall not exceed one month under any
                        circumstances. The selection of the disposal site shall be the
                        responsibility of the Contractor and he shall ensure that the
                        selected site does not result in any claim for damages to the
                        Employer or violation of any existing laws.
 Clause 111.15          Compliance with the foregoing will not relieve the Contractor
                        of any responsibility for complying with the requirements of
                        any highway authority in respect of the roads used by him.

 CLAUSE 112             Arrangement for Traffic During Construction

 Clause 112.1           General

                        Delete the last sentence and add the following:

                        “Two weeks before undertaking work which would involve any
                        obstruction whatsoever to traffic, the Contractor shall submit,
                        for the Engineer’s approval, a Traffic Control Plan in
                        accordance with IRC: SP: 55 – 2001. The traffic Control Plan
                        should also comply with the requirements given in Additional
                        technical Specifications.

                        The plan shall include:

                           i) Typical drawings for temporary diversions in
                           accordance with Sub-Clause 112.3
                           ii) Typical details of arrangements for construction under
                           traffic including details of traffic arrangements proposed to
                           be in place after the cessation of work each day in
                           accordance with Additional technical Specifications.

                        Special consideration shall be given in the preparation of the
                        Traffic Control Plan for the safety of pedestrian and workers
                        and delineation of the roadway at night.

                        Temporary diversions will be constructed only with the
                        approval of the Engineer”.


 Clause 112.2           Add at the end of second paragraph as follows:

                        For portions with concentric widening and strengthening of
                        the existing carriageway where part width of the existing
                        carriageway is proposed to be used for passage of traffic,
                        paved shoulder in a width of at least 2.5m shall be provided
                        on one side of the existing road with the following minimum
                        requirements to be provided by the contractor:
                             i) At least one 5.5m lane to remain open to traffic at all
                             times

                            ii) The surface used by the through traffic shall at all
                            times be a firm all weather compacted surface free of pot

                                        176
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                            holes and other defects

                            iii) The maximum continuous length over which
                            construction under traffic diversion may take place shall
                            be limited to 750 m. However, for longer stretches
                            passing places at least 50 m long shall be provided at
                            every 0.75 km interval.

                            iv) The treatment to paved shoulders shall consist of
                            providing 150mm thick granular base course (grading –I,
                            Table 400-1, as per clause-401) covered by 225 mm
                            thick wet mix macadam layer, 50 mm Bituminous
                            Macadam (Grading-II) and treated with 25 mm SDBC
                            (Grading-II).

                            v) Construction activity shall be restricted to only one
                            side of the existing road.

                        In case of eccentric widening of existing two lane to four/six
                        lane, the additional two lanes shall be constructed first upto
                        the stage of Bituminous Concrete / Cement Concrete
                        Pavement for a minimum length of 2 km. and traffic diverted
                        to it and only thereafter the required treatment to the existing
                        carriageway including construction of median shall be taken
                        up.

                        “Where it is absolutely necessary that the camber of the
                        existing road is to be corrected before the commencement of
                        the additional carriageway in order to avoid ponding of rain
                        water, the same uni-directional camber has to be provided
                        first”.

 Clause 112.3           Add the following at the end of this Clause.
                        Where the new highway crosses or joins with an existing
                        state highway, or an established road or cart track, the
                        highway, road or cart track shall be kept open at all times. In
                        case the Engineer specifically orders to construct and
                        maintain diversion as described below:

                                                           Earthen
                                                            Shoulde
                                           Carriage-w                       Pavement composition
  SL.             Type of Road                              rs Width
                                            ay Width                            (Compacted)
  No.                                                         each
                                                               side
   1.           National Highways             14.0 m         2.5 m           200mm granular sub base
                                                                           (grading-I, Table 400-1 as pe
                                                                                    clause 401).
                                                                           225mm W.M.M (as per claus
                                                                                        406).
                                                                                    50 mm BM.
                                                                                   25 mm SDBC.
   2.             State Highways              7.0 m         2.5 m            200 mm granular sub-base
                                                                           (grading-I, Table 400-1 as pe
                                                                                    clause 401)
                                                                           225 mm W.M.M(as per claus
                                        177
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                 ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                                                                                            406)
                                                                                         50 mm BM.
                                                                                      25 mm SDBC.
   3.      Major District Roads and other         7.0 m        1.0 m           150 mm granular sub-base
                       Roads                                                 (grading-I, Table 400-1 as per
                                                                                      clause 401)
                                                                              225 mm W.M.M (as per claus
                                                                            406), 50 mm BM.
                                                                                     25 mm SDBC.

                 The granular sub-base/base course and Bituminous
                 Macadam with prime coat over WMM will be executed as
                 per clause 401, 404 and 502 & 504. Clause 112.6 of the
                 Technical Specifications shall govern payment for these
                 works.

                  Drainage should be provided as directed by the Engineer.

                  The alignment and longitudinal section of diversion including
                  junctions and temporary cross drainage provisions shall be as
                  approved by the Engineer”.

 Clause 112.6     2nd Paragraph is to be replaced with the following :

                  The Construction of Temporary diversion including temporary cross
                  drainage structures, shall be measured as individual item quantities
                  and the unit contract rates of those items shall be inclusive of full
                  compensation for construction (including supply of material, labour,
                  tools etc.,) maintenance, final dismantling, and disposal.

                  The execution of works of Earthwork, GSB, WMM, BM and SDBC,
                  works of temporary cross drainage structures, traffic signs,
                  barricading, markings and other safety measures required for
                  temporary diversion as described in Clause 112.2 shall be
                  executed, measured and paid in the relevant items of work in the
                  contract. The contractor shall replace torn out, damaged and stolen
                  equipment immediately.

 CLAUSE 114       Scope of Rates for Different Items of Work

 Clause 114.2     Item (ii) of Clause 114.2 shall read as follows:

                  “A detailed resources based construction programme (using
                  computerized critical path network method) in a form which
                  facilitates control of the progress of the works and consequences of
                  any changes in terms of time. The programme shall also include
                  detailed network activities for the submission and approval of
                  materials, procurement of critical materials and equipment,
                  fabrication of special products/ equipment and their installation and
                  testing and for all activities of the Contractor that are likely to affect
                  the progress of work, etc. including updating all such activities on
                  the basis of decisions taken at the periodic site review meetings or
                  as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit data via
                  electronic media and hard copy to the Engineer in a form readily

                                            178
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                  compatible with the Engineer’s planning system.”

                  Add the following as item (xvii) for sub-clause 114.2:

                  The Contractor shall prepare detailed working drawings for each
                  structure as required, on the basis of the drawings given in Bid
                  Documents and get them approved by the Engineer. The drawings
                  shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 8 weeks before
                  commencement of construction of the structures.


                  Add the following as item (xvii) for sub-clause 114.2:

                  “Monthly progress report in a format acceptable to the Engineer.
                  The report shall state the progress which has been achieved
                  compared with the planned progress, illustrate delays in proportion
                  to the progress planned, analyze the consequences and state
                  planned corrective measures. Intermediate progress reports may
                  also be required.

                  The first issue of the detailed construction programme including the
                  detailed description of the system and the procedures shall be
                  submitted to the Engineer for acceptance not later than 28 days
                  after the date of receipt of the letter of acceptance.”

                  The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval & consent,
                  the updated & revised programme at every six months interval or
                  as such as directed by the Engineer. The updated & revised
                  programme shall be submitted showing the actual progress
                  achieved (physical & financial) and the effects of the progress
                  achieved on the timing of the remaining work including any change
                  to the sequence of the activities.

 Clause 114.4     Add the following as Clause 114.4

                  “If any work executed by the Contractor does not meet the
                  specifications, it shall be deemed as rejected. The Engineer, in his
                  sole discretion, may consider a proposal by the Contractor to retain
                  an element or part of such work. The Contractor’s proposal shall be
                  supported by calculations, drawings and other data to prove the
                  soundness of the proposal and shall clearly describe the additional
                  measures required to ensure the intended performance of the work.
                  Rectification / remedial work to bring such work to acceptable
                  standard shall be executed by contractor at his cost.”.

 CLAUSE 115       Methodology and Sequence Of Work

                  The Clause shall read as follows:

 Clause 115.1     Submission of Method statement

                  The Contractor shall submit a method statement. The method
                  statement shall be submitted in two parts.

                                        179
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                  The General part of the method statement shall describe the
                  Contractor’s proposals regarding preliminary works, common
                  facilities, and items that require consideration at the early stage of
                  the contract. The General part shall be issued along with the first
                  issue of the construction programme (refer clause 114.2) and shall
                  include information on :

                  a)   Sources of materials like coarse aggregate and fine
                       aggregate, quantity and quality of materials available in
                       different sources;
                  b)   Sources of manufactured materials like cement, steel,
                       reinforcement, prestressing strands and bearings. Wherever
                       possible the Contractor shall identify at least two sources for
                       each of the items; he shall also submit samples/test
                       certificates of recently manufactured materials for the
                       consideration of the Engineer.
                  c)   Locations of site facilities like batching plant, hot mix plant,
                       aggregate processing plant, etc.
                  d)   Details of facilities/approaches for transportation of personnel,
                       equipment and materials like concrete for construction of
                       pavements, foundations and substructures in river bed.
                  e)   Information on procedures to be adopted by the Contractor for
                       prevention and mitigation of negative environmental impact
                       due to construction activities.

                  f)   Any other information required by the Engineer subsequent to
                       the scrutiny of the method statement submitted along with the
                       Bid.

                  The general part of the Q.A. Programme shall accompany the
                  method statement.

                  The special part of the method statement shall be submitted to the
                  Engineer by the Contractor for each important item of work like
                  construction of embankments and subgrade, pavements, pile
                  foundations, concreting, prestressing, repair and rehabilitation of
                  existing structures, concrete superstructure and for any other item
                  as directed by the Engineer. These statements shall be submitted
                  at least 4 weeks in advance of the commencement of the activity or
                  item of work, unless otherwise stipulated in the contract. The
                  statement shall give information on :

                  i)   Details of personnel both for execution and quality control of the
                       work.
                  ii) Equipment deployment with details of number of units, capacity,
                       standby arrangements.
                  iii) Sequence of construction, details of temporary or enabling
                       works like diversions, cofferdams, formwork including
                       specialised formwork for superstructure, details of borrow areas,
                       method of construction of embankment and subgrade,
                       pavements, piles, concreting procedures, details of proprietary
                       processes and products (e.g. details of prestressing systems,
                       proprietary piling systems, bearings, expansion joints etc.) and
                       details of equipment to be deployed. Wherever necessary,
                                         180
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      technical literature, design calculations and drawings shall be
                      included in the method statement.
                  iv) Testing and acceptance procedures including documentation.
                  v) Special part of the Q.A. Programme referred in clause 105.3 for
                      the particular item of work shall be submitted along with the
                      method statement for the concerned activity.
                  vi) The Engineer shall examine and approve the method statement
                      or direct the Contractor to re-submit the statement with required
                      modifications. The modified statement shall be submitted within
                      14 days after receipt of Engineer’s comments.

                  The sole responsibility for the safety and adequacy of the methods
                  adopted by the Contractor shall rest on the Contractor irrespective
                  of any approval given by the Engineer.

 Clause 115.2     Approval of proprietary product/ process/ system

                  Only proprietary products proven by international usage in
                  comparable projects shall be permitted to be used. Fully
                  authenticated details of licensing and collaboration arrangement
                  shall be submitted by the manufacturer, where relevant.

                  Within 90 days of award of work the Contractor shall submit the
                  following information for all proprietary products for approval by the
                  Engineer.

                  i)     Name of manufacturer of product/ process/ system.
                         Complete details of the manufacturer of the product/
                         process/system shall be furnished. Details of projects where
                         similar product/process/ system have been successfully used
                         shall be furnished. Authenticated copies of license/
                         collaboration agreement shall be furnished.

                  ii)    General features of the product/product process/ system.
                         Detailed write-up with methods statement shall be furnished
                         for each product/ process/ System. This shall include
                         complete working drawings & installation drawings, technical
                         specifications covering fabrication, materials, system of
                         corrosion, protection etc.,

                  iii)   Details of product development and development testing.

                  iv)    Acceptance test and criteria.

                         Manufacturer shall submit a quality assurance system
                         document. Details of acceptance test and criteria of
                         acceptance shall be furnished in this document.

                  v)     Installation procedure.

                  vi)    Maintenance procedure and schedule.

                  vii)   Warranty proposal.

                                          181
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                  The Engineer may order any additional tests required under
                  relevant codal specifications for the purpose of accepting the
                  product. The manufacturer shall make the facility for such
                  additional tests available. The charges of these additional tests
                  shall be borne by the Contractor.

 Clause 116       Crushed Stone Aggregates

                  This clause shall read as under:

                  “Where the terms crushed gravel/shingle, crushed stone, broken
                  stone, stone aggregate or aggregate appear in any part of the
                  Tender document, Drawings issued for work, they refer to
                  aggregates obtained through the use of Cone crusher, Vertical
                  Shaft Impactor and vibratory screens of suitable capacity.”

 Clause 121        Field Laboratory

 Clause 121.1      Description

                   Replace the words “shown in the drawing in the first sentence of
                   first paragraph of this clause with the words “per provisions
                   indicated in this Clause and at a location approved by the
                   Engineer”.

                   Replace “electric supply etc.,” to the second sentence of first
                   paragraph by “including uninterrupted power supply etc.,”

                   Delete the first sentence of second paragraph “The floor
                   space………in the drawing” and substitute the following.

                   “The floor space required for the field laboratory shall be not less
                            than 500 sqm.”

                   The fourth sentence of second paragraphs “The furnishing in
                   Table 100-2” shall read as under.

                   A good semi furnished office accommodation shall be provided to
                   the Material Engineers of the Supervision Team as per the
                   direction of the Engineer.

 Clause 121.2      Add the following at the end of the clause

                   “There shall also be a provision for a concrete paved area for
                   storing samples adjacent to the laboratory, of about 300 sqm. And
                   another 200 sqm. Shall be suitably roofed with open sides giving
                   protection against sun and rain.

                   Within 14 (fourteen) days of the commencement date, the
                   Contractor shall prepare and submit a layout plan and details of
                   the laboratory building and make/supplier of equipment to the
                   Engineer for his approval.

                                         182
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                   The field laboratory to be provided under the Contract shall be
                   handed over to the Engineer in finished and fully equipped
                   condition not later than 2 months after the receipt of Notice to
                   Commence work, and the field laboratory with all
                   equipment/instrument shall be to the entire satisfaction of the
                   Engineer. During this 2 months period starting from the Notice to
                   Commence, work, the laboratory tests shall be performed in
                   another laboratory proposed by the Contractor and approved by
                   the Engineer.
                   This facility will be provided and maintained by the Contractor, as
                   incidental to work and no separate payment shall be made for this
                   item”.

 Clause 121.3      Laboratory Equipment

                   This Clause shall read as under :

                   “The following items of laboratory equipment procured from
                   reputed manufacturers duly approved by the Engineer shall be
                   provided in the field laboratory.

                   Laboratory equipment shall be provided by the Contractor for the
                   laboratory sufficient to carry out all the field and site quality
                   acceptance testing required in the Specifications. List of
                   Laboratory equipment to be provided and maintained by the
                   Contractor for the Field laboratory shall be as in Table 100 – 3.



 Table 100-3 List of Laboratory Equipment to be provided and Maintained for
                               Field Laboratory

             A.   General
                       i) Balance
                  a
                  a)        10 kg capacity semi-self indicating type – Accuracy 1
            gm    )
                         Electronic                                                   1 No.
                         Mechanical                                                   1 No.
                  b
                  b)      500 gm capacity – Accuracy 0.01 gm
                  )
                       Electronic                                                     1 No.
                       Mechanical (semi-self indicating)                              1 No.
       c)   Chemical balance (electronic) 100 gm capacity
            Accuracy 0.001 gm                                                         1 No.
       d)   Pan balance 5 kg capacity
            Accuracy 0.5 gm.                                                          3
                                                                                      Nos.
       e)   Platform scale – 300 kg capacity                                          1 No.


                                         183
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                     ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

         f)    Triple beam balance – 25 kg capacity
               Accuracy 1 gm                                                                   2
                                                                                               Nos.
 ii)     Ovens electrically operated, thermostatically              controlled   (including
         thermometer), stainless steel interior
         a)    Temperature range ambient to 300° C, sensitivity 1° C, capacity 120             1 No.
               litre.
         b)    Temperature range ambient to 150° C, sensitivity 1° C, capacity 250             1 No.
               litre.
 iii)    Sieves : as per
         a)    Test sieve set 450 mm internal diameter. as per IS complete with lid            1 Set
               and pan of hole sizes 75 mm, 63 mm, 53 mm, 37.5 mm, 26.5 mm,
               13.2 mm, 9.5 mm, 6.7 mm, and 4.75 mm.
         b)    Test sieve set 200 mm internal diameter (brass frame and steel/or               2 Set
               brass wire cloth mesh) as per IS complete with lid and pan of
               aperture sizes 2.36 mm, 2 mm, 1.18 mm, 600micron, 425micron,
               300micron, 150micron and 75micron.
 iv)     Sieve shaker capable of taking 200 mm and 450 mm diameter sieves                      1 No.
         electrically operated with time switch assembly
 v)      200 tonnes compression testing machine electric cum manually operated                2 Nos.
         fitted with three gauges 0-2000 KN x 10 KN, 0-1000 KN x 5 KN and 0-500
         KN x 2 KN
 vi)     Stop watches 1/5 second accuracy                                                      2
                                                                                               Nos.
 vii)    Glassware comprising beakers, pipettes, dishes, measuring cylinders (100             1 Doz.
         to 1000 cc capacity) glass rods and funnels, glass thermometers range 0°             Each
         C to 100° C and metallic thermometers range up to 300° C.
 viii)   Hot plates 200 mm diameter (1500 Watt)                                                6
                                                                                               Nos.
 ix)     Enamel trays
         a)    600 mm x 450 mm x 50 mm                                                         6
                                                                                               Nos.
         b)    450 mm x 300 mm x 40 mm                                                         6
                                                                                               Nos.
         c)    300 mm x 250 mm x 40 mm                                                         6
                                                                                               Nos.
         d)    Circular plates of 250 mm diameter                                              6
                                                                                               Nos.
 x)      Water still, 3 litre/hour. with fittings and accessories                              1 Set
 xi)     Aluminium Tins
         a)    50 mm x 30 mm                                                                  36
                                                                                              Nos.
         b)    55 mm x 35 mm                                                                  36
                                                                                              Nos.


                                             184
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                   ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

            c)    70 mm x 45 mm                                                             36
                                                                                            Nos.
            d)    70 mm x 50 mm                                                             36
                                                                                            Nos.
            e)    80 mm x 50 mm                                                             36
                                                                                            Nos.
 xii)       Riffle box of slot size 50 mm as per ASTM C-136                                  1 No.
 xiii)      Spatula set of 100 mm and 200 mm long                                            3
                                                                                             Sets
 xiv)       Water testing kit                                                                1 Set
 xv)        First aid box                                                                    1 Set




B.          For Soils and Aggregates

       i)    Liquid limit and plastic limit

             a)    Liquid limit device with Cone Penetrometer and as per IS : 2720          2 Nos.
             b)    Single point LL device                                                   1 No.
             c)    Moisture content cans                                                    50 Nos.
             d)    Ground glass plate with rounded edges 600 mm x 600 mm x 10               2 Nos.
                   mm
 ii)         Hydrometer analysis
             a)    High speed stirrer with stainless steel beaker                           1 No.
             b)    Soil hydrometer set including jar to ASTM : E-100 and C-422              1 Set
 iii)        Sampling pipettes fitted with pressure and suction inlets, 10ml.               1 Set
             Capacity
 iv)         Laboratory compaction
             a)    Compaction apparatus (Proctor) to the requirements of IS–T99             1 No.
                   complete with collar, base plate and 2.5 kg rammer (automatic
                   with counter).
             b)    Compaction apparatus (heavy) to the requirements of IS–T180              3 Nos.
                   complete with collar, base plate and 4.5kg rammer (automatic
                   with counter).
             c)    Vibratory hammer to the requirements of Test BS : 14                     1 Set
 v)          Sand pouring cylinder (150 mm) with conical funnel and top and base            4 Sets
             plate (with 152 mm diameter of sand cone) to the requirements of
             ASTM : D 1556
 vi)         Sampling tins with lids 100 mm diameter x 75 mm height. 1/2 kg                 30 Nos.
             capacity
 vii)        Laboratory C.B.R. testing equipment to the requirements of IS and              1 Set
             consisting of following:
             a)    Floor mounted electro-mechanical load frame 5 tonne capacity             1 No.

                                              185
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                with automatic strain control
           b)   CBR moulds complete with collar, base plate, etc.                        18 Nos.
           c)   Swell stands for holding dial gauge                                      9 Nos.
           d)   CBR plunger with penetration dial gauge holder                           1 No.
           e)   Surcharge weight with central hole of 2.5 kg weight                      40 Nos.
           f)   Spacer disc with handle                                                  2 Nos.
           g)   Perforated brass swell plate with adjustable cap on handle               18 Nos.
           h)   Soaking tank for accommodating 9 CBR moulds                              1 No.
           i)   High tensile steel calibrated proving rings of 1000 kg, 2500 kg          1 Set
                and 5000 kg capacity                                                     Each
           j)   Dial gauge, 25 mm travel-0.01 mm/division                                12 Nos.
 viii)     Standard Penetration Test equipment (IS: 2131) including solid cone           1 No.
           attachment to fit drive and
 ix)       Dynamic Cone Penetrometer equipment (IS: 4968)                                2 Nos.
 x)        Nuclear gauge for density and moisture content determination to the           2 Sets
           requirements of AASHTO : 238 and 239
 xi)       Balloon Testing apparatus for moisture testing                                1 Set
 xii)      Speedy moisture tester complete with carrying case and supply of              2 Nos.
           reagent
 xiii)     Sand equivalent apparatus complete along with chemicals to the                1 Set
           requirements of IS : 2720-1966 (Part XXIX)
 xiv)      Reagent grade Sodium Sulphate for soundness test of aggregate                 30
           chemical Sodium Sulphate to the requirements of AASHTO : T – 104              KGs.
 xv)       Flakiness test gauge to BS : 812                                              1 No.
 xvi)      Post-hole auger with extension                                                1 Set
 xvii)     Core cutter apparatus 10cm diameter, 10/15cm length height complete           1 Set
           with 20kg hammer
 xviii)    Flakiness and elongation test gauge                                           1 Set
 xix)      Standard measures of 30, 15, 3 litre capacity along with tamping rod          1 Set
 xx)       Unconfined compression test apparatus                                         1 Set

C.        For Bitumen and Bituminous Mixes
 i)       Constant temperature bath for accommodating bitumen test specimen,         1 No.
          electrically operated, and thermostatically controlled, stainless steel
          interior, 50 litre capacity, temperature range ambient to 80° C

 ii)      Bitumen penetrometer automatic type including adjustable weight            1 Set
          arrangement, and needles to the requirements of AASHTO : T - 49

 iii)     Centrifuge type motorized bitumen extraction apparatus to the              1 Set

                                            186
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

         requirements of AASHTO : T - 164 with stock of solvent & filter paper

 iv)     Bitumen laboratory mixer planetary action, 2 litre capacity, including      1 No.
         required accessories electrically operated and fitted with heating jacket

 v)      Marshall compaction apparatus to the requirements of AASHTO : 245           1 Set
         as per ASTM T 1559-62 and complete with electrically operated
         automatic loading unit, compaction pedestal, heating unit, head
         breaking assembly, flow meter, load transfer bar, specimen moulds
         100 mm diameter with base plate, collars, specimen extractor,
         compaction hammer 4.53kg x 457 mm fall (excluding constant
         temperature bath)

 v)      a)   Modified set for DBM                                                   1 Set

 vi)     Dial type thermometer reading 0-200° C range, accuracy 2° C                 2 Nos.

 vii)    Thin Film Oven Test apparatus to the requirements of AASHTO : T-            1 No.
         179, including accessories

 viii)   Ring and Ball Apparatus as per IS : 1205 – 1978                             1 Set

 ix)     Asphalt Institute Vacuum Viscometer as per IS : 1206 (Part II) – 1978       1 Set

 x)      BS U–Tube Modified Reverse Flow Viscometer IS : 1206 (Part III) –           1 Set
         1978

 xi)     Apparatus for Determination of Ductility Test as per IS 1208 – 1978         1 Set

 xii)    Pensky – Martens closed Tester for testing flash and fire point as per      1 Set
         IS : 1209 – 1978

 xiii)   Apparatus for Float Test IS : 1210-1978                                     1 Set

 xiv)    Apparatus for Determination of water content (Dean and Shark                1 Set
         Method) IS : 1211-1978

 xv)     Apparatus for Determination of Loss on Heating IS : 1212-1978               1 Set

 xvi)    Apparatus of Determination of Specific Gravity IS : 1202-1978               1 Set

D.       For control of profile and surface evenness
 i)      String line arrangement for paving with sensor pavers                       4 Sets
 ii)     ROMDAS-Longitudinal profile calibration device                              1 No.
 iii)    Towed Fifth Wheel Bump Integrator                                           1 No.
 iv)     Camber templates 2-lane/3-lane straight run cross-section as approved       4 Sets.
         by the Engineer
E.       For Cement, Cement Concrete and Materials
 i)       Vicat needle apparatus for setting time with plungers, as per              1Set
          IS-269-1968
 ii)      Moulds


                                          187
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                 ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


          a)    150 mm x 300 mm high cylinder with capping component along            48 Nos.
                with the capping set and compound as per IS specification
          b)    Cube 150 mm moulds as per IS specification                           36 Nos.
          c)   Cube moulds of 50 sqcm 70mm x 70mm for cement testing                  18 Nos.
          d)   Cube moulds of 50mm x 50mm                                             18 Nos.
          e)   Beams 750 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm moulds                                  18 Nos.
 iii)     High frequency mortar cube vibrator for cement testing                      1 No.
 iv)      Concrete mixer power driven, 1 cu. ft. capacity                             1 No.

 v)       Variable frequency and amplitude vibrating table size 1m as per the         1 No.
          relevant British Standard

 vi)      Flakiness index test apparatus as per B.S. 812                              1 No.

 vii)     Elongation index test apparatus as per B.S. 812                             1 No.

 viii)    Aggregate crushing value impact test apparatus as per B.S. 812              1 No.

 ix)      Los-Angeles Abrasion apparatus as per IS 2386 (Part 4) 1963                 1 No.

 x)       Flow table as per IS 712- 1973                                              4 Nos.

 xi)      Equipment for slump test (C-143)/compacting factor Apparatus                4 Nos.
          complete

 xii)     Equipment for determination of specific gravity for fine and coarse         4 Nos.
          aggregate as per IS : 2386 – 1963 (Part 3)

 xiii)    Flexural attachment to compression testing machine                          2 Nos.

 xiv)     Core cutting machine with 10cm diameter diamond cutting                     1 No.

 xv)      Needle vibrator                                                             1 No.

 xvi)     Air entrainment meter as per ASTM : C – 231                                 1 No.

 xvii)    0.5 cft, 1 cft cylinder for checking bulk density of aggregate with         As reqd.
          tamping rod

 xviii)   Soundness testing apparatus for cement (Le Chatlier’s principle)            1 Set

 xix)     Chemicals solutions and consumables                                         As reqd.

 xx)      Chloride testing kit for chemical analysis of chloride content              1 No.

 xxi)     ION exchange kit for rapid determination of sulphate content                1 No.

 xxii)    Water still                                                                 1 No.

 xxiii)   Concrete permeability apparatus                                             1 Set

                                           188
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


       All equipment shall confirm to accepted international standards and shall be
       subject to the approval of the Engineer.

       The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of adequately
       experienced and qualified laboratory staff in sufficient number to be able to
       meet all testing requirements to the approval of the Engineer, and for all
       transportation of staff, testing equipment and samples necessary to allow the
       testing to be performed in a time scale compatible with the needs of the Site.

       The Contractor shall arrange to maintain the laboratory in satisfactory
       manner and will carry stocks of spare equipment and laboratory
       consumables until the issue of Taking over Certificate.

       Full complement of listed equipment procured from an internationally reputed
       manufacturer after procurement and approval of Engineer shall be incidental
       to the work and no payment shall be made to the Contractor.”

       Clause 121.4        This clause stands deleted.

       Clause 121.5        This clause stands deleted.

       Clause 121.6        This clause stands deleted.

       Clause 121.7        This clause stands deleted.

       CLAUSE 123          PROVIDING AND MAINTAINING WIRELESS
                           COMMUNICATION SYSTEM – Deleted and replaced
                           with the following.

       Clause 123A         PROVIDING AND MAINTAINING MOBILE PHONE
                           SERVICE

       Clause 123A.1       Scope

                           The work covers the provision and maintenance of
                           Mobile phone communication service to the Engineer /
                           the Employer as described under Bill of Quantities.

       Clause123A.2(a)     Description

                           The Mobile phones shall be GSM type and may be
                           Nokia, Samsung or Equivalent and model as decided by
                           the Engineer. The number of mobile phones to be
                           provided by the contractor shall be decided by the
                           Engineer, out of the total provision in the Bill of
                           Quantities and indicated in writing. The cost of each
                           Mobile phone is limited to Rs. 15,000/- including taxes.

                           The contractor shall arrange to supply, within 15 days
                           from the date of approval by the Engineer, mobile
                           phones with SIM cards as indicated above. The SIM
                           card shall be Post Paid type and having National
                           Roaming, CLIP, SMS, etc. and from an approved
                                         189
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                           service provider like Cell One, Airtel, BPL, TaTa or
                           equivalent… The usage charge of each mobile is limited
                           Rs. 3,000/- per month including cost towards rent,
                           roaming charges, etc for the outgoing call mobile
                           phones and Rs.1000/- per month for within group cell
                           system. But excluding the cost of Mobile phone, repair,
                           replacement (if any) and maintenance.

       123.A.2 (b)         Maintenance :

                           The Mobile phones shall be maintained in smooth
                           working condition. All expenses towards the owning,
                           operating and maintenance cost shall be born by the
                           contractor. In the event of any software, hardware or
                           SIM card problems, the Contractor shall provide
                           substitute Mobile phone(s) immediately.

                           The Contractor shall arrange to maintain the mobile
                           phone and its accessories to the entire project period.
                           He shall replace the accessory which goes out of order
                           and attend to all repairs necessary for keeping the
                           system in satisfactory working condition.

                           If the Contractor fails to carry out the required
                           maintenance as directed by the Engineer at any stage of
                           work, an amount of Rs. 300 per day or part thereof shall
                           be debited to the Contractor for the period of phone out
                           of service.

       Clause 123A.3       Measurement for Payment

                           The Measurement for provision of Mobile phone service
                           to the Engineer/Supervisory staff / the Employer and
                           maintaining the same shall be on monthly basis and
                           payment shall be made on lump sum unit basis for every
                           month after providing the monthly paid bills. As per the
                           Engineer’s directions, some of the Group Cell Sim Cards
                           may be provided to the contractor for important
                           communication points such as hot mix plant, batching
                           plant, laying site etc. and to the key personnel of the
                           contractor. Payment shall be borne by the contractor
                           only. If the Contractor fails to carry over the required
                           maintenance as directed by Engineer at any stage of
                           work an amount of Rs.300/- per day or part thereof shall
                           be debited to the Contractor for the period of phone out
                           of Services. On the issue of taking over certificate the
                           cellular phones shall be the property of the Contractor.

       Clause 123A.4       Rates

                           The Contract Unit rates for supply and maintenance of
                           Mobile phone service shall cover all the expenses
                           towards the cost of GSM mobile phones of approved
                           make and model with all standard accessories like cell
                                       190
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                           charger, cover, registration charges, etc. and cost for
                           arranging post paid SIM card of approved service
                           provider, monthly usage charges, repair and
                           maintenance including replacement cost, if any.

       CLAUSE 124          PROVIDING AND MAINTAINING VEHICLES FOR THE
                           ENGINEER

                           The heading of this clause shall read as under:

                           “PROVIDING AND MAINTAINING VEHICLES FOR
                           THE EMPLOYER AND ENGINEER”

       Clause 124.1        Scope

                           This Clause shall be read as under:

                           “The work covers providing and maintaining
                           multipurpose utility vehicle (MUV) or sports utility vehicle
                           (SUV) are equivalent for use by the Engineer and the
                           Employer as described under the Bill of Quantities.”

       Clause 124.2        Description

                           Paragraph 1 of this Clause shall be read as under:

                           “The (MUV) multipurpose utility vehicle or sports utility
                           vehicle (SUV) are equivalent shall be new A/C vehicles
                           on hire charges basis, having cylinder capacity more
                           than 2000 cc for Engineer, Employer and their
                           representatives. The number of vehicles to be provided
                           by the contractor shall be decided by the Engineer in
                           consultation with the Employer out of the total provision
                           in the Bill of Quantities and indicated in writing.”



       Clause 124.4        Withdrawal of Vehicles

                           The first sentence for this Clause shall be read as
                           under:

                           The contractor shall withdraw particular vehicle/vehicles
                           for the non-use by the Engineer/Employer if so directed
                           by the Engineer/Employer

       Clause 124.5        Measurement of Payments

                           The Payment for providing and maintaining new vehicle
                           on hire basis shall be on vehicle day basis calculated on
                           actual number of days the vehicle provided in
                           satisfactory working order. If the total usage per vehicle
                           exceeds 4000 Km per month, an amount of Rs.4 per

                                         191
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                           Km. shall be paid to the contractor for the extra Km used
                           over and above the initial 4000 Km per month. A log
                           book shall be maintained in each vehicle by the
                           Contractor in the form acceptable to the Engineer. No
                           Payment shall be made for the period of withdrawal as
                           per Clause 124.4 irrespective of the fact whether vehicle
                           was available or not. No payment shall be made for
                           vehicle break down days, Contractor should arrange for
                           a substitute vehicle of above mentioned capacity for the
                           break down vehicles immediately. Not operated days are
                           not considerable for payment.

       Clause 124.6        Rate

                           Add the words “and Employer” after the word “Engineer”
                           in second line.

       CLAUSE 126          Supply of Video Cassettes and Digital CDs (VCDs /
                           DVDs)

       Clause 126.1        The clause shall read as:

                           “The work consists of taking video films of important
                           activities.

                                The Contractor shall arrange to make complete
                                video coverage of the entire existing contract stretch
                                before start of actual execution of work.
                                Video filming of important activities of the work as
                                directed by the Engineer during the currency of the
                                project shall be carried out and shown to Engineer.
                                Video filming of the substantially completed sections
                                of the project.
                                Video filming of the project after final completion of
                                the work.
                                Editing them to a video film of playing time not less
                                than 60 minutes and upto 180 minutes as directed
                                by the Engineer. It shall contain narration of the
                                activities in English by a competent narrator. The
                                edition of the video film and the script for narration
                                shall be as approved by the engineer.
                           The video CDs / DVDs shall be of acceptable quality
                           and the film shall be capable of producing colour
                           pictures.

       Clause 126.2        Measurements for payment

                           The clause shall read as:

                           The measurement shall be number of sets of edited
                           VCDs each with four copies thereof.

       Clause 126.3        Rates

                                        192
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                           This clause shall read as:

                           “The contract unit rate shall include all expenses for
                           making video films with the help of a professionally
                           competent photographer, editing, narration and supply
                           the final edited master VCDs along with four copies
                           thereof.

       SECTION 200         SITE CLEARANCE

       Clause 201          Clearing and Grubbing

       Clause 201.1        Scope

                           Replace with following paragraph:

                           “This work shall consist of cutting, removing and
                           disposing of all materials such as trees of girth up to 300
                           mm., bushes, shrubs, stumps, roots, grass, weeds etc.
                           and top soil minimum 100 mm but not exceeding
                           150mm in thickness, rubbish, etc., which in the opinion
                           of Engineer is unsuitable for incorporation in the work
                           including draining out stagnant water, if any, from the
                           area of road land, drains, cross drainage structures and
                           other area as specified in the drawings or as directed by
                           the Engineer. It shall include necessary excavation by
                           harrow discs or any other suitable equipment, back
                           filling the excavated area up to a maximum depth of
                           150mm and also complete filling of the pits resulting
                           from uprooting of trees & stumps by suitable/approved
                           soil and making the surface in proper grade by suitable
                           equipment and compacted by power roller to required
                           compaction as per Section 300. The work also includes
                           keeping the cleared material in stock pile within the
                           ROW not less than 500m in distance, keeping the stock
                           pile till completion of bituminous work, re-using the top
                           soil in turfing and disposal of unsuitable material.
                           Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in advance of
                           earthwork operations and in accordance with the
                           requirements of these specifications. Areas as well as
                           depth requiring clearing and grubbing shall be
                           determined by the Engineer”.

       Clause 201.3        Replace the 3rd paragraph with the following

                           “All Excavations below original ground level arising out
                           of the clearing and grubbing and also for removal of
                           trees, stumps, etc., shall be filled with suitable material
                           and compacted thoroughly so as to make the surface fit
                           for the next layers in accordance with the section 300 of
                           Specifications.”

       Clause 201.4        In the Second Paragraph, Replace “upto a lead of

                                        193
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                           1000m” with “all leads”

       Clause 201.5        Measurements for Payment

                           Replace the first sentence of the first paragraph with the
                           following

                           “Clearing and grubbing for road embankment, drains
                           and cross drainage structures shall be measured as
                           areas in plan basis in terms of hectares.”

                           Replace the last sentence of the first paragraph with the
                           following

                           “Cutting including removal of foundations of sign boards,
                           hoarding boards, concrete posts, kilometre/hectometre
                           stones, boundary stones, back filling to required
                           compaction up to general original ground level and of
                           any pits shall be measured and paid in respective item
                           of BOQ.”

       Clause 201.6        Rates

       Clause 201.6.1      Delete this clause and replace with the following

                           “The Contract unit rates for the various items of clearing
                           and grubbing shall be payment in full for carrying out the
                           required operations including full compensation for all
                           labour, materials, tools equipment and incidentals
                           necessary to complete the work. These will also include
                           cutting of trees and uprooting the stumps up to a girth of
                           300 including roots as well as stumps left over after
                           cutting of trees carried out by another agency,
                           excavation and back filling to required density,
                           excavation up to a maximum depth of 150mm and
                           backfilling to required compaction with suitable material
                           to restore the original ground level with all lifts and
                           leads.”

       Clause 201.6.2      “The Contract unit rate for cutting (including removal of
                           stumps and roots) of trees of girth above 300mm shall
                           include excavation and backfilling to required
                           compaction, handling, salvaging and stack piling and
                           disposing of the stocked materials with all lifts and
                           leads.”

       CLAUSE 202          DISMANTLING CULVERTS, BRIDGES AND OTHER
                           STRUCTURES / PAVEMENTS.

       Clause 202.3          Dismantling of Pavement

                             Add at the end of the 2nd para:


                                        194
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                             “The existing bituminous pavement surface, base and
                             sub-base courses shall be removed by ripping,
                             pavement breaker or any other suitable equipment, or
                             any other suitable means as approved by the
                             Engineer.

                             Dismantling of existing base, sub-base and surface
                             courses shall be measured by taking cross-sections at
                             200 m intervals before dismantling by making 30 cm
                             wide trench in full width and depth and computing the
                             volumes in cum. by the method of average
                             cross-sectional areas".

       Clause 202.4          Back-filling

                             After "operations" add "and wells encountered in the
                             alignment" in 1st line of this clause.

                             Add at the end of this clause

                             "The wells may be capped thereafter if directed by the
                             Engineer. The filling of wells and capping will be paid
                             separately in the relevant item of earth work, concrete,
                             RCC works as the case may be.”

       Clause 202.5         Disposal of Materials

                             Substitute ‘lead of 1000 m’ by ‘With all leads,’
                             wherever appearing in this clause.

                             The first paragraph of the sub clause shall read as
                             below:

                             All materials obtained from dismantling/milling shall be
                             the property of the Employer and the Contractor may
                             use this material in work or sell/dispose off the
                             material (with all leads and lifts), for which he shall
                             quote a rate for rebate against the respective items of
                             BOQ. However, such use of dismantled material in
                             work shall have the prior approval of the Engineer.
                             Contractor may use dismantled / milled road crushed
                             material by suitably modifying the material, or by
                             crushing the material, or by breaking the material, and
                             screening the same, after effecting due rebate in the
                             BOQ, provided it meets the specifications and is
                             approved by the Engineer.

                             Delete the last paragraph of this clause.

       Clause 202.6          Measurements for Payment

                             Add the following items after item (vi):

                             (vii)   Dismantling of signboard/ Bill boards       ….
                                        195
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                            Nr
                            (viii) Dismantling of dry/grouted stone pitching ….
                            Cu.m
                                   (ix)   Removal         of      hume       pipe
                                   …………………………….                  Lm
                            (x)    Dismantling of granular pavement …………….
                            Cu.m
                            (xi)   Dismantling of 5th Kilometer stone, Kilometer
                                   stone, Hectometer stone, delineator and guard
                                   stone …………………………….                   Nr.

       Clause 202.7          Rates

                             Delete the last sentence of the paragraph and replace
                             with:

                             “These will also include excavation, back filling with
                             required compaction where necessary and for
                             handling, piling and disposal of the dismantled
                             materials with all lifts and leads as specified in
                             Sub-Clause 202.5. The cost of cartage of materials
                             with no salvage value to disposal sites with all leads
                             and lifts is deemed to be included in the rates for
                             dismantling.

                             The contract unit rates for various items of rebate shall
                             be on the full quantities obtained from dismantling
                             taking into account all the operations for reuse of
                             salvaged materials and disposal of the balance of
                             material within all leads and lifts.”


       SECTION 300         EARTHWORK, EROSION CONTROL AND DRAINAGE

       CLAUSE 301          EXCAVATION FOR ROADWAY AND DRAINS

       Clause 301.1        Scope

                           Insert the following between the words “roadway” and
                           “side drains” in the second line :
                           “road shoulders/paved shoulders, verge, medians,”

       Clause 301.2.1      Classification:

                           Add sentence (f) after (e) and read it as below;
                           (f) Hard Rock (requiring controlled blasting)

                           Hard rock requiring blasting as described under (c) but
                           where blasting would damage abutting structures like
                           building, bridge foundations, etc. and excavation has to
                           be carried out by controlled blasting without causing any
                           detrimental damage to near by structures and in
                           accordance with Additional Technical Specifications .
                                        196
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


       Clause 301.3.3      Excavation - General:

                           Delete the last two sentences of Para 5 of this clause.

                           The following paragraph is added to the sub-clause
                           301.3.3

                           Temporary support to the sides of the excavation
                           necessary to support the foundation of adjoining
                           structures and to prevent any ground movement shall be
                           provided by the Contractor. Where temporary supports
                           are provided these shall be designed and removed such
                           that no ground movement occurs on removal. The
                           Contractor shall submit his proposal in this respect to
                           the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of the
                           excavation. If any damage occurs the Contractor shall
                           be liable to restore the property at it’s own position. No
                           extra payment will be made against works under this sub
                           clause.

       Clause 301.3.7      This Clause shall be read as under:

                           “In works involving widening of existing pavements or
                           providing paved shoulders, the existing paved
                           shoulders/hard                             shoulder/earthen
                           shoulders/verge/median shall be removed to its full width
                           and depth up to the Subgrade bottom level shown on
                           drawings or as indicated by the Engineer, preparation of
                           cut formation as per clause 305 supporting
                           subgrade/embankment. Method of benching shall be
                           followed with each successive top layer of existing
                           pavement layer cut at least 250 mm wider than bottom
                           layer. While doing so care shall be taken to see that no
                           portion of the existing pavement designated for retention
                           is loosened or disturbed. If the existing pavement gets
                           disturbed or loosened, it shall be dismantled and cut to a
                           regular     shape     with   side     vertical   and    the
                           disturbed/loosened portion be removed completely and
                           re-laid as directed by the Engineer, at the cost of the
                           Contractor.

                           If the existing material below the sub base level up to a
                           depth of 500mm or more is suitable for Subgrade (with
                           soaked CBR not less than 10 %) shall be retained. The
                           cut formation shall be prepared to support the sub-base
                           as per Clause 305. Any unsuitable material encountered
                           in this portion of subgrade shall be removed and
                           replaced with suitable material and compacted in
                           accordance with Clause 305.”

       Clause 301.3.11     Disposal of excavated materials

                           Delete this Sub-Clause and replace with:
                                        197
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                           “All the excavated materials shall be the property of the
                           Employer. Suitable material obtained from the
                           excavation of the roadway, shoulders, verges, drains,
                           cross drainage works, etc. shall be used for:

                           i)     Filling roadway embankment and Subgrade with all
                                  lifts and leads.

                           ii)    Filling existing pits/ ponds in the right of way as
                                  directed by the Engineer, including levelling and
                                  spreading, with all lifts and leads.

                           iii)   For landscaping of the road as directed by the
                                  Engineer, including levelling and spreading, with all
                                  lifts and leads.

                           Excavated rock shall be utilised by the contractor in the
                           manner as he desires (other than the above items of
                           work) duly affording the rebate for the entire quantity of
                           rock excavated.

                           The Rebate is to be given towards the salvage value for
                           the Hard Rock excavated.

                           Unsuitable and surplus material, which, in the opinion of
                           the Engineer cannot be used in the works, shall be
                           removed from site by the Contractor and disposed of at
                           the nearest dip or other approved location with all lifts
                           and leads in accordance with all statutory requirements.”




       Clause 301.8        Measurement for Payment

                           Delete the first sentence of the first paragraph and
                           replace with:

                           “Excavation for roadway shall be measured by taking
                           cross-section volume calculated in accordance with
                           Clause109”

                           Delete item (v) of last paragraph.

       CLAUSE 301.9        RATES

       Clause 301.9.1      In para (ii) the words “lead upto 1000m or as otherwise
                           specified” shall be substituted by “all leads”.
                                   Add the followings after item (vi):

                                    “(vii) The removal from site and disposal of all
                                                  surplus or unsuitable materials
                                                  obtained      from     excavation
                                         198
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                                                 operations, which, in the opinion
                                                 of the Engineer cannot be used in
                                                 the Works, shall be included in the
                                                 Contract rate.

                           (viii) Arrangement for safety of the property as
                           mentioned in sub clause 301.3.3 of this specification,
                           shall be included in the Contract Rate.”

       Clause 301.9.5      Replace “, but leads upto 1000m” with “and all leads” in
                           the sentence

       Clause 301.9.6      Delete this Sub Clause.

       CLAUSE 304         EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

       Clause 304.3.4     Preparation of Foundation

                          In Paragraphs 2 and 3 of Clause 304.3.4, substitute
                          ‘concrete of M15 grade’ in place of ‘lean concrete (1:3:6
                          nominal mix)’.

       Clause 304.3.7     Backfilling

                          Delete the word ‘Mechanical tamper’ in line 7 and
                          substitute it with “Roller”

       Clause 304.5.1     Delete “ upto 1000 m or as otherwise specified; and” in
                          item (v)

       Clause 304.5.3     Delete “beyond the initial lead of 1000 m” and replace
                          with “for all leads.”




       CLAUSE 305         EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION

       Clause 305.2       Materials and General Requirements

       Clause 305.2.1     Physical requirements

       Clause 305.2.1.1   Replace the sentence “ Clay having liquid limit exceeding
                          70 and plasticity index exceeding 45; with the sentence “
                          Clayey soils and other soils having liquid limit exceeding
                          40 and plasticity index exceeding 18;

       Clause 305.2.1.2   This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “Expansive soils such as CH, MH or OH exhibiting
                          marked swell and shrinkage properties (‘free swelling
                                        199
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          index’ exceeding 50 per cent when tested as per IS:
                          2720-Part 40) shall not be used in construction of any
                          subgrade or embankment.”

       Clause 305.2.1.4   Delete second sentence of clause 305.2.1.4.

       Clause 305.2.1.5   Add the following at the end of first sentence:

                          “The material to be used in subgrade should satisfy the
                          requirement of the 4 day soaked design CBR of 10%
                          when tested as per IS: 2720 (Part 16) at 97% maximum
                          dry density (IS: 2720 (Part 8)).”

       C l a u s e Borrow materials
       305.2.2.2

                          Paragraph 1 of this Clause shall be read as under:

                          “No borrow area shall be made available by the Employer
                          for this work. The arrangement for the source of supply
                          of the material for embankment and subgrade meeting
                          the prescribed specifications as well as compliance to the
                          different environmental requirements in respect of
                          excavation and borrow areas as stipulated, from time to
                          time, by the Ministry of Environment and Forest,
                          Government of India and the local bodies, as applicable
                          shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.”




                               THE TABLE 300-2 SHALL BE READ AS UNDER:

                          COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMBANKMENT
                                       AND SUBGRADE


                                                              Relative compaction
                                                              as percentage of
                          SL.
                                    Type of Work/Material     maximum laboratory
                          No.
                                                              dry density as per
                                                              IS: 2720 (Part 8)
                          1.     Subgrade and earthen         Not less than 97
                                 shoulders
                                        200
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          2.     Embankment                    Not less than 95
                          3.     High embankment               Not less than 97
                                 (exceeding 6m height)
                          4.     Expansive clays               Such material is not
                                                               allowed

                          Paragraph 8 of this Clause given below Table 300-2 shall
                          read as under:

                          “The contractor shall at least 7 working days before
                          commencement of construction of embankment and the
                          sub-grade; submit the following to the Engineer for
                          approval:

                          i)    The values of maximum dry density and optimum
                                moisture content obtained in accordance with IS: 2720
                                (Part 8) for each fill material proposed to be used in
                                the construction of embankment and sub-grade.

                          ii)   The graphs of Density plotted against moisture content
                                from which each of the values in (i) above of maximum
                                dry density and optimum moisture content were
                                determined.

                          iii) The dry density-moisture content-CBR relationships,
                               heavy compaction efforts conforming to the IS 2720
                               (part 8) for each of the fill material proposed to be
                               used in the sub grade.

                          The above information shall form the basis for compaction
                          only upon its approval by the Engineer.”

 Clause 305.3             Construction Operations

                          Compacting        ground       supporting     embankment/
 Clause 305.3.4
                          sub-grade

                          Para 1 of this clause shall be read as:

                          “Where necessary the original ground shall be levelled,
                          scarified, mixed with water and then compacted by rolling
                          to facilitate placement of first layer of embankment so as to
                          achieve minimum dry density as given in Table 300-2”.

                          Add at the end of Para 2

                          ”Backfilling layers in pits, trenches and below the original
                          ground are to be compacted to the relative natural ground
                          density. The natural ground density shall be determined by
                          conducting field density tests at three spaced locations
                          along the central line of the proposed additional
                          carriageway at a depth between 0.5m to 1.0m. Samples of
                          natural ground are collected at each location, and are
                                         201
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          tested in accordance with IS: 2720 (Part 8). The relative
                          density (i.e. the percentage of the field dry density to the
                          laboratory maximum dry density) is assessed for each
                          sample, and the greatest relative density obtained is
                          selected as the “natural ground density”. If the natural
                          ground density is less than 85% then these are to be
                          compacted after necessary watering so as to achieve not
                          less than 85% of relative compaction.

                          Where necessary to facilitate compaction of the subgrade
                          to 97% relative compaction as stated above, a further
                          depth of maximum thickness of 0.2m shall be loosened,
                          watered and compacted in accordance with Sub Clause
                          305.3.5 and 305.3.6 to not less than 95% of dry density
                          determined in accordance with IS: 2720(Part-I)”.

 Clause 305.3.5.1         Replace the first sentence of the paragraph as follows:

                          “The embankment and subgrade material shall be spread
                          in layers of uniform thickness, provided demonstrated
                          successfully and approved by Engineer, not exceeding 250
                          mm compacted thickness over the entire width of
                          embankment by mechanical means, finished by a motor
                          grader and compacted as per clause 305.3.6.”

 Clause 305.3.5.2         Spreading materials in layers                and   bringing    to
                          appropriate moisture content.

                          In para 3, delete "IS: 2720 (Part 7 or)" .

 Clause 305.3.6           Compaction

                          The second para of this Clause shall read as under:

                          "Vibratory roller of not less than 80-100 KN static weight
                          with plain or pad foot drum or pneumatic tyre roller of 300
                          KN weight having tyre pressure of at least 7 kg/sqcm shall
                          be used for compaction.”

                          Insert the following sentence before the last sentence of
                          Paragraph 5:

                          “The co-relation between sand replacement densities and
                          nuclear gauge densities shall be based on trials with
                          minimum 30 coherent density measurements”

 Clause 305.4.4           Embankment and Subgrade around structures

                          In the last line of paragraph-3, substitute “compacted
                          thoroughly to the requirements of Table 300-2” by
                          “compacted thoroughly to not less than 97% MDD”

                          In the last line paragraph – 4, substitute “2504” for “2502”

                                        202
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 Clause 305.4.6           Add the following at the end of clause

                          Construction of embankments in marshy and boggy
                          soil:

                          The area where the embankment has to be constructed
                          shall be dewatered. After removing the slush and boggy
                          soil from the area it will be filled with sand upto a height of
                          500 mm above ponding water level upto toe of
                          embankment. 300 mm thick layer of stone dust shall be
                          filled over the sand layer and compacted.

 Clause 305.4.8           Delete the clause and read as stated below

                          For stage construction of high embankments, controlled
                          rate of filling shall be carried out as indicated below.

                          The embankment shall be constructed over a drainage
                          layer and in the first month the total height should be
                          limited to maximum 6.0 (six) metre only. The balance
                          embankment construction should be done after a rest
                          period of 2 (Two) months for strength gain and
                          consolidation. The rest period need not be given in case
                          where the construction of the initial 6 metre height of
                          embankment takes more than 4 months.

                          However, based on the available subsoil data the
                          contractor may suggest his loading schedule or any other
                          method to take care of the excessive settlement problem
                          for approval of the Engineer.

 Clause 305.8             Measurements for Payment

                          Add the following para at the commencement of the
                          clause.

                          In case of marshy land, slush will be removed till firm
                          ground is reached and depression caused thereby will be
                          filled with approved full materials and duly compacted in
                          layers till the formation reaches the original natural ground
                          level. The formation so built will be considered as “Built up
                          Original Ground Level” which will be considered for
                          computation of volume of earthwork at such location.
                          Separate payments for removal of slush and filling upto
                          Built up Original Ground Level will be admissible to the
                          Contractor.

                          Para 1 shall be read as:

                          "Earth embankment/sub-grade construction shall be
                          measured separately by taking cross sections at intervals
                          after clearing and grubbing and if necessary compaction of
                          original ground before the embankment work starts and
                          after its completion and computing the volumes of
                                        203
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          earthwork in cubic metres by the method of average and
                          areas."

 Clause 305.9.1           Add new sub section as (xiv) “slush removal”
                          Insert “including removal and replacement of marshy soil”
                          after words “unsuitable material” appearing in the second
                          line of item (iii).

                          Add “including removal of top soil” after word “material”
                          appearing in first line of item (v)

 Clause 305.9.6           Substitute “upto a Lead of 1000 m or as otherwise
                          specified” by “leads”

 CLAUSE 306               SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

 Clause 306.4             Measurement for payment

                          Substitute Clause 306.4 as follows:

                          “All temporary sedimentation and pollution control works
                          shall be deemed as incidental to the earthwork and other
                          items of work and, as such, no separate payment shall be
                          made for the same.”

 Clause 306.5             Rates

                          This Clause shall be deleted.




                                        204
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 SECTION 400              SUBBASES, BASES (NON-BITUMINOUS) AND
                          SHOULDERS

                          General

                          Sub clause (i) of clause 401.8 stands deleted and
                          remaining sub para (ii) to (v) are renumbered as (i) to (iv).

                          Sub clause (i) of clause 405.7.1 stands deleted and
                          remaining sub paras (ii) to (iv) are renumbered as (i) to (iii).

                          The provision of clause 401.8 (i) to (v) be read as “Clause
                          401.8 (i) to (iv)” in the sub clauses 402.8, 403.8, 404.7,
                          407.7 and 410.7

 Clause 401               GRANULAR SUB-BASE

 Clause 401.1             Scope

                          Add the following at the end of this clause:

                          “A site trial shall be performed in accordance with clause
                          903.3.”

 Clause 401.2             Materials

 Clause 401.2.1           Paragraph 1 of this Clause shall read as under:

                          “The material to be used for the work shall be crushed
                          granite stone, depending upon the grading required. The
                          material shall be free from organic or other deleterious
                          constituents and conform to the Grading 1 given in Table
                          400-1.”

                          Delete last sentence of para 2 and replace it by following:

                          “For drainage layer, grading requirement shall be according
                          to Grading I of Table 400-2.”

 Clause 401.2.2           Physical Requirements

                          The Clause shall read as under:

                          “The materials shall have a 10% fines value of 50 KN or
                          more (for sample in soaked condition) when tested in
                          compliance with BS 812 ( Part-3). The water absorption of
                          the coarse aggregate shall be determined as per
                          IS:2386(Part-3). If this value is greater than 2% on the
                          material delivered as per IS:383 , Soundness Test shall be
                          carried out in accordance with IS:2386 (Part-5) 1963. The
                          average loss of weight of coarse aggregate after 5 cycles
                          shall not exceed 12% when tested with sodium sulphate
                          and 18% when tested with magnesium sulphate as
                          specified in IS:383.”

                                        205
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


 Clause 401.3             Strength of sub-base

                          The clause shall read as follows:

                          It shall be ensured prior to actual execution that the
                          material to be used in the sub-base has a minimum CBR
                          value of 30% when compacted and finished.

                          When directed by Engineer, this shall be verified by
                          performing tests in the laboratory. The CBR tests shall be
                          conducted on specimen soaked for 4 days and compacted
                          to 98% of the maximum dry density as per IS:2720 (Part 8).

 Clause 401.4.2           Spreading and Compacting

                          The second paragraph of this clause shall read as follows.

                          "When the sub-base materials consist of combination of
                          materials mentioned in Clause 401.2.1 mixing shall be
                          done mechanically in plant".

                          The fifth Para of this Clause shall read as under:

                          “Immediately thereafter, rolling shall start. If the thickness
                          of the compacted layer does not exceed 100 mm, a smooth
                          wheeled roller of minimum 100 KN static weight may be
                          used. For a compacted single layer upto 225 mm
                          thickness, the compaction shall be done with the help of a
                          vibratory plain drum or pad foot drum roller of minimum 100
                          KN static weight or with a heavy pneumatic tyred roller of
                          minimum 300 KN static weight having a minimum tyre
                          pressure of 0.7 MN/m2. The rolling should commence at
                          the lower edge and proceed towards the upper edge
                          longitudinally for portions having unidirectional cross fall
                          and super elevation and shall commence at the edges and
                          progress towards the center for portions having cross falls
                          on both sides.”

 CLAUSE 406               WET MIX MACADAM SUB-BASE/BASE COURSE

 Clause 406.1             Scope

                          Delete “in one or more layers” and replace with “in two
                          uniform layers” in the last sentence of first paragraph.

                          Read “125mm” in place of “200mm” in the last sentence of
                          second paragraph.

 Clause 406.2             Materials

 Clause 406.2.1.1         Physical Requirements:

                          Delete the second sentence beginning with "If crushed
                                        206
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          gravel…” and ending with “…. fractured faces." and add as
                          under:

                          “The constituents of the aggregates shall be produced by
                          integrated crushing and screening plant (Impact or Cone
                          type of capacity 200T/hour) and, unless otherwise
                          instructed by the Engineer, crushing shall be carried out in
                          at least two stages. The fraction of material passing
                          through 4.75mm sieve shall also be crusher run screening
                          only.”

                          Add the following at the end of the last paragraph:

                          “Soundness test shall be carried out in accordance with IS:
                          2386 (Part- 5), 1963. The average loss of weight of coarse
                          aggregate after 5 cycles shall not exceed 12% when tested
                          with sodium sulphate and 18% when tested with
                          magnesium sulphate as specified in IS: 383-1970”

                          From the Table No. 400-10 replace the wording against
                          single asterik as under:

                          “The aggregate should satisfy both the tests a) Los
                          Angeles Abrasion Value b) Aggregate Impact Value”.

 Clause 406.3.3           Preparation of Mix

                          Para 1 of Clause 406.3.3 shall be read as under:

                          “Wet mix Macadam shall be prepared in an approved Wet
                          Mix Macadam mixing plant of 200T/ hour capacity having
                          provision for controlled addition of water and forced/
                          positive mixing arrangement.”

 Clause 406.3.4           Spreading of Mix

                          Replace the first and second sentence of second
                          paragraph as follows:

                          “The mix shall be spread by Electronic Sensor Paver
                          Finisher only, with guide wire arrangement preferably in full
                          width of the pavement including hard shoulder.”

                          Delete third paragraph.

 Clause 406.3.5           Compaction

                          Delete second sentence of first paragraph.

                          Read “125mm” in place of “200mm” in the third sentence of
                          first paragraph from 1st para delete the sentence “If the
                          thickness of single compacted layer does not exceed 100
                          mm, a smooth wheel roller of 80 to 100 kN weight may be
                          used.”
                                        207
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


 Clause 406.4             Opening to Traffic

                          The clause shall read as:

                          “No vehicular traffic of any kind should be allowed on the
                          finished wet mix macadam surface till it has dried and
                          covered upto the 2nd layer of DBM.”

 CLAUSE 407               SHOULDERS, ISLANDS AND MEDIAN

 Clause 407.1             Scope

                          Replace the Sub-Clause with the following:

                          “The work shall consist of constructing shoulder
                          (hard/paved/earthen) on either/one side of the pavement,
                          median in the road dividing the carriageway into separate
                          lanes and islands for channelising the traffic at junctions in
                          accordance with the requirements of these specifications
                          and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross sections
                          shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer”.

 Clause 407.2             Materials

                          Replace the first paragraph by the following paragraph:

                          “Hard shoulder on either/ one side of the road shall be of
                          Granular      Sub base conforming to the requirements of
                          Clause 401. Earthen shoulder on either/ one side of the
                          road shall be of selected earth conforming to requirements
                          of Clause 305. The material to be used should satisfy the
                          requirement of the 4 days soaked design CBR of 10%
                          when tested as per IS: 2720 (Part 16) at 97% maximum dry
                          density (IS:2720 (Part 8))”.

                          The median / Islands shall be of selected earth conforming
                          to requirements of Clause 305.

                          Delete second, third and fourth sentence of the third
                          paragraph.

 Clause 407.4.3           Delete this sub-clause

 Clause 407.6             Measurements for Payment

                          This Clause shall read as under:

                          “Construction shall be measured as finished work in
                          position as below:




                                        208
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          a)        Shoulders (Hard / Paved / earthen)

                                    (i)     For Excavation in cu. m.
                                    (ii)    For Earthwork in cu. m.
                                    (iii)   For Granular sub-base in cu. m.
                                    (iv)    For sub-base, base, surfacing courses in
                                            units of respective items.
                                    (v)     For kerb in Running meters
                                    (vi)    Item (vi) is deleted

                          b)        Island / Median

                                     (i)    For Earthwork in cu.m
                                    (ii)    For kerb in running meter.
                                    (iii)   For sub base, base and tile finish in square
                                            metre complete as per Clause 409”.

 Clause 407.7             Delete “with brick or stone block edging”

 CLAUSE 408               CEMENT CONCRETE                KERB     AND     KERB     WITH
                          CHANNEL

 Clause 408.5             Construction Operations

 Clause 408.5.1           Substitute first sentence of Clause 408.5.1 as under:

                          “For the new carriage way, Kerb shall be laid on firm
                          foundation and extending inside the median as shown in
                          drawings.”

 Clause 408.5.2           Add the words “or to accommodate drainage pipes” at the
                          end of the paragraph after the words “drainage openings”.

 Clause 409               FOOTPATHS AND SEPARATORS

 Sub-Clause 409.2         Materials

                          Parts (c) of this Sub-Clause 409.2 shall be deleted.


 SECTION 500              BASE AND SURFACE COURSES (BITUMINOUS)

 Clause 501               General Requirements for Bituminous Pavement
                          Layers

 Clause 501.2.2           Coarse Aggregates

                          The first sentence of paragraph 1 shall read as:

                          “The course aggregates shall consist of crushed rock and
                          shall be obtained through the use of Cone crusher, Vertical
                          Shaft Impactor and vibratory screens of suitable capacity.”


                                            209
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          The third paragraph of this Clause shall be deleted

 Clause 501.3             Mixing

                          Para 1, Line 3 and 4, replace the word, “Adequate
                          Capacity” with “Hot mix plant of``` Batch mix type of
                          Minimum capacity of 120T per hour.”

 Clause 501.5.3           Spreading

                          Replace the first sentence of paragraph 1 as follows:

                          “Bituminous mix shall be spread with paver fitted with
                          electronic sensing device and string line arrangement
                          (supported by steel pegs @ 5m apart) on either side of
                          paving width for automatic levelling, surface evenness and
                          profile control. Use of string lines is compulsory to provide
                          signal to electronic sensing device fitted with a Paver
                          Finisher". The width of the paver shall not be less than 9
                          mts.

 Clause 501.6             Compaction

                          Replace the last two sentence of paragraph 2 as follows:

                          “The intermediate rolling shall be done with a smooth
                          wheeled tandem vibratory roller of 8-10 tonne weight
                          followed by a pneumatic tired roller of 12-15 tonnes weight
                          having nine wheels, with a tyre pressure of at least 5.6
                          kg/sq.cm. The finish rolling shall be done with 8 -10 tonnes
                          smooth wheeled tandem rollers.”

                          Add at the end of 6th paragraph:

                          “Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved satisfies
                          the requirements of Clause 903.4.2 and all roller marks are
                          eliminated.”

 Clause 501.8             Preparation of Surface

 Clause 501.8.3.2         In the last sentence replace “1000m” with “all leads”.

 Clause 501.8.3.4         Laying the profile corrective course

 Clause 501.8.3.4.1       This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “The surface on which profile corrective course is to be laid
                          shall be thoroughly swept clean of dust and any other
                          extraneous material using mechanical broom and dust
                          collected, removed or blown off using compressed air
                          except in places where mechanical means cannot reach.

                          After preparing the granular surface as in Clauses

                                        210
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          501.8.3.1., 501.8.3.2 and 501.8.3.3, the profile corrective
                          course with materials as per Clause 501.2.3/501.2.4 shall
                          be laid and compacted to the requirement of particular
                          specification clause. Where a bituminous profile corrective
                          course is to be laid over primed granular surface, a tack
                          coat conforming to Clause 503 shall be applied prior to
                          laying the profile corrective course.”

 Clause 501.8.3.4.2       This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “An existing bituminous surface shall be prepared as per
                          Clauses 501.8.3.3 and 501.8.3.4.1. The bituminous profile
                          corrective course shall be laid after applying tack coat
                          conforming to Clause 503, and compacted to the
                          requirement of specification Clause.”

                          1.    The profile corrective course upto 40mm average
                                thickness shall be laid with Dense bituminous
                                macadam only.

                          2.    The profile corrective course shall be laid with
                                Bituminous macadam for average thickness more
                                than 40mm and upto 150mm.

                          3.    If the profile corrective course average thickness is
                                more than 150mm, the existing Bituminous surface
                                shall be removed completely and subsequent road
                                crust layer shall be laid with wet mix macadam.

 Clause 501.8.7.5         Tack Coat

                          This clause shall be read as under:

                          “Tack coat is to be measured and paid for on a per square
                          metre basis.”

 Clause 501.8.8.1         In the last sentence replace “1000m” with “all leads and
                          lifts”.

 Clause 501.8.8.2         Sub para (i) of this clause stands deleted and remaining
                          sub paras (ii) to (xi) are renumbered as (i) to (x)

 Clause 502               Prime Coat Over Granular Base

 Clause 502.1             Scope

                          The clause shall be read as under:

                          “The work shall consist of the application of single coat of
                          low viscosity Bitumen Emulsion @ 0.6Kg to 0.9Kg per
                          square metre to a granular surface preparatory to the
                          superimposition of bituminous treatment or mix.”

 Clause 502.2.3           Choice of primer
                                       211
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                 ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                          This Clause shall be read as under:

                          "Primer: The primer used for prime coat shall be bitumen
                          emulsion complying with IS: 8887 and CSS – I Grade
                          conforming to ASTM D 2397/ AASHTO M 140, and shall be
                          refinery produced. The particular grade to be used for the
                          work shall be got approved by the Engineer.”

 Clause 502.8             Delete the second sentence from the paragraph as under:

                          “Payment shall be…........................... in Clause 502.4.3.”

 CLAUSE 503               TACK COAT

 Clause 503.2             Materials

                          This Clause shall be read as under:

                          "Binder: The binder used for tack coat shall be bitumen
                          emulsion complying with IS: 8887 and CSS – I Grade
                          conforming to ASTM D 2397/AASHTO M 140, and shall be
                          refinery produced. The particular grade to be used for the
                          work shall be got approved by the Engineer.”

 Clause 503.8             Replace “The rate shall cover…………..accordingly” by

                          “The rate for tack coat shall cover provision of bituminous
                          emulsion @ 0.275 kg per sqm for primed granular surface
                          and @ 0.225 kg per sqm for bituminous surface.”

 Clause 504               BITUMINOUS MACADAM


 Clause 504.2             Materials

 Clause 504.2.1           Bitumen

                          This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “The Base binder shall be paving bitumen of penetration
                          grade 60/70 as per Indian Standard Specification for
                          Paving Bitumen –IS: 73.”

 Clause 504.2.2           Coarse Aggregates
                          The first sentence of paragraph 1 shall read as:

                          “The coarse aggregates shall consist of crushed rock and
                          shall be obtained through the use of Cone crusher, Vertical
                          Shaft Impactor and vibratory screens of suitable capacity.”

                          The third paragraph of this Clause shall be deleted


                                         212
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 Clause 504.2.3           Fine Aggregates

                          Delete “or naturally occurring material, or a combination of
                          the two”.

 Clause 504.2.5           Proportioning of materials

                          Add below Table 500-4 of Clause 504.2.5 as under:

                          “Grading-I shall be used for compacted thickness of a layer
                          of 75 mm and above while Grading-2 shall be used for
                          compacted thickness of a layer of less than 75 mm
                          thickness.”

 Clause 504.8             Rate

                          Add the words “except for the item of tack coat” after the
                          words “required operations” in second line.

                          The item (viii) of Clause 501.8.8.2 shall be substituted as
                          under for BM.

                          “The rate shall include any variation in the bitumen content
                          in excess of percentage by weight of bituminous mix given
                          in Table 500-4 and no adjustment on this account shall be
                          admissible.”

 Clause 507               DENSE BITUMINOUS MACADAM

 Clause 507.2             Materials

 Clause 507.2.1           Bitumen

                          This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “The Base binder shall be paving bitumen of penetration
                          grade 60/70 as per Indian Standard Specification for
                          Paving Bitumen –IS: 73.

 Clause 507.2.2           Coarse Aggregates

                          Delete the words “crushed gravel or other hard material”
                          from the first sentence of 1st para of this clause.
                          Delete Para 2 of this clause.

                          From the Table 500-8, replace at the bottom of the table
                          against asterisk “Aggregate may ……………….. two tests”
                          as under:

                          “Aggregate should satisfy both the tests (i) Los Angeles
                          Abrasion Value and (ii) Aggregate Impact Value”

 Sub-Clause 507.2.3       Delete the words “or naturally occurring mineral material, or
                          a combination of the two” appearing in the first sentence of
                                        213
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          the clause.

 Sub-Clause 507.2.4       The first sentence of this clause shall read as “Filler shall
                          consist of finely divided hydrated lime or cement as
                          approved by the Engineer.”

 Clause 507.2.5           Aggregates grading and binder content

                          Add following between first and second sentence:

                          “Grading-I shall be used for compacted thickness of a layer
                          of 75 mm and above while Grading-2 shall be used for
                          compacted thickness of a layer of less than 75 mm
                          thickness. The Contractor shall give job mix formula for the
                          mix design indicating mix properties. The laying of mix shall
                          be done after approval of the Engineer.”

                          Read 65 instead of “65 or 90” for Bitumen grade in Table
                          500-10.

                          Read “Modified Marshall method” in place of “Marshall
                          method” in the Note: 2 of Table 500-10.

 Clause 507.3             Mixture Design

 Sub-Clause 507.3.1       Requirement for the Mixture

                          Add the following requirements to the list of Table 500-11:

                              Water sensitivity (ASTM D1075): Retained stability
                              (Ratio of Marshal Stability for 24 hour Immersion and
                              30 min Immersion in water at 60 degree centigrade
                              temperature) = not less than 75 %
                              Stability to flow ratio = 205 to 410
                              Filler- Bitumen ratio = 0.6 to 1.2

 Clause 507.3.2           Binder content

                          Delete “Marshall method” and replace with “Modified
                          Marshall method” in the 3rd line of first paragraph.

                          Replace the second paragraph by the following paragraph:

                          The modified Marshall method described in Asphalt
                          Institute Manual MS-2 requires modified equipment and
                          procedures; particularly the minimum stability value in
                          Table 500-11 shall be multiplied by 2.25, and the minimum
                          flow shall be 3mm.

 Clause 507.3.3           Job mix formula

                          Insert the following paragraph between existing paragraph
                          3 & 4:

                                        214
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                          “Mix design shall be carried out in accordance with the
                          modified Marshall method described in Asphalt Institute
                          Manual MS-2.”

 Clause 507.4.9           Rolling

                          Add after the last paragraph:

                          “Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at
                          least 98% of the Marshall Density.”

 Clause 507.9             Rate

                          This Sub-Clause shall be substituted as under:

                          “The Contract unit rate for Dense Bituminous Macadam
                          shall be payment in full for carrying out the required
                          operations except for the item of tack coat including full
                          compensation for all components listed in Clause 501.8.8.2
                          (i) to (xi) except (viii).

                          The item (viii) of Clause 501.8.8.2 shall be substituted as
                          under for DBM.

                          The rate shall include any variation in the bitumen content
                          in excess of 4.5 percent by weight of bituminous mix and
                          no adjustment on this account shall be admissible.”

 CLAUSE 508               SEMI-DENSE BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

 Clause 508.1             Scope

                          The last sentence of this Clause shall read as:

                          “A single layer shall be 25mm to 40mm in thickness.”

 Clause 508.2.1           Bitumen

                          This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “The Base binder shall be paving bitumen of penetration
                          grade 60/70 as per Indian Standard Specification for
                          Paving Bitumen –IS: 73.”

 Clause 508.2.5           Aggregate grading and binder content

                          This Sub clause shall be read under:

                          When tested in accordance with IS: 2386 Part I (Wet
                          sieving method), the combined grading of the coarse and
                          fine aggregates and added filler shall fall within the limits
                          shown in Table 500-15 for grading 2.

                                        215
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


 Clause 508.4.8           Add after the last sentence

                          “Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is
                          atleast 98% of the Marshall Density.”

 Clause 508.9             Rate

                          This Sub-Clause shall be substituted as under:

                          “The Contract unit rate for Semi-Dense Bituminous
                          Macadam shall be payment in full for carrying out the
                          required operations except for the item of tack coat
                          including full compensation for all components listed in
                          Clause 501.8.8.2 (i) to (xi).
                          The item (viii) of Clause 501.8.8.2 shall be substituted as
                          under for SDBC.
                          The rate shall include any variation in the bitumen content
                          in excess of 5% by weight of bituminous mix and no
                          adjustment on this account shall be admissible.”

 CLAUSE 509               BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

 Clause 509.1             Scope

                          The last sentence of this Clause shall read as:

                          “A single layer shall be 25mm to 65mm in thickness.”

 Clause 509.2.1           Bitumen

                          This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “The Base binder shall be paving bitumen of penetration
                          grade 60/70 as per Indian Standard Specification for
                          Paving Bitumen –IS: 73. Modified Bitumen confirming to
                          IRC –SP-53-2002 shall be used which is compatible with
                          the base binder and which allows the properties given in
                          Clause 521 to be achieved. The modifier, in the required
                          quantity shall be blended at the refinery / centralised plant
                          capable of producing modified binder as approved by the
                          Engineer. Technical specification clause 521 for modified
                          binder and IRC: SP-53-2002 shall be referred to”.

 Clause 509.2.4           The clause shall be read as under

                          Filler 2% by weight of mix shall consist of finely divided
                          cement / hydrated lime as approved by Engineer.

 Clause 509.2.5           Aggregate Gradation

                          This Sub Clause shall be read under:


                                        216
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          When tested in accordance with IS: 2386 Part I (Wet
                          grading method), the combined grading of the coarse and
                          fine aggregates shall fall within the limits shown in Table
                          500-18 for grading - I.

                          “The grading of the aggregate mix as used in the work
                          shall be a smooth curve within the envelope in Table
                          500-18”.

 Clause 509.3             Mixture Design

 Sub Clause 509.3.1       Requirements the Mixture Design

                          Add the following requirements to the list of Table 500-19:


                              Water sensitivity (ASTM D1075): Retained stability
                              (Ratio of Marshal Stability for 24 h Immersion and
                              30min Immersion in water at 60 degree centigrade
                              temperature) = not less than 75 %
                              Swell Test (Asphalt Institute, MS-2, No.2), maximum =
                              1.5%

 Clause 509.4.8           Spreading

                          This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “The provisions of Sub-Clauses 501.6, 501.7 and 507.4.9
                          shall apply, as modified by the approved laying trials.”

 Clause 509.9             Rate

                          This Sub-Clause shall be substituted as under.

                          “The Contract unit rate for bituminous concrete shall be
                          payment in full for carrying out the required operations
                          except for the item of tack coat including full compensation
                          for all components listed in Clause 501.8.8.2(i) to (xi)

                          The item (viii) of Clause 501.8.8.2 shall be substituted as
                          under for BC.

                          The rate shall include any variation in the bitumen content
                          in excess of 5.0 percent by weight of bituminous mix and
                          no adjustment on this account shall be admissible.

 Clause 521               MODIFIED BINDER

 Clause 521.2.2           Modifier

                          The last sentence of this Clause shall read as:

                          “The modifier shall be compatible with the base binder and

                                        217
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          which allows properties given in clause 521.3 to be
                          achieved. The modifier in the required quantity shall be
                          blended at the refinery/centralised plant capable of
                          producing modified binder as approved by the Engineer.”

 Clause 521.6             Measurement for Payment

                          Replace the Sub-Clause with the following:

                          “Modified binder supplied in the contract shall not be
                          measured separately. The cost of modifier used in
                          Bituminous works shall deemed to be included in the
                          particular item of the works.”
 SECTION 600              CONCRETE PAVEMENT

 CLAUSE 601               DRY LEAN CEMENT CONCRETE SUB-BASE

 Clause 601.2             Materials

 Clause 601.2.1           This Clause shall read as follows

                          Source of Materials

                          “Provisions of Clause 1002 of these specifications shall
                          apply to sources of material”

 Clause 601.2.2           Cement

                          The clause shall read as follows:

                          "Any of the following type of cements, capable of achieving
                          the Design strength may be used with the prior approval of
                          the Engineer, but preference shall be to use 43 grade.

                          1.Portland cement 33 grade conforming to IS: 269
                          2.Portland cement 43 grade conforming to IS: 8112

                          If the soil around has soluble sulphates exceeding 0.5%
                          the cement used shall be sulphate resistant and conform to
                          IS: 12330.”

 Clause 601.2.4           Water

                          This item shall read as under:

                          “Water used for mixing and curing concrete shall conform
                          to Clause 1010 of Section 1000.”

 Clause 601.5             Construction

 Clause 601.5.4           Placing

                          Add in the beginning of Clause 601.5.4:

                                        218
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                          One day before placing of the dry lean cement concrete
                          sub-base, the surface of the drainage layer shall be given a
                          fine spray of water and rolled with a smooth wheeled roller
                          after a lapse of 2-3 hours after watering. The Engineer
                          may instruct another fine spray of water to be applied just
                          before placing of the dry lean cement concrete sub-base.

 Clause 601.5.7           Curing

                          Add the following in last.

                          Method ‘a’ shall be adopted.

 CLAUSE 602               CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

 Clause 602.1             Scope

                          Add the following at the end of this Clause:

                          “A site trial shall be performed in accordance with Clause
                          901.16.”

 Clause 602.2             Materials

 Clause 602.2.2           Cement

                          Replace the last para of Clause 602.2.2 with:

                          “It is the responsibility of the Contractor to test and propose
                          the type of cement which will result in a concrete complying
                          in all respects with the specifications”.

 Clause 602.2.4.2         Coarse Aggregate

                          Add following para at the end of clause:

                          “The Stone Polishing Value, as measured by BS: 812 (Part
                          114), shall not be less than 55.”

 Clause 602.2.4.3         Fine Aggregate

                          Add the following at the end of this Clause:
                          “The fine aggregates shall be natural sand conforming to
                          the grading Zone-II as per IS: 383.”

                          Add the following as Clause 602.2.4.4

 Clause 602.2.4.4         Combined All-In Aggregate

                          The grading limits for all-in aggregates shall be as per IS:
                          383 for 20mm nominal size aggregates and as given
                          under:


                                        219
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                             IS Sieve Designation            Percentage Passing
                                     40mm                            100
                                     20mm                          95-100
                                    4.75mm                          30-50
                                  600 micron                        10-35
                                  150 micron                         0-6

 Sub-Clause 602.2.5       Water

                          This clause shall read as under:

                          “Water used for mixing and curing shall conform to Clause
                          1010 of Section 1000.”

                          Water for preparation of concrete during hot weather shall
                          be from water chilling plant installed at site.

 Sub-Clause 602.2.7       Premoulded Joint Filler

                          Replace Clause 602.2.7 with:

                          “Joint filler board for expansion joints shall be of the same
                          thickness as the specified joint width within a tolerance of
                          + 1.5mm and shall comply with the requirements of IS:
                          1838 or BS Specification No.2630. The filler for each joint
                          shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and
                          width required for the joint. Holes to accommodate dowel
                          bars shall be accurately bored or punched to give a sliding
                          fit on the dowel bars.”

 Sub-Clause 602.2.8       Joint Sealing Compound

                          Replace Clause 602.2.8 with:
                          “The joint sealing compound shall be hot applied
                          elastomeric type, complying with AASHTO M282 for joints
                          in asphalt pavements or joints between asphalt and
                          concrete pavements, and cold applied polyurethane or
                          polysulphide type complying with BS: 5212 –1990 for joints
                          in concrete pavements.

                          The joint sealant shall be resistant to age hardening and
                          shall have flexibility to accommodate movements of
                          minimum 25% of the joint width as shown in the drawings
                          without risk of breaking of the sealant or adherence failure.
                          The dimensions shall be so proportioned; that the
                          adherence to the groove walls is fully intact within the
                          movements limits.

                          Suitable primers as recommended by the manufacturers of
                          each type of joint sealant shall be used.

                          Each lot or batch of joint sealant compound and primer
                          shall be delivered to the job-site in the manufacturer's
                          original sealed container. Each container shall be marked
                                        220
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          with the manufacturer's name, batch or lot number, date of
                          manufacturer, storage life, safe heating temperature for hot
                          applied sealant, and shall be accompanied by the
                          manufacturer's certification stating that the compound
                          meets the requirements of these specifications.

                          The manufacturer's health and safety precautions shall be
                          available at the job- site for each joint sealing compound
                          and primer and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to
                          ensure that all precautions are met.”


 Clause 602.3             Proportioning of Concrete

 Clause 602.3.3           Concrete Strength

 Clause 602.3.3.1         Replace the entire Clause 602.3.3.1 with:

                          “The pavement concrete shall be a class M-40 concrete
                          with a minimum 28 days compressive characteristic
                          strength of 40 MPa and a minimum flexural characteristic
                          strengths of 4.5 MPa.

                          While designing the mix in the laboratory, correlation
                          between flexural and compressive strengths of concrete
                          shall be established on the basis of at least thirty tests on
                          samples. However, quality control in the field shall be
                          exercised on the basis of flexural strength. It may,
                          however, be ensured that the materials and mix
                          proportions remain substantially unaltered during the daily
                          concrete production. The water content shall be the
                          minimum required to provide the agreed workability for full
                          compaction of the concrete to the required density as
                          determined by the trial mixes or other means approved by
                          the Engineer and the maximum free water cement ratio
                          shall be 0.45.”

 Clause 602.3.3.2         Replace the entire Clause 602.3.3.2 with:

                          “The ratio between the 7 and 28 days strength shall be
                          established based on the results of the design mix trials,
                          refer Clause 602.3.5.1. The average flexural strength of the
                          7 days cured specimens shall be divided by the average
                          strength of the 28 days cured specimens for each batch,
                          and the ratio between 7 days and 28 days flexural strength
                          R7 shall be determined to an accuracy of three decimal
                          places.

                          If, during the construction of the trial length or during
                          normal working, the average value of any six consecutive 7
                          days test results divided by R7 falls below 4.50+1.65Xs
                          MPa, (where s is the standard deviation of the group) then
                          the Contractor shall stop paving and propose for the
                          approval of the Engineer corrections to the mix to improve

                                        221
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          the flexural strength. The Contractor shall provide
                          evidence, that the proposed corrections result in the
                          required flexural strength before paving operations may be
                          resumed by producing minimum six beams with the
                          proposed corrected mix and testing these for 7 days
                          flexural strength. No additional payment will be made for
                          any changes to the mix."

 Clause 602.3.5           Design Mix

                          Add the following at the end of sub-clause 602.3.5.1

                          Following parameters shall be used

                          i)     Characteristics flextural strength at 28 days = 4.5 Mpa
                          i)     Target mean strength at 28 days = 5.80 Mpa
                          ii)    Water cement ratio = 0.45 maximum
                          iii)   Slump as per IS:1199 = 31+15 mm.

 Clause 602.5             Separation Membrane

                          Replace the sub clause with the following:

                          A separation membrane shall be used between the
                          concrete slab and the sub-base. Separation membrane
                          shall be impermeable plastic sheet 125 microns thick laid
                          flat without creases. It shall be white in colour shall be
                          swept clean of all the extraneous materials using air
                          compressor.      Wherever overlap of plastic sheets is
                          necessary, the same shall be at least 300mm and any
                          damaged sheeting shall be replaced at the Contractor’s
                          expense. The separation membrane may be nailed to the
                          lower layer with concrete nails.

 Clause 602.6             Joints

 Clause 602.6.2           Transverse Joints

 Clause 602.6.2.1         Replace the first para as follows:

                          "Transverse joints shall be 'contraction and expansion
                          joints. Contraction joints shall be provided at 4.5 m
                          intervals, except where expansion joints are provided.
                          Expansion joints shall be provided at the junction of the
                          approach slabs of bridges and the rigid pavement.
                          Furthermore, transverse joints shall be provided at special
                          locations like transitions to structures, transition to flexible
                          pavements, off carriageway areas as shown on the
                          drawings. The exact position of transverse joints shall be
                          coordinated with adjoining construction packages and shall
                          be proposed by the Contractor in writing for the approval of
                          the Engineer. Transverse joints shall be straight within the
                          following tolerances along the intended line, which is the
                          straight line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the

                                           222
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          carriageway at the position of the joint."

 Clause 602.6.2.2         Contraction Joints

                          Replace the entire Clause 602.6.2.2 with

                          "Contraction joints shall be as shown in the drawings.

                          The crack inducing joint groove, as indicated in the drawing
                          and to 1/3 depth of the slab shall be cut as soon as the
                          concrete is hard enough to take the load of the joint sawing
                          machine without causing damages to the slab. The
                          Contractor shall furnish a method statement, which
                          describes his proposed methods for determination of the
                          time period available for sawing the crack inducing joint
                          grooves together with the capacity and number of sawing
                          machines for the approval of the Engineer. The, method
                          statement shall include establishment of maturity-strength
                          relationships in the laboratory and measurement of the
                          in-situ maturity of the concrete by maturity meters
                          (COMA-Meter by Germann Instruments A/S or similar) or
                          other internationally recognized methods."

 Sub-Clause 602.6.2.3     Expansion Joint

                          Add new para at the end of this sub-clause :

                          Joints at the junction of rigid and flexible pavements:

                          Joints shall be provided at the junctions of rigid and flexible
                          pavement with transition slab as shown in drawings. Where
                          due to unavoidable reasons, the joints cannot be
                          constructed at the junction of the two contract packages
                          dowel bars shall be provided in the rigid pavement and
                          other measures as directed by the Engineer taken. Joints
                          between bituminous pavement and concrete pavements (at
                          locations other than junction between contract packages)
                          shall be constructed.

 Sub-Clause 602.7.2       Concreting in Hot Weather

                          Add to the first para :

                          "If the concrete temperature exceeds 70°C during
                          hardening, the Contractor shall -at his own expense -prove
                          to the Engineer that durability parameters are unaltered
                          (for example micro cracking, compressive strength of sawn
                          cylinders or other as agreed with the Engineer).”

 Sub-Clause 602.9         Construction

 Sub-Clause 602.9.1       General

                          Add new para at the end of Clause 602.9.1 as follows:
                                         223
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                          "Paving shall be carried out in full carriageway width,
                          Including paved shoulders, where required. The paver
                          should run at least at an average -uniform speed of 1 m
                          per minute".

 Sub-Clause 602.9.3.2     Batching Plant and Equipment

                          Add at the end of the Clause:

                          "Batching Plant should have output capacity at least 20%
                          more than output required to meet the paving speed of 1m
                          per minute. The Contractor shall not use more than two
                          plants to meet the daily output requirement of concrete.
                          The batching plant should have suitable devices for
                          adjusting the slump of the mix and should have facility for
                          the computer printouts of every batch produced".

 Sub-Clause 602.9.4.1     Insert in the ninth line after uniform speed – “of at least 1 m
                          per minute".

 Sub-Clause 602.9.4.7     The new para to Clause 602.9.4.7 as follows:

                          “The marking shall be located on the horizontal surface at
                          the edge of the paved shoulder and shall be carried out
                          using prefabricated template figures approximately 80mm
                          high and 5mm thick as approved by the Engineer. The
                          figures shall be fixed to a plate which shall be inserted
                          approximately 2mm into the plastic concrete by vibration
                          and left in place until the concrete has hardened.”

 Sub-Clause 602.9.8       Surface Texture

                          Replace the sub-clause with the following:

                          Surface texturing/mechanical tining of concrete pavement
                          shall begin immediately after finishing of the concrete
                          before application of curing membrane. Texturing/Tining
                          shall be done with a specified machine specially designed
                          for the purpose for providing grooves at an uniform spacing
                          (c/c) of 18mm to 21mm, depth (3mm to 4mm) and width
                          (3mm), parallel to the centre line of roadway extending
                          over the entire roadway width but within 75 mm of
                          pavement edge & omitting within +/- 20mm of the sawed
                          longitudinal joints.

 Sub-Clause 602.10        Trial Length

 Sub-Clause 602.10.2      Add new para to Clause 602.10.2 as follows:

                          "All trials shall be carried out using the same paving width
                          and slab thickness as ~used in the permanent works."

 Sub-Clause 602.10.4      Replace the entire Clause 602.10.4 with:

                                         224
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                          “Transverse joints and longitudinal joints of each type that
                          are to be included in the pavement work shall be
                          constructed and assessed in the trial length.”

 Sub-Clause 602.10.5.3    Density

                          Replace the entire Clause 602.10.5.3 with:

                          "(v)    In-situ density shall be assessed as described in
                                 Clause 903.5.2.2 from at least 3 cores drilled when
                                 the concrete is not less than 7 days old. Should any
                                 of the cores show honey-combing in the concrete, the
                                 trial length shall be rejected and further use of the
                                 spreading and compacting unit shall not be permitted
                                 until further trials have shown that modification can be
                                 made which will result in adequate compaction."

 Sub-Clause 602.10.5.5    Strength

                          Add new clause as under:

                          "Minimum of thirty (30) beams for flexural strength and
                          thirty (30) cubes for compressive strength shall be
                          prepared from the concrete delivered to the paving plant.
                          Each pair of beams and cubes shall be from a different
                          batch of concrete. Compressive and flexural strength shall
                          be tested after 28 days curing.
                          At the age of 28 days thirty (30) cores with diameter 150
                          mm shall be saw cut from the slab. The cores shall be saw
                          cut in both ends to provide a specimen height of 300 mm +
                          5 mm and shall be tested for compressive strength at the
                          age of 28 days.

                          The concrete strength shall be deemed satisfactory if:

                          the average flexural strength exceeds 4.50 + 1.65*s (MPa),
                          where s is the standard deviation of the thirty tests, and the
                          strength of any sample is not less than characteristic
                          strength less 1.65 times standard deviation.

                          the average compressive strength of the cores divided by
                          0.8 is equal to or exceeds the average compressive
                          strength of the thirty cubes.”

 Sub-Clause 602.10.5.6    Temperature Measurements

                          Add new clause as under :

                          “The temperature development in the concrete slab during
                          hardening shall be recorded. The temperature shall be
                          measured in the middle of the slab (vertically) at a
                          horizontal distance of at least 1000 mm from any free
                          edge. The temperature shall be recorded every 3 hours

                                         225
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          after instalment of the thermometer and the
                          temperature-age relationship shall be determined. The
                          maximum recorded temperature shall not exceed 70°C. If
                          the temperature exceeds 70°C the trial length shall be
                          condemned and the Contractor shall propose methods to
                          reduce the temperature development and carry out a new
                          trial length at his own expense.”

 Sub-Clause 602.11        Preparation and Sealing of Joint Grooves

 Sub-Clause 602.11.3      Sealing with Sealant

 Sub-Clause 602.11.3.1    Replace first sentence with:

                          "Prior to application of the sealant the primer
                          recommended by the manufacturer shall be applied."

 Clause 602.11.3.3        Replace the entire Clause 602.11.3.3 with:
                          “Sealant complying with Clause 602.2.8 shall be used. Cold
                          applied sealant shall be mixed and applied within the time
                          limit specified by the manufacturer. Primers shall be
                          applied neatly with an appropriate brush or as
                          recommended by the manufacturer.”



 Sub-Clause 602.11.4      Testing of applied Sealant

                          Replace the entire Clause 602.11.4 with:

                          "Each delivery of joint sealant compound and primer shall
                          be tested in accordance with AASHTO M282 for hot
                          applied joint sealant and BS : 5212: Part 2 for cold applied
                          sealant at a recognised independent laboratory. In case
                          deliveries are made more frequent than every three
                          months, testing may be reduced to every three months.
                          The laboratory shall be approved by the Engineer in
                          advance."

 Sub-Clause 602.13        Opening to Traffic

                          Replace the entire Clause 602.13 with:

                          "No vehicular traffic (including the Contractor's vehicles)
                          shall be allowed on the finished surface until a field flexural
                          strength of minimum 4.50 MPa has been achieved. It is the
                          responsibility of the Contractor to produce a sufficient
                          number of series of test specimens to verify the field
                          flexural strength.

                          Each series of test specimens for measurement of field
                          flexural strength shall consists of minimum 3 test
                          specimens. The specimens shall be cured at conditions
                          similar to the field conditions. The method for curing and

                                        226
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          storing of the test specimens in order to imitate field
                          conditions shall be proposed by the Contractor and
                          approved by the Engineer. The required minimum field
                          flexural strength of 4.50 MPa is achieved when the average
                          flexural strength of minimum 3 specimens exceeds 4.50 +
                          1.65*s, where s is the standard deviation of the group.

                          Prior to opening to traffic the joints shall be sealed and
                          areas adjacent to the pavement shall be completed to a
                          degree that will ensure traffic safety. Opening to traffic shall
                          not constitute a final acceptance of the pavement."

 SECTION 800              TRAFFIC SIGNS, MARKINGS & OTHER ROAD
                          APPURTENANCES

 Clause 801               TRAFFIC SIGNS

 Clause 801.1.2           This Clause shall read as follows:

                          All road signs shall be of retro-reflectorised type and made
                          of high intensity grade with encapsulated lens type
                          reflective sheeting vide Clause 801.3 fixed over aluminum
                          sheeting.

 Clause 801.2.6           This Clause shall read as follows:
                          The aluminum sheets used for signs shall be 2mm thick.



 Clause 801.3             Traffic Signs having Retro-reflective Sheetings

 Clause 801.3.1           General Requirements

                          The fifth sentence of this clause should read as under:
                          “The reflective sheeting shall be of High Intensity grade
                          with encapsulated lens.”
                          Delete last sentence of this clause.

 Clause 801.3.6           This clause shall read as under:

                          “Cut-out messages and borders, wherever used, shall be
                          made out of retro-reflective sheeting as per Clause
                          801.3.2, except those in black which shall be of
                          non-reflective sheeting.”

 Clause 801.3.7           Add the following at the end of this clause:

                          “All the facility information and place identification signs
                          shall have Blue (Indian Standard Colour No. 166: French
                          Blue) background and white letters.”

 Clause 801.3.11          Warranty and Durability

                          The first and second sentences of this clause shall read as

                                        227
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          under:

                          “The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a
                          seven-year warranty for satisfactory field performance
                          including stipulated retro-reflectance of the retro-reflective
                          sheeting of high intensity grade and submit the same to the
                          Engineer. In addition, a seven year warranty for
                          satisfactory in-field performance of the finished sign with
                          retro-reflective sheeting of high intensity grade, inclusive of
                          the screen printed or cut-out letters/legends and their
                          bonding to the retro-reflective sheeting shall be obtained
                          from the Contractor/Supplier and passed on to the
                          Engineer.”

 Clause 801.4.1           The third and fourth sentences of this clause shall read as
                          follows:

                          “Signposts shall be of MS pipe 80mm dia (NB-MW) or as
                          shown in the drawings. Post shall be embedded in
                          concrete (M-15) for safeguard against theft. The cost of
                          signpost and its foundation complete including excavation
                          & concrete shall be deemed to be included in the rate of
                          signboard.”

 Clause 801.4.2           Add following at the end of this clause:

                          “The sign back shall be painted with two coats of grey
                          colour epoxy paint. The signpost shall be painted in black &
                          white alternate bands with two coats of epoxy paint.”

 CLAUSE 802               OVERHEAD SIGNS

 Clause 802.5             Materials

 Clause 802.5.3           Replace “1.5mm” with “2.0mm” in the last sentence

 Clause 802.5.6           This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “All road signs shall be of retro-reflectorised type and made
                          of high intensity grade with encapsulated lens type
                          reflective sheeting vide Clause 801.3, fixed over aluminium
                          sheeting as per these specifications.”

 Clause 802.9             Rates

                          This clause shall read as under:

                          The contract unit rate shall include

                          1.    Full compensation for the cost of structure including
                               furnishing all    labour, materials, tools, equipment,
                               excavation, fabrication, installation, painting and all
                               other incidental costs necessary to complete the work
                               as given in the drawings and as approved by Engineer.

                                         228
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                               Modifications in the structural dimensions and
                               foundation details as required by site conditions shall
                               be deemed to be incidental to the work of overhead
                               signs.

                          2. Full compensation for providing retro reflective sheeting
                              of the specified size conforming to Clause 801 including
                              the cost of screen printing of message and fixing the
                              reflective sheeting to the overhead structure as shown
                              in drawings and as approved by Engineer.


 CLAUSE 803               ROAD MARKINGS

 Clause 803.2             Materials

                          This Clause shall read as under:

                          Road markings shall be hot applied thermoplastic
                          compound and the materials shall meet the requirements
                          as specified in Clause 803.4.

                          The road markings shall be laid in one layer with
                          appropriate road marking machine approved by the
                          Engineer. Before the road-marking machine is used on the
                          permanent works, the satisfactory working of the machine
                          shall be demonstrated on a suitable site which is not part of
                          the permanent works. The rate of application shall be
                          checked and adjusted as necessary before application on a
                          large scale is commenced, and thereafter everyday it is
                          applied.

 Clause 803.3             Ordinary Road Marking Paint

                          This Clause shall be deleted.

 Clause 803.5             Reflectorised Paint

                          This Clause shall be deleted.

 Clause 803.6             Application

 Clause 803.6.1           Delete first and second sentences of this clause and add

                          “The road markings shall be laid with appropriate road
                          marking machinery as approved by the Engineer.”

 Add the following new Sub-Clause at the end.

 Clause 803.6.6            Tolerances

                          i)   General

                          Road traffic markings shall be constructed to accuracy

                                         229
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          within the tolerances given below:

                                The width of lines and other markings shall not deviate
                                from the specified width by more than 5%.
                                The position of lines, letters, figures, arrows and other
                                markings shall not deviate from the true position
                                specified by more than 20 mm.
                                The alignment of any edge of a longitudinal line shall
                                not deviate from the true alignment by more than 10
                                mm in 15 m.
                                The length of segments of broken longitudinal lines
                                shall not deviate from the specified length by more
                                than 150 mm.

                          In broken lines, the length of segments and the gap
                          between segments shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
                          If these lengths are altered by the Engineer, the ratio of the
                          lengths of the painted sections shall remain the same.
                          Line and curves, whether broken or unbroken, shall not
                          consist of chords but shall follow the correct radius.

                          ii) Faulty Workmanship or Materials:

                          If any material not complying with the requirements is
                          delivered at the Site or used in the Works, or if any
                          sub-standard work is carried out, such material or work
                          shall be removed, replaced or repaired as required by the
                          Engineer, at the Contractor’s own cost. Rejected traffic
                          markings and paint that has been splashed or has dripped
                          onto the surfacing, kerbs, structures or other such surfaces
                          shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost, in such
                          a way that the markings of split paint will not show up again
                          later.

 CLAUSE 805               ROAD DELINEATORS

 Clause 805.2             This clause shall read as follows:

                          (a)    Triangular Object Marker shall be 300mm side with
                                 four red reflector, made out of 2mm thick aluminum
                                 sheet, face to be fully covered by high intensity grade
                                 white retro reflective sheeting of encapsulated lens
                                 type as per clause 801. The background/ border/
                                 symbols shall be made by screen-printing of desired
                                 colour as per sign details. The sign plate shall be
                                 fixed with 6mm dia. aluminium rivets on MS angle iron
                                 frame. The angle iron frame shall be made with angle
                                 of size 40mmx40mmx5mm. The sign shall be fixed
                                 with nut-bolts & welding on MS pipe 50mm dia
                                 (NB-MW) and 500mm high or as shown in the
                                 drawings.

                          (b)    Rectangular hazard marker 600mm x 300mm made
                                 out of 2mm thick aluminum sheet, face to be fully

                                         230
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                                covered by high intensity grade white retro reflective
                                sheeting of encapsulated lens type. The background/
                                border/ symbols shall be made by screen-printing of
                                desired colour as per sign details. The sign plate
                                shall be fixed with 6mm dia aluminium rivets on MS
                                angle iron frame. The angle iron frame shall be made
                                with angle of size 40mmx40mmx5mm. The sign shall
                                be fixed to 80mm dia (NB-MW) MS pipe or as shown
                                in the drawings.


                          (c)   Roadway Indicators shall be 1000mm high made with
                                100 mm dia. NB medium weight MS pipe. One
                                reflector of high intensity grade retro reflective
                                sheeting with encapsulated lens shall be provided on
                                top of the reflector. The white & red reflector shall be
                                provided alternatively of 40mm width, so that total
                                width of reflector shall be 150mm. A wire mesh cover
                                of 150mm height shall be provided on top or as
                                shown in the drawings.

                          (d)   All components of sign and supports shall be
                                thoroughly descaled, cleaned, primed and painted
                                with two coats of epoxy paint. The sign backside shall
                                be with grey colour and post shall be white
                                colour/alternate white & black bands. The post below
                                ground shall be painted with three coats of red lead.

 CLAUSE 809               CONCRETE CRASH BARRIER

 Clause 809.2.2           This clause shall be read as below :

                          The concrete barrier shall be constructed with grade and
                          concrete as indicated in the drawing and with thermo
                          mechanically treated (TMT) deformed bars of grade S 415
                          conforming to IS-1786.

 Clause 809.3.2           Add “and culverts” after the word “bridges” in the first
                          sentence.

 CLAUSE 810               METAL BEAM CRASH BARRIER

 Clause 810.1.2           Replace this clause by “The design, materials to be used
                          and the location for Metal beam crash barrier shall conform
                          to relevant drawings or as directed by Engineer”

 Clause 810.2             Materials

 Clause 810.2.1           This Clause shall be read as under:

                          “Metal beam is a “W” profiled corrugated beam as specified
                          in drawings made out of cold roll forming from steel strip of
                          3.0mm thick using high strength steel of IS: 5986 Fe 510
                          grade with hot dip galvanised 550 gm per square meter.

                                        231
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                          The beam after forming shall have formed width of 312 mm
                          and depth of 83 mm and shall have punched holes for
                          fixing as specified in drawings.

                          The metal crash barrier posts and spacer shall consist of
                          ‘C’ channel section made out of 5 mm thick sheet by cold
                          roll forming process of steel conforming to IS: 5986 Fe360
                          grade with hot dip galvanised 550 gm per square meter .

                          All bolt nuts and washers as specified in drawings shall
                          conform to IS: 1367 & IS: 1364 unless otherwise specified
                          and are hot dip galvanised 550 gm per square meter.

                          The Guard rail reflector shall be made of material and
                          placed in position as shown in drawings. The body of it
                          shall be hot dip galvanized 550 gm per square meter.

                          Beams to be erected on a radius of 50 m or less shall be
                          shop curved to the appropriate curvature of the installation.

                          The mechanical properties of the base metal for Beam
                          shall conform to the following requirements:

                          a)        Ultimate Tensile Strength (Min.)   483 Mpa.
                          b)        Yield stress (Min.)                345 Mpa.
                          c)        Elongation (Min.) in 50mm          12%

                          Test specimens for mechanical properties and coating shall
                          be prepared and tested as specified in relevant IS codes.”

 Clause 810.2.3           Add at the end of this Clause:

                          “The size of the concrete foundation block for embedding
                          the posts and grade of concrete shall be as shown on the
                          drawing.”

 Clause 810.4             Installation of Posts

                          The sub-clause 810.4.1, 810.4.2, 801.4.3 and 810.4.4 are
                          replaced as below:

                          The guard posts shall be embedded in the concrete footing
                          of size and the grade of concrete along with the depth of
                          the embedment of post or as indicated in the drawing.

 Clause 810.4.5           Add “and end section” in the first line after “posts”.

 Clause 810.5.3           Add at the end of Para 1: “The guard rail reflector shall be
                          bolted replacing splice washer at the interval as indicated in
                          the drawing or as directed by the Engineer.”

 Clause 810.7             Measurement for Payment

                                          232
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


 Clause 810.7.1           The 2nd sentence “Terminals ………..for by numbers” shall
                          be deleted.

 Clause 810.7.2           The first sentence of this clause shall be substituted as
                          below:

                          “No separate measurement for payment shall be made for
                          Terminals / Anchors of various types required for the work
                          and the replacement washers for fixing Guard Rail
                          Reflectors as specified in the drawing. The cost of these
                          elements shall be deemed to be included in the rate quoted
                          by the contractor.”

 Clause 810.7.3           The words “or backfilling” shall be substituted as “and
                          concreting”

 Clause 810.8             Rates

                          Add “and drawings” at the end of last sentence of Clause.

 CLAUSE 815               Solar powered road safety signals with LED modules
                          for “U” turn/ Keep Left / Pedestrian crossing /
                          Intersection

                          Signal panel:

                          Material                      : Glass Fibre Reinforced
                                                         Polyester conforming to
                                                         DIN 16911 type 834-834.5

                          Protection class             : IP 66 (EN 60 529)

                          Impact Resistance            : > 7 Nm (EN 50 014)


                          Flammability          : Self extinguishing (UL 94 – V0)

                          Protective Insulation : Fully Insulated ( VDE 0100)

                          Seal Polyurethane Foam       : - 40 C to + 100 C, Endless

                          Dielectric Strength          : > 10 Kv /mm.

                          Water absorption             : Max. 0.7% (ASTM D 570)

                          Toxicity                     : Halogen free

                          Surface                      : > 10 12 ohm (DIN 53482)

                          Dimensions                   : 600 mm x 420 mm x 220
                          mm.


                                         233
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          Number and arrangement of LEDs: To be got approved
                          by engineer

                          Pole : Galvanised pole with corrosive resistant paint with
                          alternate black and white stripes. Pole to withstand wind
                          load.

                          Solar Panel : 30 Wp (U Turn) / 20 Wp (Keep Left) / 50
                          WP (Pedestrian Crossing) / 15 Wp (Intersection)

                          Wattage        : 84 watt (U Turn) / 54 watt (Keep Left) / 132
                          watt (Pedestrian Crossing) / 36 watt (Intersection)

                          Foundations : As required

                             Warranty Requirements in favour of HGCL

                            1. LEDs                             : 10,000 hrs

                            2. Battery (SMF Lead Acid)          : 5 years

                            3. Solar Panel                      : 15 years

                            4. Other accessories        : The supplier should give an
                                                               undertaking to change
                                                               any other damaged
                                                               part within 48 hours of
                                                               intimation.

                          Measurement for Payments:

                          Unit: The unit of measurement shall be in “ Numbers”

                          Rate: The unit cost of signals is inclusive supply and
                          erection of signals with all the equipment and full
                          compensation for labour and material including meeting the
                          warranty requirements. 50 % of cost is payable after trial
                          run of 1 week and the balance after 6 months.


 CLAUSE 900              QUALITY CONTROL FOR ROAD WORKS

 Clause 901              General

 Clause 901.1            This Clause shall read as under:

                         “All materials to be used, all methods adopted and all works
                         performed shall be strictly in accordance with the
                         requirements of these Specifications. The Contractor shall
                         set up a field laboratory at locations approved by the
                         Engineer and equip the same with adequate equipment and
                         personnel in order to carry out all required tests and Quality
                         Control work as per Specifications and/or as per Clause 121
                         and/or as directed by the Engineer. The list of laboratory
                                        234
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         equipment and the facilities to be provided shall be as per
                         Clause 121 and shall be approved by the Engineer in
                         advance.”

 Clause 901.5            This Clause shall be read as under:

                         “The Contractor shall provide necessary co-operation and
                         assistance in obtaining the samples for tests and carrying
                         out the field tests as required by the Engineer from time to
                         time. This may include provision of laboratory, equipment,
                         transport, consumables, personnel, including labour,
                         attendants, assistance in packing and despatching and any
                         other assistance considered necessary in connection with
                         the tests.”

 CLAUSE 902              CONTROL OF ALIGNMENT, LEVEL AND SURFACE
                         REGULARITY

 Clause 902.3            Surface Levels

                         Add “and or thickness” after the word “levels” in the 1st line
                         of the first paragraph.

                         Add at the end of first sentence “or as desired by the
                         Engineer” in the last paragraph.

                         Add the following sentence at the last: Towed fifth wheel
                         Bump Integrator Test is to be conducted on the Bituminous
                         surfaces to evaluate the surface regularity. Results are to
                         be taken on Electronic Graph. In Each lane, at four locations
                         longitudinally, in uni-direction, this bump integrator test is to
                         be done.


 CLAUSE 903              QUALITY CONTROL TESTS DURING CONSTRUCTION

 Clause 903.4            Tests on Bituminous Constructions

                         Add at the end of this Clause:

                         “The density test shall be carried out by 100 mm diameter
                         core cutter machine on Dense Bituminous Macadam and
                         Bituminous Concrete as per the frequency specified”.

                         In Table 900-4, Serial No. 6 for Dense Graded Bituminous
                         Macadam/ Semi Dense Bituminous Concrete/Bituminous
                         Concrete, modify the ‘Frequency (Minimum)” values for Item
                         No. (vii), (ix) and (xviii) as under:

                                Type of
                          S.
                              Constructio          Test        Frequency (Minimum)
                          No.
                                   n



                                        235
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                   ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                              6        Dense      (vii)      Sand Three          tests     on
                                    Bituminous    E q u i v a l e n t aggregates for each
                                    Macadam       Test                400 t of mix subject to
                                       /Semi                          two tests per plant per
                                       Dense                          day.
                                    Bituminous    (ix) Polished Initially one set of
                                    Concrete/     Stone Value three            representative
                                    Bituminous    (PSV)               specimens for each
                                     Concrete                         source of supply.
                                                                      Subsequently      when
                                                                      warranted by changes
                                                                      in the quality of
                                                                      aggregates.
                                                  (xviii) Density One test per 250 m2
                                                  o                 f area subject to the
                                                  C om pa c te d condition that 10% of
                                                  Layer               density tests shall be
                                                                      done on the edges.

                         Add the following at the end of Table 900-4:

                         Note:
                         1. The laboratory and field tests shall be performed on
                             materials and works at the frequency values indicated
                             against each. The Supervision Personnel shall ensure
                             that there are no deviations in this regard.

                         2.       The Contractor shall prepare a detailed manual for
                                  Quality Assurance including the methodology for the
                                  respective tests, the data formats and the methodology
                                  for the analysis and interpretation of test results based
                                  on the reference Standards and Practices indicated in
                                  the Technical Specifications and obtain the approval of
                                  the Engineer.

                         3.       Daily, Weekly and Monthly Reports on the testing done,
                                  results obtained thereof must be prepared indicating the
                                  location of sampling and testing, deviations from the
                                  acceptance norms for materials and works and actions
                                  taken in respect of removal of defective works must be
                                  prepared by the Contractor and authenticated by the
                                  Supervision Personnel that these tests were done in
                                  their presence and that the testing has been carried out
                                  as per the prescribed methodology.

                         Characteristics to be tested on completed Bituminous
                         Layers

                         The characteristics to be tested on completed bituminous
                         layers are:

                                     Relative compaction
                                     Layer thickness


                                            236
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         For testing the above characteristics, the following sampling
                         criteria shall apply:

                         a)   Random Sampling

                              When testing any lot, or an isolated section, which is
                              obviously defective or exhibits abnormal variation of
                              the characteristics under consideration, all samples
                              shall be taken in a random pattern.
                         b)   Lot Size

                              The lot size shall normally be a section laid and
                              compacted in one process and for which essentially
                              the same materials had been used. Where production
                              is on a continuous basis, a lot shall normally mean
                              one-day production and shall not exceed two full days
                              production.

                         However, the Engineer for investigating compliance with the

                         specifications may order a lot of any smaller size, if:

                              The factors affecting the characteristics under
                              investigation exhibit abnormal variation within the
                              normal lot size
                              The area is obviously defective or of poorer quality that
                              of the rest;

                              The rate of production is very high.

                              “Bituminous mix shall be spread with paver fitted with
                              electronic sensing device and string line arrangement
                              (supported by steel pegs @ 5m apart) on either side of
                              paving width for automatic levelling, surface evenness
                              and profile control. Use of string line is compulsory to
                              provide signal to the electronic sensing device fitted
                              with a Paver Finisher”.

                              Bituminous works, shall be tested immediately after
                              laying/finishing for:
                         a)   Thickness (compacted) measured by extracting cores
                              and shall be dealt in accordance with MORT&H
                              Specifications Section 900.
                         b)   Density (compaction) test as performed on the
                              extracted cores
                         c)   Workmanship test by measuring roughness of the
                              finished layer by duly calibrated Towed Fifth Wheel
                              Bump Integrator

                         Note: Contractor shall arrange the core extraction machine
                               at his cost and shall take cores of the executed
                               bituminous works jointly with Engineer without any
                               extra cost.


                                        237
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         The result of tests shall be compared with the prescribed
                         acceptable values. The payment of all such works executed
                         shall be based on the test results. In case test results for
                         (b) and (c) above fall below the required values in
                         accordance with specifications, the deductions as specified
                         below shall be worked out and applied, limiting to ‘Nil’
                         payment for the executed bituminous works. Separate
                         deduction shall be made for each attribute i.e. density test
                         and workmanship test.

                         b)     Density (compaction) Test: Basis of Deduction

                                    Core Density                 Deduction
                                                                   in the
                                                                  payable
                                                                    rate
                          -   Less Upto 1% of requirement          @ 5%
                          -   Less above 1% and upto 2% of        @ 15%
                              requirement
                          -   Less above 2% and upto 3% of         @ 30%
                              requirement
                          -   Less above 3% of requirement       @ 100%.
                                                                 Such works
                                                                 shall be
                                                                 rejected
                                                                 and NIL
                                                                 payment
                                                                 shall be
                                                                 made.

                         The minimum deduction in the payable rate shall be made
                         for an area not less than 250 sqm. for each failure of density
                         (compaction) test.

                         c)     Workmanship Test : Roughness measured
                                longitudinally
                                The finished bituminous layers (DBM and BC) shall
                                be tested for workmanship (immediately before
                                allowing     traffic) by    measuring   roughness,
                                longitudinally, separately for each lane with the
                                Calibrated Towed Fifth Wheel Bump Integrator.
                                Calibration of Bump Integrator device shall be
                                carried out using the procedure recommended in the
                                World Bank Technical Publication No. 46. The
                                measured roughness shall not exceed a value of
                                2000 mm/km. for finished DBM and B.C. layers.

                         In case DBM is laid in two separate lifts, the roughness shall
                         be measured on the final DBM layer. Any completed layer
                         (DBM and BC) having roughness in excess of the value
                         2000 mm/km shall be paid in accordance with the
                         Deduction Formulae as specified below:



                                         238
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                              Measured Roughness              Deduction in the
                                                                payable rate
                          -   Upto 5% more than the                 Nil
                              requirement
                          -   More than 5% and upto @ (10%+1% for
                              30%     more than  the every 1% in excess
                              requirement            of 5% of prescribed
                                                     limit)
                          -   More than 30% and upto
                              40%     more than  the         @50%
                              requirement
                          -   Above 40% of more than    @100% (i.e. Nil
                              the requirement               payment)

                         “The area for which deduction in the payable rate apply,
                         shall be determined by the Engineer based on analysis of
                         roughness results. However, regardless of any other
                         consideration, the minimum deduction applicable shall not
                         be less than one lane for one km. Surface area, i.e., 3500
                         sqm.”



 SECTION 1000            MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURES

 Clause 1002             SOURCES OF MATERIAL

                         This Clause shall be substituted as under:


                         “The Contractor shall identify the sources of materials like
                         coarse aggregate and sand and notify the Engineer
                         regarding the proposed sources prior to delivery.

                         Samples of material from the source shall be tested, in the
                         presence of Engineer’s representative, for conformity to
                         specifications. It shall also be ensured that the variation in
                         test results of different samples is within acceptable limits. If
                         the product from the approved source proves unacceptable
                         at any time, the Contractor shall provide new sources of
                         acceptable material from other sources at his own expense
                         conforming to specifications.

                         For manufactured items like cement, steel reinforcement,
                         prestressing strands, the Contractor shall intimate the
                         Engineer details of the source (plant where the material is
                         manufactured), testing facilities available with the
                         manufacturer and arrangements for transport and storage
                         of material at site. If directed by the Engineer, the
                         Contractor shall furnish samples and test results of recently
                         manufactured material. The Engineer, at his discretion, may
                         require the Contractor to test the materials in an
                         independent laboratory approved by the Engineer, and
                         furnish test certificates. The cost of these tests shall be
                                        239
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         borne by the Contractor. The sampling and test procedures
                         shall be as laid down in Indian Standards or where these
                         are not available as per the directions of the Engineer. Only
                         material from the sources approved by the Engineer shall
                         be brought to the site. If the material from the approved
                         sources proves unacceptable at any time, the Contractor
                         shall provide new sources of acceptable material
                         conforming to specifications from other sources at his own
                         expense.

                         For proprietary items like bearings, metal beam crash
                         barriers, Signboards, expansion joints refer clause 1015.1.”

 Clause 1006             CEMENT

                         This clause shall read as follows:

                         Cement to be used in bridge structures shall conform to the
                         following requirements:

                         Any of the following types of cement may be used with prior
                         approval of competent authority.


                          Sl No.                   Type                   Conformin
                                                                              g to
                         1          Ordinary Portland Cement 33 Grade    IS: 269
                         2          Ordinary Portland Cement 43 Grade    IS:8112
                         3          Ordinary Portland Cement 53 Grade    IS:12269
                         4          Rapid Hardening Portland Cement      IS:8041
                         5          Sulphate resistant Portland Cement   IS:12330
                         6          Portland Pozzolana Cement            IS:1489-Par
                                                                         t-I
                         7          Portland Blast Furnace Slag cement   IS: 455
                         8          Low Heat Portland Cement             IS: 12600

                         Notes: (1) Use of Portland pozzolana cement may be
                         permitted only in plain concrete members.

                         (2) Under severe condition of sulphate content in subsoil
                         water, special literature on precautions to be taken with
                         regard to the use of special types of cement with low C3A
                         content may be referred to. Durability criteria like minimum
                         cement content and water cement ratio, etc. should also be
                         given due consideration.

                         Minimum cement content mentioned elsewhere from
                         durability considerations shall not be reduced. From
                         strength considerations, these cements shall be used with a
                         certain caution as high early strengths of cement in the 1 to
                         28 day range can be achieved by finer grinding and higher
                         constituent ratio for C3S/C2S, where C3S is Tricalcium
                         Silicate and C2S is Dicalcium Silicate. In such cements, the
                         further growth of strength beyond say 4 weeks may be
                                         240
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         much lower than that traditionally expected. Therefore,
                         further strength tests shall be carried out for 56 and 90 days
                         to fine tune the mix design from strength considerations as
                         directed by the Engineer.

                         Total chloride content in cement shall not exceed 0.05
                         percent by mass of cement. Total sulphur content calculated
                         as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) shall in no case exceed 2.5
                         percent and 3 percent when Tri-calcium aluminate percent
                         by mass is upto 5 or greater than 5 respectively.

                         Cement procured from non B.I.S. license firms will not be
                         allowed.

                         The Contractor has to purchase the cement on the name of
                         work and on the name of the contractor. The cement
                         without mentioning the above two names will not be
                         accepted.

                         Manufactures test certificate shall be submitted to the
                         Engineer by the Contractor for every consignment of
                         cement. The certificate should cover all the tests for
                         chemical requirements, physical requirements and chloride
                         content as per the provisions of IS:8112/ IS: 12269.

                         Independent tests of samples drawn from the consignment
                         shall be carried out at the site laboratory or in an
                         independent laboratory approved by the Engineer,
                         immediately after delivery. The following properties shall be
                         tested.

                         i)    Setting Time
                         ii)   Compressive Strength

                         The cost of the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. In
                         case the cement is stored beyond 90 days from the date of
                         delivery at site, the following tests shall be carried out at the
                         site laboratory before the cement is used.
                         i) Setting Time
                         ii) Compressive strength.
                               Lot size for independent testing of cement at site shall
                               be the quantity received at site on any day subject to a
                               maximum of 500 tonnes.

 CLAUSE 1007             COARSE AGGREGATES

                         Delete from the first sentence “crushed gravel
                         …………….inert material” appearing in 4th and 5th line of
                         Para 1.

                         Add the following at the end of Para 2.


                         “Costs of all tests shall be borne by the Contractor.”

                                        241
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                         Add the following at the end of the Clause:

                         "Integrated stone crusher with Primary and Secondary
                         (Cone or Impact Type) crushers shall be deployed for
                         getting proper size and grading of coarse aggregates."

                         The alkali aggregate reactivity should be measured and
                         reported for getting approval for the source aggregates at
                         the beginning of the work using methods given in IS: 2386.
                         The tests may be repeated if the source, or the type of rock
                         being exploited for winning aggregates, changes.

 CLAUSE 1008             SAND/FINE AGGREGATES

                         Add the following at the end of 2nd paragraph:

                         “The alkali aggregate reactivity should be measured and
                         reported for obtaining approval for the source.”

                         Add the following paragraph at the end of the clause:

                         ‘As far as possible natural sand shall be used for sand/fine
                         aggregates. If natural sand is not available within 50 Km or
                         government has stopped sand mining, the contractor shall
                         obtain suitable alternative viz. crushed stone, crushed sand
                         etc. to substitute the natural sand. All alternative sand shall
                         confirm to IS:383 and tests for conformity shall be carried
                         out as per IS:2386 (Parts I to VIII). No separate payment will
                         be made on account of non-availability of natural sand,
                         arranging crusher sand and increase in leads, etc”

 Clause 1009             STEEL

 Clause 1009.2           Steel For Prestressing

                         Add (e) to the list of prestressing steel:

                         “e) Stress relieved low relaxation seven ply strand for
                             prestressed concrete - IS: 14268.”

 Clause 1009.3           Reinforcement / Untensioned Steel

                         Replace Table 1000.3 with the following:

                         Reinforcement shall consist of the following grades of
                         reinforcing bars, designated by their characteristic strength,
                         where characteristic strength fy shall be taken as that
                         specified in governing IS specifications listed in Table 3 as
                         the minimum value of 0.2% proof stress or yield stress.

                         G r a d e Bar Type conforming to Charecteristi E l a s t i c
                         Designation governing         IS c strength modulus
                                     specifications       (fy MPa)      (GPa.)
                                        242
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         Fe 240        IS:432 Part I Mild Steel 240         200
                         Fe 415        IS:1786 Thermo           415         200
                                       mechanically treated
                                       (TMT) High yield
                                       strength deformed bars
                                       (HYSD)
                         Fe 500        IS:1786 Thermo           500         200
                                       mechanically treated
                                       (TMT) High yield
                                       strength deformed bars
                                       (HYSD)
                         Note: Wire fabrics conforming to IS: 1566 can be used.

                         Any other reference to “HYSD” bars in the specifications
                         shall be read as “TMT” bars.

                         Delete the last Para of the Clause

 CLAUSE 1010             Water

                         Delete the Clause and substitute as given below:


                         Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free
                         from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar,
                         organic materials or other substances that may be
                         deleterious to concrete or steel.

                         In case of doubt regarding development of strength, the
                         suitability of water for making concrete shall be ascertained
                         by the compressive strength and initial setting time tests.

                         The sample of water taken for testing shall represent the
                         water proposed to be used for concreting, due account
                         being paid to seasonal variation. The sample shall not
                         receive any treatment before testing other than that
                         envisaged in the regular supply of water proposed for use in
                         concrete. The sample shall be stored in a clean container
                         previously rinsed out with similar water.

                         Average 28 days compressive strength of at least three 150
                         mm concrete cubes prepared with water proposed to be
                         used shall not be less than 90 per cent of the average of
                         strength of three similar concrete cubes prepared with
                         distilled water. The cubes shall be prepared, cured and
                         tested in accordance with the requirements of BIS: 516

                         The initial setting time of test block made with the
                         appropriate cement and the water proposed to be used shall
                         not be less than 30 minutes and shall not be more than + 30
                         minutes from the initial setting time of control test block
                         prepared with the same cement and distilled water. The
                         test blocks shall be prepared and tested in accordance with
                         the requirements of BIS: 4031 (Part 5).

                                       243
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                         The pH value of water shall be not less than 6. Potable
                         water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing
                         concrete. As a guide the following concentrations represent
                         the maximum permissible values:

                         a)   To neutralise 100 ml sample of water, using
                              phenolphthalein as an indicator, it should not require
                              more than 5 ml of 0.02 normal NaOH. The details of
                              test are given in 8.1 of BIS : 3025 (Part 22).

                         b)   To neutralise 100-ml sample of water, using mixed
                              indicator, it should not require more than 25 ml of 0.02
                              normal H2SO4. The details of test shall be given in
                              Clause 8 of BIS: 3025 (Part 23).




                         Permissible limits for solids shall be as given in following
                         table:

                                                       Tested as per          Permissibl
                                                                               e Limit
                                                                                (mg)
                                Organic              BIS 3025 (Pt. 18)        200 mg/lit

                               Inorganic             BIS 3025 (Pt. 18)           3000
                                                                                 mg/lit

                          Sulphates (as SO3)         BIS 3025 (Pt. 28)        400 mg/lit

                           Chlorides (as CL)         BIS 3025 (Pt. 32)        2000
                                                                              mg/lit for
                                                                              concrete
                                                                              work not
                                                                              containing
                                                                              embedde
                                                                              d steel
                                                                              and 500
                                                                              mg/lit for
                                                                              pre-stress
                                                                              ed /
                                                                              reinforced
                                                                              concrete
                                                                              work.
                           Suspended matter          BIS 3025 (Pt. 17)        2000
                                                                              mg/lit


                                        244
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                         Mixing or curing of concrete with seawater is not permitted
                         because of presence of harmful salts in seawater.

                         Water found satisfactory for mixing is also suitable for
                         curing concrete. However, water used for curing should not
                         produce any objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the
                         concrete surface. The presence of tannic acid or iron
                         compounds is objectionable.

 CLAUSE 1012             CONCRETE ADMIXTURES

                         Add the following at the end of paragraph 2 of Clause
                         1012.1:


                         “Admixtures shall not impair the durability of concrete; they
                         shall not combine with the ingredients to form harmful
                         compounds or endanger the protection of reinforcement
                         against corrosion. Only chloride free admixtures shall be
                         used.”

                         Paragraph 3 of 1012.1 shall read as follows :

                         “For all admixtures being used the packing shall be marked
                         with the name of the supplier/manufacturer, brand name
                         (name of product) and main effect, a certificate for the
                         admixture in question shall be submitted.”

                         The certificate shall include the following information:

                         General

                         a)   Chemical name of the active component in the
                              admixture.
                         b)   Values of dry material content, ash content and
                              relative density of admixture, which can be used for
                              uniformity tests.
                         c)   Chloride ion content expressed as a percentage of
                              weight of cement.
                         d)   pH value and colour.
                         e)   Normal side effects e.g. whether the admixture leads
                              to air entrapment at recommended dosage and if so to
                              what extent.
                         f)   Side effects when overdosed.
                         g)   If two or more admixtures have to be used in one mix,
                              their compatibility.
                         h)   Increase in risk of corrosion to reinforcements and
                              embodiments due to the use of admixture.
                         i)   Latest date of test and name of test laboratory.

                         B)     Storing

                         a)     Shelf life.

                                        245
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         b)     Max. & min. allowable temperature.
                         c)     Other instructions (e.g. requirements of stirring).

                         C)     Dosage

                         a)     Maximum and minimum to be specified as a
                                percentage of weight of cement.

                         Add the following at the end of the clause:

                         “After selecting a few acceptable brands & types of
                         admixture based on the manufacturer's data/technical
                         literature, independent acceptance tests should be carried
                         out for the same using the approved combinations of
                         cement /sand/aggregates intended for use in the Project.
                         After establishing the basic acceptability using strength
                         criteria (compression & tensile strengths) a number of trial
                         mixes be designed using different proportions of
                         admixtures/cement/water etc. to establish the data bank on
                         the behaviour of the admixture for the project site
                         conditions. A spectroscopic signature of accepted product
                         should be obtained and preserved for comparison for
                         acceptance of the production lots.”

                         Retrials should be conducted with change in source/type of
                         cement.

                         Workmanship

                         The dosage should be finalised on the basis of field trial and
                         special mechanical devices should be used for dispensing
                         the admixture in the batching/mixing plant. No addition of
                         admixture after dosage is permitted (including addition in
                         transit mixers).

                         Manufacturer's     experts   should    be   available      for
                         consultation/trouble-shooting of problems associated with
                         their product. The conditions of storage, shelf life etc., as
                         specified by the manufacturer should be strictly observed.
                         The manufacturer's Quality Assurance Plan during process
                         of production should be obtained and filed for
                         reference/record.”

 CLAUSE 1014             STORAGE OF MATERIALS

 Clause 1014.3           Aggregates

                         The following shall be added to this Clause:

                         "Aggregates shall be stored or stockpiled in their respective
                         size in such a manner that the various sizes will not become
                         intermixed before proportioning. They shall be stored,
                         stockpiled and handled in such a manner that will prevent
                         contamination by foreign materials."
                                       246
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


 CLAUSE 1015             TEST AND STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE

                         Add following after paragraph 2:

                         “Independent testing of prestressing steel shall be carried
                         out by the contractor for each consignment from each
                         source at site in the laboratory approved by the Engineer
                         before use. The tests shall be carried out for the properties
                         as listed in clause 7.2.1 of BS-5896: 1980. These tests are
                         in addition to the tests carried out by the manufacturer.”

 SECTION 1200            WELL FOUNDATIONS

 Clause 1202.2           Substitute 1st sentence of this clause “At least one
                         ….commencement of work” with “As soil investigation has
                         already been carried out for foundation of bridge for the
                         design, confirmatory bore holes shall be carried out for
                         foundation of bridge at least at one location or as instructed
                         by the Engineer at well foundation location, which shall be
                         considered incidental and no separate payment will be
                         made”.

                         Note:
                            1) Wherever both borehole and electrical resistivity (ER)
                            methods are proposed, atleast one ER shall be
                            conducted in the vicinity of one borehole to calibrate the
                            ER results with actual sub-soil findings and nature.
                            Other ER shall be carried out except locations of
                            proposed borehole.

                             Electrical Resistivity method shall be conducted at
                             location decided by the Engineer using either
                             Schlumberger or Wenner arrangement in accordance
                             with IS:3043 or EM 1110-1-1802.             Calibration of
                             equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to
                             the test. Specialist Geophysicist shall be responsible for
                             conducting and preparation of recommendations and
                             reports. The test results along with inference and
                             conclusions with supporting documents as regards to
                             sub-soil profiling and conditions with depth (upto atleast
                             twice the width of foundation below founding level) shall
                             be provided to Engineer within 3 days of testing.

 CLAUSE 1204             CUTTING EDGE

 Clause 1204.3           Para (1) of this clause shall read as under:

                         The cutting edge shall be laid 300 mm above the prevalent
                         water level or at top of well cap level as specified in the
                         drawings, in case the river bed is dry.

 CLAUSE 1205             WELL CURB

                                        247
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 Clause 1205.1           Following paras shall be added after Para 1:

                         The well curb shall be placed truly in position and level.
                         When the curb is to be laid in dry bed, the site shall be
                         leveled by open excavation before the cutting edge is
                         placed.
                         For wells, which are to be placed in water, on earthen/sand
                         island where possible shall be constructed and curb placed
                         or cast on this island. In case of any deep or fast flowing
                         water where an island may not be possible, as a special
                         measure, the precast curb/steel caisson may be floated and
                         lowered in its final position with the help of necessary
                         equipment.

 CLAUSE 1207.9           Add the following sentence

                         “Rock anchors provided in the steining of the well as shown
                         in the drawings shall only be measured for payment in
                         pneumatic methods of sinking only. For all other methods
                         seating of wells is incidental to the well sinking”.

 CLAUSE 1214             Measurement for payment

                         Add the following at the end of Para (a):

                         Earthwork in excavation above bottom of cutting edge shall
                         be measured in cubic meters and shall be carried out and
                         paid in accordance with section 300 of these specifications.


                         POINT “C” OF THIS CLAUSE SHALL BE SUBSTITUTED
                         AS UNDER.

                         “The measurement for well sinking shall be made in running
                         metres for different depths as specified in the Contract. The
                         depth of sinking shall be measured from the bottom level of
                         the well cap and to the final founding level.

                         In case, the sinking of well could not be made possible to
                         reach the founding level as designated due to incidental
                         obstructions or by any valid reasons or as directed by the
                         Engineer, then the measurement of sinking of well shall be
                         limited up to the actual achieved level only”.

 CLAUSE 1215             Rate

                         Add the following at the end of Para (a)

                         Diversion of active water channel for          carrying   out
                         construction shall be incidental to work.
                         Para (e) of this clause shall read as under:

                         The contract unit rate for sinking shall include the cost of
                         labour, tools and plant and for operation required, such as
                                       248
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         formation of island, dewatering, excavation and bailing out
                         material, providing and placing kentledge on top of well and
                         removing the same, sand filling and contingencies
                         warranting provision of temporary top plug or cap in the
                         event of floods being expected at site making further sinking
                         not possible, and also other incidental works to sink well to
                         the level shown on the drawings, the cost of confirmatory
                         bore hole indicated in clause no.1202.2. It shall also include
                         blasting or use of divers for removal of obstacles from under
                         the cutting edge of the well. The rate shall specify the strata
                         such as soil (all types of soil including boulders) and types
                         of rock.

 SECTION 1400            STONE MASONRY

 CLAUSE 1402             MATERIALS

                         Replace this clause by following:

                         “Stone to be used, besides quarry stone, shall be obtained
                         by dressing the boulders of average diameter not less than
                         300 mm and at least five faces shall be chiselled. All other
                         materials used in stone masonry shall confirm to Section
                         1000 except cement mortar which shall confirm to clause
                         1304.”

 SECTION 1500            FORM WORK

 CLAUSE 1501             DESCRIPTION

                         This Clause shall be read as under:

                         “The Contractor shall prepare a formwork mobilization and
                         utilization plan and submit the plan for Engineer’s approval
                         at least 21 days before the commencement of construction
                         of structures. The requirement of formwork shall be worked
                         out considering the overall construction program of all the
                         structures to be cast in one or more stages, as specified in
                         the drawings. The plan shall take into account the time
                         required for erection of formwork, retention in position,
                         stripping, and removal and subsequent use in the next and
                         subsequent structures.

                         Notwithstanding Engineer’s approval of mobilisation plan, if
                         due to any reason, Contractor has to arrange additional
                         formwork, to meet the requirements of the construction
                         program, it shall be done by the Contractor without any
                         extra cost to the Employer.”

 CLAUSE 1502             MATERIALS

                         This Clause shall read as under:

                         “All materials shall comply with the requirements of IRC-87.
                                        249
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                         Materials and components used for formwork shall be
                         examined for damage or excessive deterioration before use
                         / reuse and shall be used if found suitable after necessary
                         repair.

                         Only steel formwork shall be used. The steel used for forms
                         shall be of such thickness that the forms remain true to
                         shape. All bolts should be countersunk. The use of
                         approved internal steel ties or plastic spacers shall be
                         permitted. Structural steel tubes used as support for forms
                         shall have a minimum wall thickness of 4 mm.”

 CLAUSE 1503             DESIGN OF FORMWORK

 Clause 1503.2           The following shall be added to this clause :

                         “For distribution of load and load transfer to the ground
                         through staging, an appropriately designed base plate must
                         be provided which shall rest on firm sub-stratum.”

 CLAUSE 1504             WORKMANSHIP

 Clause 1504.1           The following shall be added to the end of this sub-clause :

                         “The loading from the formwork shall be distributed to the
                         soil or the permanent works below (e.g. pile cap) in such a
                         manner that any total or differential settlements are within
                         acceptable limits.” Subsoil characteristics shall be taken into
                         account while designing the staging to avoid untoward
                         failures. All the pipes etc. used for staging shall be free from
                         kinks, bends etc.

 Clause 1505             Substitute the following Clause in place of the existing
                         clause:

                         Formed & Unformed Surface Finishes

                         The surface finishes for formed and unformed surfaces are
                         classified and defined as below. Surface irregularities
                         permitted for the various classes of finishes are termed
                         either 'abrupt' or 'gradual'. Fins or offsets caused by
                         displaced or misplaced form sheeting, lining or form
                         sections, by loose knots in form lumber or by otherwise
                         defective form lumber are considered abrupt irregularities.
                         All other cases are described as gradual irregularities.
                         Gradual irregularities will be measured with a template
                         consisting of a straight edge for plain surfaces or its
                         equivalent for curved surfaces. The length of template for
                         testing gradual irregularities on formed surfaces shall be 1.5
                         m in length, the permissible gradual irregularities being
                         measured over this length of the template.

                         Finish F1, F2 and F3 shall describe formed surfaces.
                                        250
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                         Finish U1, U2 and U3 shall describe unformed surfaces.

                         Class F1 Finish

                         The class F1 finish shall apply to all formed surfaces for
                         which class F2 or F3 is not specified. It shall generally be
                         formed by steel frame mounted with steel sheet. It shall be
                         so constructed that there shall be no loss of material from
                         the concrete during placement and compaction. After
                         hardening, the concrete shall be in the required positions
                         and shall have the shape and dimensions called for in the
                         drawings. Any abrupt irregularities shall not exceed 10mm.
                         All fins and drifts in excess of the above limits shall be made
                         good by chipping and grinding if required by the Engineer.
                         Small blemishes caused by entrapped air or water may be
                         expected but the surface shall be free from voids,
                         honeycombing or other large blemishes. Class F1 finish
                         shall be generally specified for all surfaces buried in ground
                         or not visible during service or for surfaces that are to
                         receive further rendering treatment such as plastering etc.

                         Class F2 Finish

                         Class F2 finish shall be obtained by use of properly
                         designed forms with steel sheet lining. The abrupt
                         irregularities shall not exceed 5mm and gradual irregularities
                         shall be less than 8mm. Small blemishes caused by
                         entrapped air or water may be permitted but the surface
                         shall be free from honeycombing, voids and large
                         blemishes. Surface irregularities in excess of those
                         stipulated shall be removed by chipping or rubbing with
                         abrasive stone. Class 2 finish shall apply to exposed
                         surface of pier and abutments, pier cap and abutment caps.

                         Class F3 Finish

                         Class F3 finish shall be formed by specially designed close
                         jointed rigid forms having lining. The surface irregularities
                         shall be limited to nil for abrupt irregularities and 3 mm for
                         gradual irregularities. Class F3 finish may be obtained from
                         class F2 finish by carefully removing all abrupt irregularities
                         including fins and projections by rubbing/grinding. If steel
                         forms are used they shall have steel sheet backing faced
                         with plywood.

                         In addition, finish F3 shall include filling air holes with mortar
                         and treatment of the entire surface with sack rubbed finish.
                         It shall also include clean up of loose and adhering debris.
                         For a sack rubbed finish, the surface shall be prepared
                         within two days after removal of the forms. The surface shall
                         be wetted and allowed to dry slightly before mortar is
                         applied by sack rubbing. The mortar used shall consist of
                         one part cement to one and one half parts by volume of fine

                                        251
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         (I.S.No. 16 mesh) sand. Only sufficient mixing water to give
                         the mortar a workable consistency shall be used. The
                         mortar shall then be rubbed over the surface with a fine
                         burlap or linen cloth so as to fill all the surface voids. The
                         mortar in the voids shall be allowed to stiffen and solidify
                         after which the whole surface shall be wiped clean with
                         clean burlap such that all air holes etc., are filled and the
                         entire surface presents a uniform appearance without air
                         holes, irregularities etc. Class F3 finish shall apply to all
                         exposed surfaces of superstructure.

                         Class U1 finish

                         This is the screeded finish used on surfaces over which
                         other finishes such as wearing coats etc., are to be placed.
                         It is also the first step in the formation of U2 and U3
                         finishes. The finishing operation consists of levelling and
                         screeding the concrete to produce an even and uniform
                         surface so that the gradual irregularities are not greater than
                         5 mm. Surplus concrete should be removed immediately
                         after consolidation by striking it off with a sawing motion of a
                         straight edge or template across a wooden or metal strip
                         that has been set as guide. Unless the drawings specify a
                         horizontal surface or show the slope required, the tops of
                         narrow surfaces, such as stair treads, walls, curbs and
                         parapets shall be sloped approximately 10 mm per 300 mm
                         width. Surfaces to be covered with concrete topping,
                         terrazzo, and similar surfaces shall be smooth screeded and
                         levelled to produce even surfaces, irregularities not
                         exceeding 5mm.

                         Class U2 Finish

                         This is a floated finish used on all outdoor-unformed
                         surfaces not prominently exposed to view such as tops of
                         piers etc. The floating may be done by hand or power driven
                         equipment. It should not however be started until some
                         stiffening has taken place in the surface concrete and the
                         moisture film or 'shine' has disappeared. The floating should
                         work the concrete no more than is necessary to produce a
                         surface that is free from screed marks. All joints and edges
                         should be finished with edging tools. It shall include the
                         repair of gradual irregularities exceeding 5 mm. All abrupt
                         irregularities shall also be repaired unless a roughened
                         texture is specified.

                         Class U3 Finish

                         This is a travelled finish used on all surfaces exposed to
                         view at close quarters such as tops of parapets and kerbs
                         etc. Steel travelling should not be started until after the
                         moisture film and 'shine' have completely disappeared from
                         the floated surface and the concrete has hardened enough
                         to prevent an excess of fine material and water from being

                                        252
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         worked to the surface. Excessive travelling, especially if
                         started too soon, tends to produce crazing and lack of
                         durability. Too long a delay will result in a surface too hard
                         for proper finishing. Steel travelling should be performed
                         with a firm pressure that will flatten and smooth the sandy
                         surface free of blemishes, ripples and travel marks. It shall
                         include the repair of all abrupt irregularities and the repair of
                         gradual irregularities exceeding 5 mm. It shall also include
                         finishing the joints and the edges of concrete with edging
                         tools.

 CLAUSE 1506             PRECAUTIONS

                         Add the following as items (vii) to (ix) to the end of this
                         clause:

                             vii. Adequate support against sideway and lateral loads
                                  due to construction operations and wind shall be
                                  provided.

                             viii. Forms shall be rigid and of adequate section to
                                   reduce deflections. Forms shall have sufficient
                                   rigidity to resist horizontal pressures caused by
                                   flowing     concrete    resulting   from     use   of
                                   superplasticisers. The formwork shall resist the
                                   lateral pressure caused due to fast rate of placement
                                   by concrete pumps.

                               ix.       In case cantilevers are supported directly
                                 from the ground, the supports for cantilevers shall be
                                 removed simultaneously with main supports only
                                 after approval for the same by the Engineer.


 CLAUSE 1508             REMOVAL OF FORMWORK

                         Add the following at the end of paragraph 3 of Clause 1508

                         “ Field cure cubes strength to be checked for respective
                         structural items before removing their for work.”

                         Add the following as paragraph 5 to Clause 1508.

                         “For prestressed units, the side forms shall not be released
                         before initial setting time (or) as decided by the Engineer
                         and the soffit forms shall permit, without restraint,
                         deformation of the member, when prestressing is applied.
                         Form supports and forms for cast-in-situ members shall not
                         be removed until sufficient prestressing has been applied to
                         carry the dead load and any formwork supported by the
                         member and anticipated construction loads”.

 CLAUSE 1509             RE-USE OF FORMWORK


                                        253
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         This Sub-Clause shall be substituted as under:

                         “After forms are stripped, all materials to be reused shall be
                         thoroughly cleaned. Holes bored through sheathing for form
                         ties shall be plugged by driving in common corks or foamed
                         plastics. Patching plaster may also be used to fill small
                         holes. After cleaning and before re-fixing, each formwork
                         shall be got approved by the Engineer.

                         Formwork and staging shall be so used as to maintain
                         quality of the exposed surface. However, if in the opinion of
                         the Engineer, any particular panel/member has become
                         unsatisfactory for use at any stage, the same shall be
                         rejected.

                         All bent steel props shall be straightened before reuse. The
                         maximum deviation from straightness shall not exceed
                         1/600 of length. Engineer will decide the suitability of props
                         for reuse depending on their condition. Decision of the
                         engineer regarding acceptability of props shall be final. The
                         maximum permissible axial loads in used props shall be
                         suitably reduced depending upon their condition.”

 CLAUSE 1510             SPECIALISED FORMWORK

                         Replace the words ‘slip-form work’ by ‘climbing formwork’ in
                         the first sentence of this clause.
                         The first sentence of Para 2 of this clause shall read as
                         follows:
                         Slip forming is not permitted.
                         Replace the word “plywood” by “marine plywood” in the
                         fourth paragraph of this clause.

 CLAUSE 1513             RATE

                         Add the following at the end of the first paragraph:

                         “The unit rate shall also include all costs for preparation of
                         erection scheme, designs of false work and formwork and
                         their approval.”

 SECTION 1600            STEEL REINFORCEMENT (UNTENSIONED)

 CLAUSE 1602             GENERAL

                         Paragraph 2 of Clause 1602 shall read as follows:

                         “Reinforcements shall be thermo mechanically treated
                         (TMT) deformed bars of grade Fe 415 conforming to IS:
                         1786. Only uncoated steel shall be used as reinforcement
                         unless specified”.

 CLAUSE 1604             BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT

                                        254
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         The first paragraph of this Clause shall read as under:

                         “The reinforcement shown on the drawings shall be
                         considered merely symbolic representations of the shape
                         and position and shall not be used by the Contractor to
                         justify any deviation from the stipulated requirements. Bar
                         bending schedules and any supplementary drawings as
                         may be required shall be furnished by the Contractor and
                         got approved by the Engineer before start of work. The
                         bending schedules shall state the number, shape and length
                         of bar and weight in respect of each type. System of bar
                         referencing should be coherent and systematic and conform
                         to SP: 34 (SNT) 1987 published by BIS. A separate bar
                         bending schedule shall be prepared for auxiliary bars like
                         spacers chairs etc”

 CLAUSE 1605             PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT

                         Paragraph I (i) of clause 1605 shall read as follows:

                         “Cover blocks shall be made of concrete or cement mortar
                         with the same durability properties as the surrounding
                         concrete and with the same type of constituents. In visible
                         surfaces, the cover blocks shall be of the same colour and
                         texture as the surrounding concrete. The Contractor’s
                         proposal for cover blocks shall be submitted to the Engineer
                         for acceptance.”

                         Add the following as sub para (f) to this clause

                         Tolerances:

                         1.   Tolerance of cover: Deviation shall not exceed +10 mm.
                              No negative tolerance is allowed.

                         2.   Tolerance in position: Tolerance for deviation from the
                              positions shown in the drawings shall not exceed the
                              following:

                         Structural depth d (mm)        Tolerance(mm)
                            d < 1000                          < 10
                            1000 < d < 2000                   < 0.01d
                            2000 < d                          < 20

 CLAUSE 1606             BAR SPLICES

 Clause 1606.1           Lapping

                         First sentence of Clause 1606.1 shall read as follows:

                         “To the extent possible, all reinforcement shall be provided
                         in full lengths as indicated in drawings.”


                                        255
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         Add the following as paragraph 2 of Clause 1606.1:

                         “The location of joints in continuous reinforcing bars, not
                         shown in drawings, shall be submitted to the Engineer for
                         acceptance. If nothing contrary has been specified, the
                         number of bars to be joined in any cross-section shall not
                         exceed one-third of the total.”

 Clause 1606.2           Welding

 Clause1606.2.1          Add the following at the end of the paragraph:

                         “In prestressed concrete members, when welding of
                         untensioned reinforcement is permitted by the Engineer, it
                         shall be carried out before insertion of the prestressing
                         tendons.”

 CLAUSE 1607             TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

                         Add the following as the last paragraph of Clause 1607:

                         “Manufacturer’s test certificate regarding compliance with
                         Indian Standards for each lot of steel shall be obtained and
                         submitted to the Engineer. If required by the Engineer, the
                         Contractor shall carry out confirmatory tests in the presence
                         of a person approved by the Engineer. Cost of these tests
                         shall be borne by the Contractor. The sampling and testing
                         procedure shall be as laid down in I.S.1786-1985. However
                         if any test piece selected from a lot fails, no re-testing shall
                         be done and the lot rejected.”

 SECTION 1700            STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

 CLAUSE 1703             GRADES OF CONCRETE


                         Add the following at the end of this Clause.

                         “Concrete mixes leaner than M15 shall be called as nominal
                         mix concrete.

                         Nominal mix concrete is that concrete for which concrete
                         is not to be designed by tests and in which the proportions
                         of materials are in accordance with the drawings and the
                         specification Clause mentioned below:

                         i)    All the materials for this concrete shall conform to
                               section 1000 of MOSRTH Specification

                         ii)   Minimum cement content and maximum water cement
                               ratio for above said nominal mix concrete shall conform
                               to Clause 1703.2 and Table 1700-3(A) of MOSRTH
                               Specification.

                                        256
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         iii) Mixing of above-said nominal mix concrete shall
                              conform to Clause 1708 of MOSRTH Specification.

                         iv) Transporting, Placing and Compaction of above said
                             nominal mix concrete shall conform to Clause 1709 of
                             MOSRTH Specification.”


 CLAUSE 1704             PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE

                         Last sentence of paragraph 1 shall be as follows :

                         “Other type of admixtures shall be used with the approval of
                         the Engineer.”

 Clause 1704.1           Read the item No. 5 of Table 1700-4 as under:

                                TYPE                              SLUMP (mm)
                          5.    Underwater concreting through        100-150
                                tremie e.g. bottom plug,
                                cast-in-situ piling.

 Clause 1704.2           Add the following at the end of Table 1700.5 :

                          Concrete Grade       Current Margin     Target Mean
                                               (MPa)              Strength (MPa)
                          M60                  14                        74


                         Add the following at the end of this Clause:

                         “In proportioning concrete, the quantity of both cement and
                         aggregate shall be determined by weight. Where the weight
                         of cement is determined by accepting the manufacturer’s
                         weight per bag, a reasonable number of bags shall be
                         weighed separately to check the net weight. Where cement
                         is weighed from bulk stock at site and not by bag, it shall be
                         weighed separately from the aggregates. Water shall either
                         be measured by volume in calibrated tanks or weighed. All
                         measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean and
                         serviceable condition. Their accuracy shall be periodically
                         checked.

                         It is most important to keep the specified water-cement ratio
                         constant and at its correct value. To this end, moisture
                         content in both fine and coarse aggregates shall be
                         determined as frequently as possible; frequency for a given
                         job being determined by the Engineer according to the
                         weather conditions. The amount of mixing water shall then
                         be adjusted to compensate for variations in the moisture
                         content. The determination of moisture content in the
                         aggregates shall be done as per IS: 2386 (Part III). Suitable
                         adjustments shall also be made in the weight of aggregates
                         to allow for the variation in weight of aggregates due to
                                       257
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         variation in their moisture content.”

 Clause 1704.4           Additional Requirements

                         In Para (a) substitute "0.06%" for "0.1%"; "0.06%" for "0.2%;
                         and “0.1%" for "0.3%” for the three items respectively.

 Clause 1704.6           Add the following as clause 1704.6

                         “Materials for pumped concrete:

                         Materials for pumped concrete shall be batched consistently
                         and uniformly. Maximum size of aggregate shall not exceed
                         one-third of the internal diameter of the pipe.

                         Grading of aggregate shall be continuous and shall have
                         sufficient ultra fine materials (materials finer than 0.25 mm).
                         Proportion of fine aggregates passing through a 0.25 mm
                         sieve shall be between 15% and 30% and that passing
                         through 0.125 mm sieve shall not be less than 5% of the
                         total volume of aggregate. Admixtures to increase
                         workability can be added. When pumping long distances
                         and in hot weather, set retarding admixtures can be used.
                         Fluid mixes can be pumped satisfactorily after adding
                         plasticisers and super plasticisers. Suitability of concrete
                         shall be verified by trial mixes and by performing pumping
                         tests.”

 CLAUSE 1705             ADMIXTURES
                         This Clause shall be read as under:
                         “Duly tested admixtures / additives conforming to IS: 6925
                         and IS: 9103 (without replacement of cement) may be used
                         subject to satisfactory proven use, with the approval of the
                         Engineer. The strength of the mix so designed using
                         admixtures is to be tested for conformity with that of
                         controlled concrete as per IS 9103. Admixtures generating
                         hydrogen or nitrogen and containing chlorides, nitrates,
                         sulphides, sulphates and any other material liable to
                         adversely affect the steel or concrete, shall not be
                         permitted.

                         The general requirements, physical and                chemical
                         requirements shall be as per Clause 1012.”

 CLAUSE 1706             SIZE OF COARSE AGGREGATES

                         This Clause shall be read as follows:

                         The size (maximum nominal) of coarse aggregates for
                         concrete to be used in various components shall be given
                         as Table 1700-7

                                              Table 1700-7
                          SNo.      Components                            Maximum
                                        258
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                                                                         nominal
                                                                          size of
                                                                         Coarse
                                                                        aggregate
                                                                           (mm)

                                                                             20
                          a.   RCC Well Curb.
                                                                             40
                          b.   RCC / PCC well steining, PCC
                               below foundations and approach
                               slab,    annular filling around
                               foundations.                                  40

                          c.   Well cap or pile cap; solid wall type
                               abutments, piers, median walls,
                               splayed wing walls and their                  20
                               foundations.

                          d.   RCC works in T-beam and slab /
                               solid slab / voided slab and box
                               girder superstructure, wearing coat,
                               kerb, crash barrier, approach slab,
                               dirt walls, coping on masonry wing
                               walls, hollow abutments and piers,
                               pier / abutment caps, pedestals, dirt
                               walls, piles, all components of
                               counter fort type abutments,
                               columns, cantilever return walls etc.         20

                          e.   All PSC works                            As specified
                                                                           by the
                          f.   Any other item                            Engineer



                         Maximum nominal size of aggregates shall also be
                         restricted to the following :

                         The maximum size of the coarse aggregate may be as large
                         as possible within the limits specified, but in no case greater
                         than one quarter of the minimum thickness of member or 10
                         mm less than the minimum lateral clear distance between
                         individual reinforcements or 10mm less than the minimum
                         clear cover to any reinforcement.

                         The proportions of the various individual size of aggregates
                         shall be so adjusted that the grading produces densest mix
                         and the grading curve corresponds to the maximum nominal
                         size adopted for the concrete mix.

 CLAUSE 1707             EQUIPMENT

                         Paragraph 1 of this Clause shall be read as under:

                                        259
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                         “Unless specified otherwise, equipment for production,
                         transportation and compaction of concrete shall be as
                         under”

                         a)     For Production of Concrete:

                         i)      Batching and mixing of the concrete shall be done in
                                concrete batching and mixing plant fully automatic of
                                40 cum per hour minimum capacity. The plant shall
                                be approved by the Engineer

                         ii)    In special case, for culverts, the Engineer may allow
                                mixing of concrete for small pours (< 5 cu. m.) by a
                                diesel or electrically operated mechanical mixer with
                                integrated weigh batching facility having a capacity
                                of 0.5 cum. and automatic water measuring system.

                         Paragraph 3 of this clause shall read as follows:

                         The accuracy of measuring devices shall fall within the
                         following limits:

                         Measurement of Cement         +1% of the quantity of cement
                                                         in each batch.


                         Measurement of Water          +1% of the quantity of water
                                                          in each batch.

                         Measurement of Aggregate         + 2% of the quantity of
                                                         Aggregate in each batch.

                         Measurement of Admixture    +1% of the quantity of
                                               Admixture in each batch.

                         Paragraph 3(b) & 3(c) shall remain unchanged.

                         Add the following paragraph at the end of the clause:

                         Batching, mixing transportation and placing concrete.

                         Once the concreting of a section is started, it has to be
                         completed as a continuous operation. Before starting an
                         important placement, the Contractor shall submit to the
                         Engineer an equipment list to ensure that sufficient
                         equipment is available for batching, mixing, transporting and
                         placing concrete and once the concreting of a section is
                         started, it can be completed as a continuous operation
                         within a reasonable time.

 CLAUSE 1709             TRANSPORTING, PLACING AND COMPACTION OF
                         CONCRETE


                                        260
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         Replace the last sentence of paragraph 1 with the following
                         sentence:

                         ‘Concrete shall not be freely dropped into place from a
                         height exceeding 2.0 metres’

                         Add the following paragraph at the end of the clause :

                         “For Placing Concrete with Pumps: Pipe lines from the
                         pump to the placing area should be laid out with a minimum
                         of bends. For large concrete placements, standby pumps
                         shall be available. Suitable valves (air release valves,
                         shutoff valves, etc.) shall be provided as per the site needs.
                         The pumping of concrete shall be preceded by a priming
                         mix to lubricate the pump and pipeline. A rich mix of creamy
                         consistency shall be required for lubricating the pipelines.
                         Continuous pumping shall be done to the extent possible.
                         After concrete has been placed the lines and all related
                         equipment shall be cleaned immediately. A plug sponge ball
                         shall be inserted in the end near the pump and shall be
                         forced through the line by either water or air pressure. Pipes
                         for pumping should not be made from materials, which can
                         harm concrete. Aluminium alloy pipelines shall not be used”.

 CLAUSE 1710             CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

                         Amendments to Appendix 1700/I

                         In the first paragraph under the heading “Preparation of
                         the Surface of the Joint”, after the second sentence "The
                         surface shall be roughened." insert the following sentence:

                         The coarse aggregate shall be made visible to a depth of
                         5mm to 10mm”.

                         At the end of the third paragraph under the heading
                         “Preparation of the Surface of the Joint” add the
                         following:

                         "Bush hammering is not permitted since it loosens the
                         coarse aggregate and results in extensive micro cracks."

                         Under the heading "Concreting of Joints" add the
                         following at the end of para 3:

                         "At vertical construction joints, a fine mesh on the inner
                         surface of the stopping board shall be placed, if directed by
                         the Engineer, to facilitate removal of laitance."

 CLAUSE 1712             ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITION

 Clause 1712.2           Hot weather Conditions


                                        261
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         Add the following at the end of paragraph 1 of the above
                         clause:


                         “Where the Contractor proposes to use ice to cool the
                         concrete or mixing water or any of the ingredients, the
                         Contractor shall provide a refrigeration plant to avoid use of
                         contaminated ice.”

 CLAUSE 1713             PROTECTION AND CURING

 Clause 1713.1           Water Curing

                         Replace the last paragraph with the following:

                         The concrete should be kept constantly wet for a minimum
                         period of 14 (fourteen) days except for rapid hardening
                         cement concrete when it can be reduced to 5 (five) days.
                         Water should be applied on unformed surfaces as soon as it
                         can be done without marring the surface and on formed
                         surfaces immediately after the forms are stripped. The
                         concrete shall be kept constantly wet by ponding or covered
                         with a layer of sacking, canvas, Hessian or a similar
                         absorbent material and kept constantly wet.

                         After placing and during the first stages of hardening
                         concrete shall be protected from harmful effects of sunrays,
                         drying winds, cold, running water, shocks, vibrations, traffic
                         including construction traffic etc.

                         Approved concrete curing compounds should be preferred
                         where water curing cannot be done reliably.

 CLAUSE 1715             TOLERANCES

 Clause 1715.1           Sectional Dimensions

                         Add the following as the second sentence of the Clause:

                         In the absence of any information in drawings or
                         specifications, for particular cases, the following limitations
                         shall apply:

                                                               Tolerances (mm)
                             Dimension (mm) ‘a’           ‘ a = (anominal – aactual)’

                                    a   200                          a <5

                                200 < a    2000                 a <3 .5 + 0.0075a

                                    2000 < a                    a <16.5 + 0.001a

 Clause 1715.2           Deviations from Position etc.
                                        262
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                         Deviation from specified position in plan

                         a) Variation in levels at top                          +10 mm

                         b) Variation of reduced levels of bearing areas        + 5 mm

                         c) Variation in plumb over full height of piers        +10 mm

                         d) Surface irregularities       measured   with   3m
                            straight edge

                                (i)             All surfaces except bearing     + 5 mm
                                                areas

                                (ii)            Bearing areas                   + 3 mm

                         e) Variation in length of superstructure – overall     +10mm or
                            and length between bearings                         +0.1% of
                                                                                the span
                                                                                length,
                                                                                which
                                                                                ever is
                                                                                lesser.

 Clause 1716             TESTS AND STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE

 Clause 1716.2.5.        Acceptance Criteria

                         Compressive Strength

                         Substitute Clause 1716.2.5 (a) with the following:

                         The mean strength determined from any group of four
                         consecutive     samples    should    exceed   the specified
                         characteristic compressive strength by 3 MPa.




                                        263
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

   SECTION 1800            PRESTRESSING

   CLAUSE 1801           General

                         Add the following as the last paragraph of this clause:

                         Prestressing     system     shall   conform to FIP
                         Recommendation-“Recommendations of acceptance of
                         post-tensioning systems” June 1993.

   CLAUSE 1802           Materials

   Clause 1802.2         Sheathing

   Clause 1802.2.1       1st para is modified as follows.

                         The sheathing shall be of corrugated type.

                         High-density polyethylene pipe conforming to IRC 18-2000
                         shall only be provided. The wall thickness shall not be less
                         than 2.3 + 0.3mm. If there is a difficulty in arranging the HDPE
                         pipes and the engineer is fully convinced of this difficulty the
                         engineer may permit the usage of cold rolled, cold annealed,
                         mild steel conforming to IS 513 intended for mechanical
                         treatment and surface refining but not for quench hardening or
                         tempering instead of HDPE sheathing.

                         Third para 1st line is modified as follows.

                         The thickness of metal sheathing in case it is used shall not be
                         less than 0.3 and 0.4mm for sheathing ducts having internal
                         diameter upto 75mm and 90mm respectively. For larger
                         diameter of ducts thickness of sheathing shall be based on
                         recommendations of pre-stressing system supplier.

   Clause 1802.2.2       Replace existing Clause with the following:

                         The internal area of the sheathing duct shall be in accordance
                         with the recommendations of the system manufacturer. In
                         case of 7T13, 12T13, and 19T13 sizes of tendons, the inner
                         diameter of the sheathing shall not be less than 55 mm, 75
                         mm and 85 mm respectively or those shown in the drawing,
                         whichever is greater. These dimensions are for post-threaded
                         cables.

   Clause 1802.3         Add the following at the end of the Clause:

                         “Prestressing accessories like jacks, anchorage, wedges,
                         block plates, etc. being patented items shall be obtained from
                         authorised manufacturers only. The prestressing components
                         and accessories shall be subjected to an acceptance test prior
                         to their actual use on the works (guidance may be taken from
                         BS:4447).”
                                       264
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




   CLAUSE 1803              TESTING OF CABLE/ ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY

                       Add following Paragraphs to the section.

                       All samples shall be representative of the lot and in the case of
                       wire or strand shall be taken from the same master roll. At
                       least 5.0m length shall be selected from each lot for testing.
                       Also two anchorage assemblies, complete with distribution
                       plates of each size or types to be used, shall be tested.

                       Testing of anchorage – cable assemblies shall be carried out
                       in accordance with procedures in FIP document
                       “Recommendations for the acceptance of Post Tensioning
                       systems” – June 1993.

                       The frequency of such tests should be as follows:

                       1)    For acceptance of the tendon at the stage of submission
                             of tendons, the manufacturers certificate together with the
                             data of previously conducted and most recent test results
                             of “Acceptance Testing” is acceptable subject to further
                             testing as given below.

                       2)    Acceptance Testing for the works

                             a) Static load test for tendon-anchorage assembly

                                    A series of three tests using the proposed
                                    combination of anchorage systems and the
                                    pre-stressing strand/wire/bars. All the tests should
                                    meet the following requirements.
                                    Residual deformations of anchorage components
                                    after the test should confirm the reliability of the
                                    anchorage.
                                    The increase in the displacements between the
                                    anchorage components as well as between the
                                    pre-stressing steel and anchorage components
                                    should not be disproportionate to the increase in
                                    tendon force.
                                    The above relative displacements during the 0.8Fpk
                                    load stage should stabilise within the first thirty
                                    minutes of the load duration of 1 hour.
                                    The mode of failure of tendon should be by the
                                    fracture of the prestressing steel. Failure of the
                                    tendon should not be induced by the failure of
                                    anchorage components.
                                    The measured anchorage efficiency should be:
                                      A = Ftu     0.95 (Refer CEB/FIP Guidelines for
                                            Fpm           details).
                                    The total elongation u in free length of the tendon

                                         265
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                                    under the load Ftu should be u     2%



                       b)     Load Transfer Test

                       A series of three successful tests shall be carried out for
                       acceptance of the system.

                       Requirement:

                              Crack width upon first attainment of upper force 0.8 Fpk
                              (load point 4) should be 0.10 mm.
                              Crack width upon last attainment of lower force 0.12
                              Fpk (load point n-1) should be 0.10 mm.
                              Crack width upon final attainment of upper force 0.8
                              Fpk (load point n) should be 0.25 mm.
                              Readings of longitudinal and transverse strains should
                              have stabilised during cyclic loading. The strains can
                              be assumed to have stabilised if the increase of strain
                              in the last two load cycles is less than 5 %.
                              Readings of crack widths should have stabilised during
                              cyclic loading. The crack widths can be assumed to
                              have stabilised if the crack width does not increase by
                              more than 0.02 mm in the last two load cycles.
                              The measured failure load Fu must meet each of the
                              following requirements:


                       Fu   Fpk         fcm.e and Fu    1.1 Fpk
                                        fck.o

                       (Refer CEB/FIP Guidelines for details)

 Clause 1804.5         Insert following para after 1st Para

                       Mixture of water-soluble oil such as Dromas – B and Water is
                       to be flushed through empty metallic ducts if used before
                       threading of cables, and after threading of cable at frequency
                       of at least once in a month. The layer of oil formed on
                       sheathing/ prestressing steel shall be fully flushed out by using
                       clean water before final grouting by cement grout.

 CLAUSE 1805           The Clause shall be read as follows:
                       Prestressing operation and grouting shall be entrusted to only
                       specifically trained and qualified personnel. All prestressing
                       accessories shall be procured from authorised manufacturers
                       with in-house testing facilities. Contractors shall also be
                       required to engage specialised agencies who should also be
                       entrusted with the total service contract for fabrication of
                       cables, certificates shall also be accorded by such specialised
                                         266
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       agencies that the work has been carried out in accordance
                       with prescribed specifications. In exceptional cases where the
                       client is convinced that the contractor of the bridge itself is well
                       experienced and has qualified personnel and sufficient track
                       record to substantiate his performance in the particular system
                       of prestressing being adopted, the prestressing and grouting
                       operations could be entrusted to the contractor.

 CLAUSE 1806           TENSIONING EQUIPMENT

                       Add the following at the end of para 2.

                       Jack and Pump shall be calibrated by an approved laboratory
                       prior to use and then at intervals not exceeding three months.

 CLAUSE 1807           Add the following at the end of this clause:

                       The Contractor shall submit fabrication drawings, detailing
                       prestressing cables, anchorages, couplers, chairs and
                       supports, templates or forms holding anchorage assemblies
                       etc. for Engineer’s approval at least one month before
                       commencement of work in superstructure. Stressing schedules
                       shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to Engineer
                       for approval.

 CLAUSE 1808           Add the following at the end of clause1808.

                       Where directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall perform
                       full-scale site test to determine the adequacy of grout mix,
                       equipment and grouting method. The Contractor shall submit a
                       method statement detailing the test procedure.

                       Special Attention is directed to Appendix 1800/III of the
                       Standard Specifications.

                       Contractor shall arrange for testing of all grout components
                       and of the mix, prior to the start of grouting and whenever the
                       source of any component is changed, to ensure that the grout
                       is free of anything that could promote shrinkage or cracking of
                       the grout or corrosion in the tendons. Further samples of grout
                       and its components shall be obtained for each day of grouting
                       at each site where grouting is carried out and a full chemical
                       analysis shall be performed on the samples.

                       Add the following at the end of Para 3.1

                        “It is therefore necessary that the grout be continuously mixed
                       in a colloidal mixer with a minimum speed of 1000 rpm and
                       have discharge not exceeding 15m per second”.


 CLAUSE 1815           RATE

                       Add at end of Para 4:
                                        267
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                       Cost of fixing anchorages / sheathing for dummy cables and
                       future pre-stressing cables shall be incidental to work and shall
                       not be measured / paid extra. No additional cost shall be
                       payable for stressing of cables for compensation of short fall of
                       pre-stress or for any other reason.


 CLAUSE 1816           JOINTS IN CONSTRUCTION WITH PRE-CAST UNITS

                       Add new clause

                       Joints between a series of pre-cast concrete units, which are to
                       be pre-stressed together by post-tensioning, shall be such as
                       to ensure even transfer of compression from one unit to
                       another.

                       Whatever be the method of jointing, the holes of the
                       pre-stressing steel shall be accurately made and shall meet
                       one another in true alignment at ends. Jigs shall always be
                       used. Care shall be taken to ensure that the jointing material
                       does not enter the duct or press the sheath against the
                       pre-stressing steel.

                       Jointing by application of mortar on the face of a unit and then
                       placing another unit against it shall not be permitted.

                       Suitability and effectiveness of the method should be got
                       confirmed from a suitably designed mock-up.

 SECTION 2000          BEARINGS

 CLAUSE 2001           DESCRIPTION

                       Add the following as paragraph 2 of this clause:

                       Within 90 days of award, the Contractor shall submit detailed
                       specifications, designs and drawings including installation
                       drawings and maintenance manual, for the approval of the
                       Engineer. Designs shall also include review and modifications
                       of designs and drawings of bearing pedestals and other
                       elements required for installation. The installation of bearings
                       shall be carried out under the supervision of the manufacturer
                       of the bearings. The Contractor shall provide the bearings only
                       from the manufacturers approved and enlisted by the Ministry
                       of Shipping, Road Transport & Highways. In addition to routine
                       testing of the materials and bearings at manufactures
                       premises, the Contractor shall arrange at his own cost testing
                       of random samples of 1 % (Minimum 1 no. of each type) of
                       bearings from independent agencies, other than manufactures’
                       own facilities, duly approved by the Engineer. The bearings
                       shall be selected by the Engineer / his authorised
                       representative and duly sealed in his presence for dispatch to
                       the independent agency.
                                        268
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


 CLAUSE 2004           SPECIAL BEARINGS

 Clause 2004.1         Spherical Bearings:

                       The clause shall read follows:

                       Spherical Bearings: Spherical Bearings shall conform to the
                       requirements of sections 9.1 and 9.2 of BS 5400. However
                       materials of bearing elements may conform to Indian
                       Standards nearest to the specifications stated in the above
                       sections of BS: 5400.

 CLAUSE 2005           ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS

 Clause 2005.3         Acceptance Specifications

                       In Para 5, substitute the words "Engineer or his authorised
                       representative" for the word "Inspector".

 Clause 2005.3.5       Inspection Certificate

                       Substitute the words "Engineer or              his      authorised
                       representative" for the word "Inspector".

 Clause 2005.3.6       Quality Control Certificate

                       Delete the words “/Inspector” in the third paragraph.

 CLAUSE 2006           POT BEARINGS

                       The clause shall read follows:
                       Pot Bearings shall conform to the requirements of IRC: 83
                       (Part III)-2002.

 Clause 2006.1         General

 Clause 2006.1.2       Add after 2nd sentence “Provisions of IRC:83 (Part III) shall be
                       applicable for POT, POT cum PTFE, PIN and Metallic Guide
                       Bearings”

 CLAUSE 2009           Measurement for Payment

                       Add the following after Para 2:

                       "Tar Paper bearings shall be measured in square meters."

 Clause 2011           TAR Paper Bearing

                       Add clause 2011 after the clause 2010 as under

                       Paper bearing shall be reinforced bitumen laminated kraft
                       paper confirming to the requirements of IS-1398
                                       269
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


 SECTION 2100          OPEN FOUNDATIONS

 Clause 2106           TOLERANCES

                       Reference to Tolerance shall be made to Clause 1715.

 SECTION 2200          SUB-STRUCTURE

 Clause 2204           PIERS AND ABUTMENTS

                       Para 2 is replaced with:

                       “Slipforming will not be allowed.”
                       Add the following paragraph at the end of this clause:

                       “Where necessary suitable cofferdams or other means shall
                       be provided to exclude water from the construction area. The
                       Contractor shall provide necessary pumping equipment for
                       dewatering in working areas.”

 Clause 2210           RATE

                       This Clause shall read as follows:

                       "The contract rate for masonry, concrete and reinforcement in
                       substructure shall include all works as given in respective
                       sections and cover the cost of incidental items like providing
                       cofferdams, dewatering, providing special form work, where
                       necessary, and all other items for furnishing and providing
                       substructure as mentioned in this section.

                       The necessary material (thermocole, bituminous fibrous board
                       or equivalent material), labour, tools etc. required for
                       maintaining 20 / 40 mm gap between faces of various
                       structures (old / new) wherever required / as shown in
                       drawing shall be incidental to work and shall not be measured
                       / paid separately"


 SECTION 2300          CONCRETE SUPER-STRUCTURE

 Clause 2305           PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

 Clause 2305.1         PSC Girder and Composite RCC Slab

                       The heading of this clause shall read as follows:

                       PSC Solid Slab & PSC Girder and Slab

                       This Clause shall read as follows:
                                       270
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




 Clause 2305.1.1       PSC Solid Slab

                       Casting of the slab shall be done in a single stage without
                       construction joints.

                       The portions of deck near expansion joints shall be cast along
                       with reinforcements and embodiments for expansion joints.

                       The deck slab shall be finished rough, but true to lines and
                       levels as shown in drawings.

                       Bearings shall be set as shown in drawings.

 Clause 2305.1.2       PSC Girder and Slab

                       The Contractor shall, in his methods statement, indicate
                       location of construction joints for the Engineer's approval.

                       The surface finish of deck shall be finished rough, but true to
                       lines and levels as shown in drawings.

                       Bearings shall be set as shown in drawings

 Clause 2305.2         Box Girder

                       Add the following at the end of paragraph 1:

                       "The Contractor shall, in his methods statement, indicate
                       construction joints for Engineer's approval."

 SECTION 2500          RIVER TRAINING WORKS AND PROTECTION WORKS

 Clause 2504           PITCHING/REVETMENT ON SLOPES

                       The heading of this Clause shall be read as follows:
                       PITCHING/REVETMENT ON SLOPES AND FILTER MEDIA




                                        271
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                 ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




 Clause 2504.2.2       Filter Media
                        Add the following sentence at the end of the third paragraph
                        of this clause:
                        The material for filter media behind abutment shall conform
                        to general guidelines given in Appendix 6 of IRC- 78
                        (Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road
                        Bridges – Section: VII).
                         Add the following at the end of the clause
                        When the filter media is to be used behind abutment, wing
                        wall, retaining wall and return wall, then wire mesh and
                        coarse aggregate are to be provided on wall face all around
                        the weep holes to prevent escape of filter media. Provision of
                        wire mesh and coarse aggregate shall be considered
                        incidental to the work of providing filter media behind
                        structures with weep holes.

Clause 2600          EXPANSION JOINTS

Clause 2602          GENERAL

                     Paragraph c,d,e – deleted.

                     Add the following at the end of the clause:

                     “The expansion joints shall be procured only from those
                     manufacturers/suppliers of expansion joints who are
                     empanelled with MoRT&H.

                     The provisions of ‘the MoRT&H (formerly Ministry of Surface
                     Transport) issued modified interim specifications for expansion
                     joints vide letter dated 31/03/97 and revised vide letter No.
                     RW/NH-34059/1/96 – S&R dated 30/11/2000 and issued
                     corrigendum of same circular dated 15/01/2001’, as
                     reproduced below, shall be adopted.”




                                         272
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




       SUITABILITY CRITERIA FOR ADOPTION OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF
                           EXPANSION JOINTS
                       (Annex-I of above said circular)

 Sl.     Type of       Suitability for Adoption of     Expected       Special Consideration
 No    Expansion                   Joint              Service Life
 1.    Buried Joint   Simply supported spans upto    10 Years        Only for decks with
                      10 meters                                      bituminous / asphaltic
                                                                     wearing coat. Steel plate
                                                                     may need replacement, if
                                                                     found corroded or distorted
                                                                     at the time of relaying /
                                                                     renewal of wearing coat.
 2.    Filler Joint   Fixed end of simply            10 Years        The sealant and joint filler
                      supported spans with                           would need replacement if
                      insignificant movement or                      found damaged.
                      simply supported spans not
                      exceeding 10 meters
 3.    Asphaltic      Simply supported spans or      10 Years        Only for decks with
       Plug Joint     right or skew (upto 20                         bituminous / asphaltic
                      degree), moderately curved                     wearing coat. Not suitable
                      or wide deck with maximum                      for bridge with longitudinal
                      horizontal movement not                        gradient more than 2%
                      exceeding 25 mm. Ambient                       and cross camber / super
                      temperature should be in the                   elevation exceeding 3%.
                      range of 5 degree to 50                        Not suitable for curved
                      degree Celsius                                 spans and spans resting
                                                                     on yielding supports.
 4.    Compressio     Simply supported or            10 Years        Chloroprene / Closed
       n Seal         continuous spans, right or                     Form Seal may need
       Joint*         skew (up to 30 degree),                        replacement during
       (Chloropren    moderately curved with                         service.
       e Seal &       maximum horizontal
       Closed Cell    movement not exceeding 40
       Foam Seal)     mm.
 5.    Elastomeric    Simply supported or            10 Years        Liable to excessive wear
       Slab Seal      continuous spans, right or                     and tear under high traffic
       Joint*         skew (less than 20 degree),                    intensity. Not suitable for
                      moderately curved with                         bridges located in heavy
                      maximum horizontal                             rainfall area and spans
                      movement up to 50 mm.                          resting on yielding support.
 6.    Single Strip   Moderate to large simply       25 Years        Electrometric seal may
       Seal Joint*    supported cantilever /                         need replacement during
                      continuous construction                        service.
                      having right skew or curved
                      deck with maximum
                      horizontal movement up to70
                      mm


                                        273
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




 Sl.    Type of        Suitability for Adoption of       Expected         Special Consideration
 No    Expansion                   Joint                Service Life
  .
 7.    Modular        Large to very large                25 Years        Electrometric seal may
       Strip / Box    continuous / cantilever                            need replacement during
       Seal Joint*    construction with right deck                       service.
                      having maximum horizontal
                      movement in excess of 70
                      mm
  8. Special *        For bridges having wide            25 Years        Electrometric seal may
       joints for     decks and large span length                        need replacement during
       special        involving complex                                  service. Provision of these
       conditions     movements / rotations in                           joints may be made with
                      different directions / planes,                     prior approval of the
                      provision of special type of                       Ministry.
                      modular expansion joints
                      such as Swivel Joists joints
                      may be made.
 *       These are proprietary items for which 10 years warranty shall be insisted upon from the
 suppliers. The contractor shall submit all relevant information as per clause 115.1

The clause 2604 be replaced fully as below:

Clause 2604           BURRIED, ASPHALTIC PLUG and COMPRESSION SEAL
                      JOINTS

Clause 2604.1         BURIED JOINT
                      a)  This joint shall consist of continuously laid
                          bituminous/asphaltic surfacing over the joint gap bridged
                          by a steel plate resting freely over the top surface of the
                          deck concrete.
                      b)  The width of the joint gap shall be kept as 20 mm.
                      c)  The st late shall conform to weldable structural steel as
                          per IS: 2062. The plate shall be 12 mm thick and 200
                          mm wide. The plate shall be made of minimum number
                          of pieces (not exceeding two pieces per traffic lane
                          width) welded together to form the required length.
                      d)  8 mm dia, 100 mm long nails, spaced at 300 m centers
                          along the center line of the plate shall be welded to the
                          bottom surface of the steel plate to protrude vertically
                          into the joint gap in order to prevent dislodging of the
                          plate.
                      e)  The plate and the nails shall be protected against
                          corrosion by galvanizing or any other approved
                          anticorrosive coating with a minimum thickness of 100
                          micron. These shall be completely free of oil, rust, loose
                          paint or other similar material before application of
                          anticorrosive coating.

                                          274
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     f)    The concrete surface shall be free from any loose
                           material and cleared of any grease, oil, paint etc. and the
                           surface shall be sand blasted, clean of all laitance and
                           level true, prior to placement of the steel plate.
                     g)    The plate shall be placed symmetrical to the center line
                           of the joint and it shall be ensured that the plate does not
                           get displaced from its position while laying the wearing
                           course.

Clause 2604.2        ASPHALTIC PLUG JOINT

Clasue2604.2.1       Asphaltic plug joint shall consist of a polymer modified bitumen
                     binder,    carefully    selected     single   size    aggregate,
                     closure/bridging metallic plate and heat resistant foam
                     caulking/ backer rod.

Clause 2604.2.2      General Requirements

                     a)    The joints shall extend to the full depth of the wearing
                           course down to structural concrete. Where needed, a
                           recess may be cut into the deck slab concrete to
                           accommodate the minimum required depth of the joints.
                     b)    The joint shall be provided in the entire width of the
                           structure including kerb and / or footpath. A recess in the
                           kerb and / or footpath shall be made to allow the joint to
                           pass beneath them. The expansion gap in the adjoining
                           kerbs and / or footpaths shall be sealed with a suitable
                           sealant such as polysulphide sealant.
                     c)    Expansion joint shall cater for a horizontal movement of
                           25 mm & vertical movement of 2 mm. This shall be
                           certified by the manufacturer / supplier of the joint.
                     d)    The minimum width (in traffic direction) of the joint shall
                           be 500 mm and maximum width shall be 750 mm.
                     e)    Minimum depth of joint shall be 75 mm and maximum
                           depth shall not exceed 100 mm.
                     f)    The joint shall be capable of performing satisfactorily,
                           within the temperature (ambient) range of – 5 to +50
                           degree C.

Clause 2604.2.3      Material

                     a) Binder:

                     The polymer modified bitumen binder shall have the capacity
                     to fill the gaps and voids between single size aggregate and to
                     impart flexibility to accommodate various design movements. It
                     shall be patented blend of bitumen, synthetic polymer, fillers
                     and surface active agent and shall be so formulated as to
                     combine necessary fluidity for the installation process, low
                     temperature flexibility and flow resistance at high ambient
                     temperatures.

                     The binder shall satisfy following requirement:
                     Softening point                  : 100 deg. C minimum
                                        275
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     Core penetration at 25 deg.    :   100 mm max.
                     C., 0.1 mm (BS 2499)
                     Flow resistance at 70 deg.     :   3 mm max.
                     C., 5 hours (BS 2499)
                     Extension Test                 :   5 cycle of extension to 50
                     (blocks prepared to ASTMD          per cent at a rate of 3.2
                     1190 and tested to limits BS       mm/hour at 25 deg.C
                     2499)
                     Safe heating temperature       :   210 deg. C

                     b) Aggregates:

                     The aggregate shall be single size aggregate chosen from
                     basalt, granite, grit stone or gabro group. The nominal size of
                     aggregate shall be 12.5 mm for depths of joints upto 75 mm
                     and 20 mm for joints of more depths of joint. The aggregate
                     shall not be flaky and the Flakiness Index shall not be more
                     than 25 per cent. The aggregate shall satisfy following grading
                     requirements:



                                                     Nominal Size of Aggregate
                        IS Sieve Designation
                                                        20 mm           12.5 mm
                                                    Percent by weight passing the
                                                                sieve
                      26.5 mm                            100        --
                      19.9 mm                           85-100      100
                      13.2 mm                            0-35       85-100
                      09.5 mm                             0-7       0-35
                      06.3 mm                              --       0-7
                      02.3 mm                             0-2       0-2
                      600 micron                          ---       ---
                      75 micron                           0-1       0-1

                     The aggregate should have good (i) Polished Stone Value
                     (PSV), (ii) Aggregate Abrasion Value (AAV), (iii) Aggregate
                     Impact Value (AIV) and (iv) Aggregate Crush Value (ACV). In
                     addition, surface characteristics should promote proper
                     adhesion. The following are the required values:

                                               PSV > 60
                                               AAV < 05
                                               AIV < 18
                                              ACV= 10–25

                     c) Closure Plate

                     The closure plate shall be weldable structural steel conforming
                     to IS 2062. The minimum thickness of steel plate shall be 6
                     mm and the width shall not be less than 200 mm. Closure
                     plate shall be provided with as large length as possible and
                     welded together to form the required length. The number of
                                        276
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     pieces shall not be more than two per traffic lane width. It shall
                     be provided with equidistant holes at a maximum spacing of
                     300 mm centers for anchorage to the caulking/ backer rod
                     along the longitudinal center line of the plate. The plate shall
                     be protected against corrosion by galvanizing or any other
                     approved anti-corrosive coating paint with a minimum
                     thickness of 100 micron.




                     d) Foam caulking/ Backer rod

                     A closed-cell polyolefine or open cell polyurethene foam
                     cylindrical caulking or backer rod having diameter equal to 150
                     per cent of the joint opening shall be provided. It shall be heat
                     resistant and possess good flexibility and recovery
                     characteristics with density of 25 to 30 Kg/cum.

Clause 2604.2.4      Installation

                     a)     The Expansion joint shall be installed by the
                            manufacturer / supplier.
                     b)     The block out for the joint shall be marked and
                            constructed to the dimensions as indicated in the
                            drawing or recommended by the manufacturer /
                            supplier.
                     c)     The recess for the block out shall thoroughly cleaned of
                            any loose or foreign material wire brushing and air
                            blowing and dried with hot compressed air.
                     d)     The recess in the deck slab, if required, shall be
                            repaired with epoxy mortar and cleaned and dried
                            again.
                     e)     The foam caulking/backing rod shall be placed about
                            25 mm down into the joint opening.
                     f)     The aggregate shall be washed, cleaned and heated to
                            a temperature between 120-180 deg.C prior to
                            placement.
                     g)     The binder shall be preheated to temperature of 170 -
                            190° C before application.
                     h)     While sealing the joint opening with preheated binder,
                            care shall be taken that the binder does not spill on to
                            the joint surface of the deck.
                     i)     The joint shall not installed when the ambient
                            temperature goes below + 5 deg. C or above + 35 deg.
                            C. or while it is raining / snowing. (Planning for
                            installation must take into account the weather
                            condition.)
                     j)     When clement weather resumes, the joint installation
                            may be continued after the upper layer and / or
                            exposed surface of the partially completed joint has
                            been reprepared by heating and / or coating with binder
                            as necessary.

                                        277
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

Clause2604.2.5       Handling and Storage

                     All the aggregates and binder shall be pre-bagged and clearly
                     marked. All the material shall be stored on concrete platform
                     at 150 mm above the ground in covered enclosures to avoid
                     contamination.

Clause 2604.2.6      Tests and Standard of Acceptance

                     The material shall be tested in accordance with these
                     specifications and shall meet prescribed criteria. The
                     manufacture/ supplier shall furnish the requisite certificates
                     from the recognized testing laboratory of India or abroad.

                     The work shall conform to these specifications and shall meet
                     the prescribed standards of acceptance.

Clause 2604.3        COMPRESSION SEAL JOINT

Clause 2604.3.1      Compression seal joint shall consist of steel armoured nosing
                     at two edges of the joint gap suitably anchored to the deck
                     concrete and a performed chloprene elastomer or closed cell
                     foam joint sealer compressed and fixed in to the joint gap with
                     special adhesive binder.


Clause 2604.3.2      Material

                     a) Steel nosing

                     The steel nosing shall be of angle section ISA 100 x 100
                     conforming to weldable structural steel as per IS: 2062. The
                     thickness of legs shall not be less than 12 mm. The top face of
                     the angle shall be provided with Bleeder holes of 12 mm
                     diameter spaced at a maximum 100 mm centers so as to
                     ensure that there are no voids in the concrete beneath the
                     angle.

                     b) Anchorage

                     The anchorage steel shall conform to IS: 2062 or equivalent.
                     The steel nosing shall be anchored to the deck by reinforcing
                     bars or anchor plates cast in concrete or a combination of
                     anchor plates and reinforcing bars. Anchor bars shall engage
                     the main structural reinforcement of the deck and in case of
                     anchor plates and anchor loops, this shall be achieved by
                     passing transverse bars through the loops or plates.

                     The minimum thickness of anchor plate shall be 12 mm. Total
                     cross sectional area of bars on each side of the joint shall not
                     be less than 1600 sq. mm per metre length of the joint and the
                     center to center spacing shall not exceed 250 mm. The


                                       278
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                  ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       ultimate resistance of each anchorage shall not be less than
                       600 KN/m in any direction.

                       c) Corrosion Protection

                       All steel section shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip
                       galvanizing or any other approved anticorrosive coating with a
                       minimum thickness of 100 micron.

                       d) Joint Seal

                       i)       The sealing element shall be a performed continuous
                                chloroprene or closed cell from seal with high tear
                                strength, insensitive to soil, gasoline and ozone. It shall
                                have high resistance to ageing and ensure water
                                tightness. The seal should be vulcanised in a single
                                operation for the full length of the joint required for
                                carriageway, kerbs and footpaths, if any. The seal shall
                                cater for a horizontal movement up to 40 mm and vertical
                                movement of 3 mm.

                       ii)      The physical properties of chloroprene / closed cell foam
                                sealing element shall conform to the following:

                       Chloroprene Seal

                       Shall be performed extruded multi web cellular section of
                       chloroprene of such a shape as to promote self removal of
                       foreign material during normal service operations. Chloroprene
                       of joint seal shall conform to clause 915.1 of IRC: 83 (Part - II)
                       and satisfy the properties stipulated in Table – 2: Strip Seal
                       Element Specifications of these specifications except in
                       respect of the working movement range of the sealing element
                       which shall be as specified in Clause 2604.3.2 d (i) above.

                       Closed Cell Foam Seal

                       Shall be of performed non extruded non cellular section made
                       from low density closed cell crossed linked ethylene vinyl
                       acetate, polyethylene copolymer that is physically blown using
                       nitrogen. The material shall possess properties as indicated in
                       Table-1 below:

                                                        TABLE-1

                S.                     Property                     Specified Value
                No.
                 i)          Density                        41.7 – 51.3 kg/ cum

                 ii)         Compression Set on 25 mm       50 percent compression
                                                            samples (ASTM D 3575) for 22
                                                            hours at 23 degree Celcius, 2
                                                            hour recovery; 13 percent set.

                                             279
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                 ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                  iii)     Working temperature            -70 to +70 deg. C.

                  Iv)      Water absorption (total        0.09766 Kg/ sq.m
                           immersion for 3 months)
                           (ASTM 3575)
                  v)       Tensile strength               0.8 Mpa

                  vi)      Elongation at break (ASTM      195 +/- 20 percent
                           D 3575)




                         e) Lubricant cum Adhesive

                         The type and application of material used in bonding the
                         performed joint seal to the steel nosing and concrete shall be
                         as recommended by the manufacturer / supplier of the seal
                         system.

Clause 2604.3.3          Handling and Storage

                         a) The expansion joint material shall be handled with care
                            and stored under cover.
                         b) All joint material and assemblies shall be protected from
                            damage and assemblies shall be supported to maintain
                            true shape and alignment during transportation and
                            storage.

Clause 2604.3.4          Installation

                         a) The expansion joint shall be installed by the manufacturer/
                            supplier or their authorized representative, who will ensure
                            compliance of installation procedure and instructions.
                         b) The dimension of the joint recess and the width of the gap
                            shall conform to the approved drawing.
                         c) Anchoring steel shall be welded to the main reinforcement
                            in the deck maintaining the level and alignment of the joint.
                         d) Concreting of pocket/ recess shall be done with great care
                            using proper mix conforming to same grade as that of the
                            deck concrete but not less than M30 grade in any case.
                            The water cement ratio shall not be more than 0.40. If
                            needed, suitable admixtures may be used to achieve the
                            workability. The width of pocket shall not be less than 300
                            mm on either side of the joint. Care shall also be taken to
                            ensure efficient bonding between already cast/ existing
                            deck concrete and the concrete in the joint recess.
                         e) At the time of installation, joint shall be clean and dry and
                            free from spalls and irregularities, which might impair a
                            proper joint seal.


                                           280
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     f) Concrete or metal surfaces shall be clean, free of rust,
                        laitance, oils, dirt, dust or other deleterious materials.
                     g) The lubricant cum adhesive shall be applied to both faces
                        of the joint and joint seal prior to installation in accordance
                        with the manufacturer's instructions.
                     h) The joint seal shall be compressed to the specified
                        thickness for the rated joint opening and ambient
                        temperature at the time of installation, which shall be
                        between +05 to +35°C.
                     i) The joint seal shall be installed without damage to the seal.
                        Loose fitting or open joints shall not be permitted.

Clause 2604.3.5      Acceptance Criteria

                     a) All steel elements shall be furnished with corrosion
                        protection system.
                     b) For the joint seal the acceptance test shall conform to the
                        requirements stipulated in Clause 2604.3.2 d above. The
                        manufacturer/ supplier of this type of joint shall produce a
                        test certificate to this effect conducted in a recognized
                        laboratory in India or aboard.
                     c) Prior to acceptance 25 percent of the completed and
                        installed joints, subject to a minimum of one joint, shall be
                        subjected to water tightness test. Water shall be
                        continuously ponded along the entire length for a minimum
                        period of 4 hours for a depth of 25 mm above the highest
                        point of deck. The width of ponding shall / be at least 50
                        mm beyond the anchorage block of the joint on either side.
                        The depth of water shall not fall below 25 mm anytime
                        during the test. A close inspection of the underside of the
                        joint shall not reveal any leakage.

Clause 2604.3.6      Tests and Standards of Acceptance

                     The material shall be tested in accordance with these
                     specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The
                     manufacturer/ supplier shall furnish the requisite certificates
                     from the recognized testing laboratory of India or abroad.

                     The work shall conform to these specifications and shall meet
                     the prescribed standards of acceptance.

The clause 2607 be replaced fully as below:

Clause 2607          STRIP SEAL AND MODULAR / BOX SEAL JOINTS

Clause 2607.1        STRIP / BOX SEAL EXPANSION JOINT

Clause 2607.1.1      Components

                     Strip seal expansion joint shall comprise of the following items:

                     a) Edge Beam

                                        281
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     This shall be either extruded or hot rolled steel section or cold
                     rolled cellular steel section with suitable profile to mechanically
                     lock the sealing element in place throughout the normal
                     movement cycle. Further the configuration shall be such that
                     the section has a minimum thickness of 10 mm all along its
                     cross section (flange & web). Thickness of lips holding the seal
                     shall not be less than 6 mm. The minimum height of the edge
                     beam section shall be 80 mm. The minimum cross sectional
                     area of the edge beam shall be 1500 sq. mm.

                     b) Anchorage

                     Edge beam shall be anchored to the deck by reinforcing bars
                     or anchor plates cast in concrete or a combination of anchor
                     plate and reinforcing bars. Anchor bars shall engage the main
                     structural reinforcement of the deck and in case of anchor
                     plates or loops, this shall be achieved by passing transverse
                     bars through the loops or plates.

                     The minimum thickness of anchor plate shall be 12 mm. Total
                     cross sectional area of bar on each side of the joint shall not
                     be less than 1600 sq. mm. per metre length of the joint and
                     the center to center spacing shall not exceed 250 mm. The
                     ultimate resistance of each anchorage shall not be less than
                     600 KN/m in any direction.

Clause 2607.1.2      Material

                     a) The steel for edge beams shall conform to any of the steel
                        grade corresponding to RST 37-2 or 37-3 or 52-3 (DIN),
                        ASTM A36 or A588, CAN/CSA Standard G 40.21 Grade
                        300 W or equivalent.
                     b) Anchorage steel shall conform to IS: 2062 or equivalent.
                     c) All steel sections shall be protected against corrosion by
                        hot dip galvanizing or any other approved anticorrosive
                        coating with a minimum thickness of 100 micron;
                     d) Chloroprene of strip seal element shall conform to Clause
                        915.1 or IRC: 83 (Part-II). The properties of chloroprene
                        shall be as specified in Table-2 below:


                         TABLE – 2: STRIP SEAL ELEMENT SPECIFICATION

                         PROPERTY                    SPECIFIED VALUE
                  Hardness*                          63 + 5 Shore A
                  DIN 53505                          55 + 5 Shore A
                  ASTM D 2240 (Modified)
                  Tensile Strength*                  Min 11 MPa
                  DIN 53504                          Min 13.8 MPa
                  ASTM D 412
                  Elongation at fracture*            Min 350 Per cent
                  DIN 53504                          Min 250 Per cent
                  ASTM D 412

                                        282
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                  Tear Propagation Strength
                  Longitudinal                       Min 10 N/mm
                  Transverse                         Min 10 N/mm
                  Shock Elasticity                   Min 25 Per cent
                  Abrasion                           Min 220 Cu. mm
                  Residual Compressive Strain        Max 28 per cent
                  (22 h/70 deg. C/30 per cent
                  strain)
                  Ageing in hot air
                   (14 days / 70 deg. C)
                  Change in hardness                 Max + 7 Shore A
                  Change in tensile strength         Max – 20 per cent
                  Change in elongation at fracture   Max – 20 per cent

                  Ageing in ozone                     No Cracks
                  (24 h/50 pphm/ 25 deg. C / 20
                  per cent elongation )
                  Swelling behavior in Oil           Max + 5 per cent
                  (168h/25 deg. C)                   Max – 10 Shore A
                  ASTM Oil No.1
                  Volume Change
                  Change in Hardness
                  ASTM Oil No. 3
                  Volume Change                      Max + 25 per cent
                  Change in Hardness                 Max + 20 Shore A
                  Cold Hardening Point               Max – 35 deg. C
                  *      Only one set of specification viz. ASTM or DIN shall be
                  followed      depending on the source of supply

Clause 2607.1.3      Fabrication (Pre-installation)

                     a) The strip seal joint system and all its component parts
                        including anchorages shall be supplied by the
                        manufacturer / system supplier.
                     b) The width of the gap to cater for movement due to thermal
                        effect, prestress, shrinkage and creep, superstructure
                        deformations (if any) and sub-structure deformation (if any)
                        shall be determined and intimated to the manufacturer.
                        Depending upon the temperature at which the joint is to be
                        installed, the gap dimension shall be preset.
                     c) Each strip seal expansion joint system shall be fabricated
                        as a single entity unless stage construction or excessive
                        length prohibits monolithic fabrication. It shall fit the full
                        width of the structure as indicated on the approved
                        drawing. The system shall be pre-set by the manufacturer
                        prior to transportation. Presetting shall be done in
                        accordance with the joint opening indicated on the
                        drawing.
                     d) The finally assembled joint shall then be clamped and
                        transported to the work site.

Clause 2607.1.4      Handling and Storage


                                        283
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     a) For transportation and storage, auxiliary brackets shall be
                        provided to hold the joint assembly together.
                     b) The manufacturer/supplier shall supply either directly to the
                        Engineer or to the Bridge Contractor all the materials of
                        strip seal joints including sealants and all other accessories
                        for the effective installation of the joints.
                     c) Expansion joint material shall be handled with care. It shall
                        be stored under cover on suitable lumber padding.

Clause 2607.1.5      Installation

                     a) The joint shall be installed by the manufacturer/supplier or
                        their authorized representative who will ensure compliance
                        to the manufacturer's instructions for installation.
                     b) Taking the width of gap for movement of the joint into
                        account, the dimensions of the recess in the decking shall
                        be established in accordance with the drawings or design
                        data of the manufacturer. The surfaces of the recess shall
                        be thoroughly cleaned and all dirt and debris removed. The
                        exposed reinforcement shall be suitably adjusted to permit
                        unobstructed lowering of the joint into the recess.
                     c) The recess shall be shuttered in such a way that
                        dimensions in the joint drawing are maintained. The
                        formwork shall be rigid and firm.
                     d) Immediately prior to placing the joint, the presetting shall
                        be inspected. Should the actual temperature of the
                        structure be different from the temperature provided for
                        presetting, correction of the presetting shall be done. After
                        adjustment, the brackets shall be tightened again.
                     e) The joint shall be lowered in a pre-determined position.
                        Following placement of the joint in the prepared recess, the
                        joint shall be leveled and finally aligned and the anchorage
                        steel on the one side of the joint welded to the exposed
                        reinforcement bars of the structure. Upon completion, the
                        same procedure shall be followed for the other side of the
                        joint. With the expansion joint finally held at both sides, the
                        auxiliary brackets shall be released, allowing the joint to
                        take up the movement of the structure.
                     f) High quality concrete shall then be filled in to the recess.
                        The packing concrete must feature low shrinkage and
                        have the same strength as that of the superstructure, but
                        in any case not less than M-35 grade. Good compaction
                        and careful curing of concrete is particularly important.
                        After the concrete has cured, the movable installation
                        brackets and shuttering still in place shall be removed.
                     g) The neoprene seal shall be field installed in continuous
                        length spanning the entire roadway width. To ensure
                        proper fit of the seal and enhance the ease of installation,
                        dirt, spatter or standing water shall be removed from the
                        steel cavity using a brush, scrapper or compressed air.
                        The seal shall be installed without any damage to the seal
                        by suitable hand method or machine tools.
                     h) As soon as the concrete in the recess has become initially
                        set, a sturdy ramp shall be placed over the joint to protect
                                        284
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          the exposed steel beams and neoprene seals from the site
                          traffic. Expansion joint shall not be exposed to traffic
                          before the carriageway surfacing is placed.
                     i)   The carriageway surfacing shall be finished flush with the
                          top of the steel sections. The actual junction of the
                          surfacing / wearing coat with the steel edge section shall
                          be formed by a wedge shaped joint with a sealing
                          compound. The horizontal leg of the edge beam shall be
                          cleaned beforehand. It is particularly important to ensure
                          thorough and careful compaction of the surfacing in order
                          to prevent any premature depression forming in it.

Clause 2607.1.6      Acceptance Criteria

                     a) All steel elements shall be finished with corrosion
                        protection system.
                     b) For neoprene seal, the acceptance test shall conform to
                        the requirements stipulated in Table 1. The
                        manufacturer/supplier shall produce a test certificate
                        accordingly, conducted in a recognized independent
                        laboratory in India or abroad.
                     c) The manufacturer shall produce test certificates indicating
                        that anchorage system had been tested in a recognized
                        laboratory to determine optimum configuration of
                        anchorage assembly under dynamic loading.
                     d) Prior to acceptance 25 percent of the completed and
                        installed joints, subject to a minimum of one joint, shall be
                        subjected to water tightness test. Water shall be
                        continuously ponded along the entire length for a minimum
                        period of 4 hours for a depth of 25 mm above the highest
                        point of deck. The width of ponding shall be at least 50 mm
                        beyond the anchorage block of the joint on either side. The
                        depth of water shall not fall below 25 mm anytime during
                        the test. A close inspection of the underside of the joint
                        shall not reveal any leakage.
                     e) Investigation of fatigue strength of the edge beam section
                        with anchorages to withstand 2 x 106 load change cycles
                        of 85 KN vertical load and 10 KN of horizontal load without
                        showing sign of distress shall be required. The supplier
                        shall produce a test certificate in this regard conducted in a
                        recognized laboratory in India or abroad.
                     f) As strip seal type of joint is specialized in nature, generally
                        of the proprietary type, the manufacturer shall be required
                        to produce evidence of satisfactory performance of this
                        type of joint.

Clause 2607.1.7      Tests and Standards of Acceptance

                     The materials shall be tested in accordance with these
                     specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The
                     manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the requisite certificates
                     from the recognized testing laboratory of India or abroad.

Clause 2607.2        MODULAR STRIP/BOX SEAL JOINT
                                        285
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


Clause 2607.2.1      A modular expansion joint shall consist of two or more
                     modules/cells to cater to a horizontal movement in excess of
                     70 mm. It shall allow movements in all 3 directions and rotation
                     about all 3 axes as per design requirements. It shall ensure
                     that during all movement cycles of the joint, opening and
                     closing (gaps) of all modules are equal.

Clause 2607.2.2      Component

                     a) The structural system consisting of two edge beams, one
                        or more central/separation beams or lamellas and cross
                        support bars supporting individual or multiple central
                        beams to transfer the loads to the bridge deck through the
                        anchorage system.
                     b) Resilient or shock absorption support system for central
                        beams as well as support bars to dampen dynamic loading
                        thus reducing the forces transmitted to the substructure
                        and anchorages and also to accommodate vertical and
                        transverse movements apart from longitudinal movement.
                     c) Sliding or control system which allows closing and opening
                        of the joint and also ensures that all modules open and
                        close equally.
                     d) Mechanically locked sealing system of chloroprene which
                        provides watertight, noiseless and easy replacement
                        system.


Clause 2607.2.3      Materials

                     a) Edge and Central Beams

                     These shall be either extruded or hot rolled steel sections or
                     cold rolled cellular steel sections including continuously shop
                     welded sections for central beams with suitable profile to
                     mechanically lock the sealing element in place throughout the
                     normal movement cycle. Further, the configuration shall be
                     such that the section has a minimum thickness of 10 mm all
                     along the cross section (flange & web). The thickness of lips
                     holding the seal shall not be less than 6mm. The cold rolled
                     cellular sections shall be relieved of any locked in stresses
                     through annealing process. These shall be closed at both ends
                     and be air tight after installation of seal to prevent ingress of
                     moisture in the hollow portion. The minimum height of edge
                     beams and central beam sections shall be 80 mm. Minimum
                     cross sectional area of edge beam shall be 1500 sq. mm. The
                     material shall conform to any of the steel grade corresponding
                     to RST 37-2 or 37-3 or 52-3 (DIN), ASTM A36 OR A588,
                     CAN/CSA Standard G 40.21 Grade 300 W or equivalent. The
                     material for support bars may be same as that of edge/central
                     beams or as per manufacturer's recommendations.

                     b) Chloroprene Seal

                                        286
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     This shall be performed extruded single strip or cellular section
                     of chloroprene of such a shape as to promote self removal of
                     foreign material during normal joint operation. The seal shall
                     possess high tear strength and be insensitive to oil, gasoline
                     and ozone. It shall have high resistance to ageing and ensure
                     water tightness.

                     Chloroprene seal shall conform to clause 915.1 of IRC: 83
                     (part-II). The properties of chloroprene shall conform to Table
                     2 – Strip Seal Element Specification of these specifications.

                     c) Anchorage

                     The anchorage steel shall conform to IS: 2062 or equivalent.

                     Edge beam shall be anchored to the deck by anchor plates
                     cast in concrete or a combination of anchor plate and
                     reinforcing bars. Anchor plates or loops shall be anchored by
                     passing transverse bars through the loops or plates.

                     The minimum thickness of anchor plate shall be 12mm.
                     Anchor bars on each side of the joint shall not be less than
                     1600 sq. mm per metre length of the joint and the center
                     anchor bars to center spacing shall not exceed 250 mm. The
                     ultimate resistance of each anchorage shall not be less than
                     600 KN/m in any direction. The anchor loop at the edge
                     profiles should be at right angle to the joint. Planned deviations
                     of this direction are allowable only for the range of 900 +/- 200.
                     (The anchoring reinforcement of the construction must lie
                     parallel to the anchor loops.)

                     d) Support and Control System

                     The overall system and components of the resilient/shock
                     absorption system and sliding / control system shall conform to
                     the specifications recommended by the manufacturer. The
                     center to center spacing of transverse support bars shall not
                     exceed 1.75 m.

                     e) Corrosion Protection

                     All steel section shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip
                     galvanizing or any other approved anti corrosive coating with a
                     minimum thickness of 100 micron.

Clause 2607.2.4      Fabrication (pre-installation)

                     a) The modular expansion joint system and all its component
                        parts including anchorages shall be supplied by the
                        manufacturer.
                     b) The width of the gap to cater for movement due to thermal
                        effect, prestress, shrinkage and creep, superstructure
                        deformations (if any) and sub-structure deformation (if any)

                                        287
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        shall be determined and intimated to the manufacturer.
                        Depending upon the range of temperature at which the
                        joint is likely to be installed, the gap dimension shall be
                        preset.
                     c) Each modular expansion joint system shall be fabricated
                        as a single entity free from any joint in the longitudinal
                        direction unless stage construction or excessive length
                        prohibits monolithic fabrication. It shall fit the full width of
                        the structure as indicated on the approved drawing. The
                        system shall be pre-set by the manufacturer prior to
                        transportation. Pre-setting shall be done in accordance
                        with the joint opening indicated on the drawing.
                     d) The finally assembled joint shall then be clamped and
                        transported to the work site.

Clause 2607.2.5      Handling and Storage

                     a) For transportation and storage, auxiliary brackets shall be
                        provided to hold the joint assembly together.
                     b) The manufacturer / supplier shall supply either directly to
                        the Engineer or to the Bridge Contractor entire assembly of
                        Modular Strip / Box Seal joints including sealants and all
                        other accessories for the effective installation of the joints.
                     c) Expansion joint material shall be handled with care. It shall
                        be stored under cover on suitable lumber padding.

Clause 2607.2.6      Installation

                     a) The joint shall be installed by the manufacturer/supplier
                        only.
                     b) Taking the width of gap for movement of the joint into
                        account, the dimensions of the recess in the decking shall
                        be established in accordance with the drawings or design
                        data of the manufacturer. The surface of the recess shall
                        be thoroughly cleaned and all dirt and debris removed. The
                        exposed reinforcement shall be suitably adjusted to permit
                        unobstructed lowering of the joint into the recess.
                     c) The recess shall be shuttered in such a way that
                        dimensions in the drawings are maintained. The formwork
                        shall be rigid and firm.
                     d) Immediately prior to placing the joint, the presetting shall
                        be inspected. Should the actual temperature of the
                        structure be different from the temperature provided for
                        presetting, correction of the presetting shall be done. After
                        adjustment, the brackets shall be tightened again.
                     e) The joint shall be lowered in a pre-determined position.
                        Following placement of the joint in the prepared recess, the
                        joint shall be leveled and finally aligned and the anchorage
                        steel on one side of the joint welded to the exposed
                        reinforcement bars of the structure. Upon completion, the
                        same procedure shall be followed for the other side of the
                        joint. With the expansion joint finally held at both sides, the
                        auxiliary brackets shall be released, allowing the joint to
                        take up the movement of the structure.
                                        288
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     f) Controlled concrete having strength not less than that in
                        superstructure subject to the minimum of M-35 shall be
                        filled into the recess. The packing concrete must feature
                        low shrinkage. Good compaction and careful curing of
                        concrete is particularly important. After the concrete has
                        cured, the movable installation brackets and shuttering still
                        in place shall be removed.
                     g) The chloroprene seal shall be field installed in continuous
                        lengths spanning the entire roadway width. To ensure
                        proper fit of the seal and increase the ease of installation,
                        dirt, spatter or standing water shall be removed from the
                        steel cavity using a brush, scraper or compressed air. The
                        seal shall be installed without damage to the seal by
                        suitable hand method or machine tools.
                     h) As soon as the concrete in the recess has become initially
                        set, a sturdy ramp shall be placed over the joint to protect
                        the exposed steel beams and neoprene seals from site
                        traffic. Expansion joint shall not be exposed to traffic
                        loading before the carriageway surfacing is placed.
                     i) The carriageway surfacing shall be finished flush with the
                        top of the steel sections. The actual junction of the
                        surfacing / wearing coat with the steel edge section shall
                        be cleaned beforehand. It is particularly important to
                        ensure thorough and careful compaction of the surfacing in
                        order to prevent any premature depression forming in it.

Clause 2607.2.7      Acceptance Criteria

                     a) All steel elements shall be finished with corrosion
                        protection system.
                     b) For Chloroprene seal, the acceptance test shall conform to
                        the requirements stipulated in clause 2607.1.2 (d).
                     c) The manufacturer shall produce a test certificate
                        accordingly, conducted in a recognized laboratory, in India
                        or abroad.
                     d) Fatigue strength of internal beams and support connection
                        shall be investigated to withstand 2 million cycles of vertical
                        load of 85 KN and a horizontal load of 10 KN without
                        showing signs of distress. The supplier shall have to
                        produce a test certificate in this regard conducted by a
                        recognized laboratory from India or abroad.
                     e) The manufacturer shall produce test certificates indicating
                        that anchorage system had been tested in a recognized
                        laboratory to determine optimum configuration of
                        anchorage assembly under dynamic loading.
                     f) Prior to acceptance 25 percent of the completed and
                        installed joints, subject to a minimum of one joint, shall be
                        subjected to water tightness test. Water shall be
                        continuously ponded along the entire length for a minimum
                        period of 4 hours for a depth of 25 mm above the highest
                        point of deck. The width of ponding shall be at least 50 mm
                        beyond the anchorage block of the joint on either side. The
                        depth of water shall not fall below 25 mm anytime during

                                        289
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        the test. A close inspection of the underside of the joint
                        shall not reveal any leakage.
                     g) As Modular strip / box seal type of joint is specialized in
                        nature, generally of the proprietary type, the manufacturer
                        shall be required to produce evidence of satisfactory
                        performance of his product.

Clause 2607.2.8      Tests and Standards of Acceptance

                     The materials shall be tested in accordance with these
                     specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The
                     manufacturer / supplier shall furnish the requisite certificates
                     from the recognized testing laboratory in India or abroad.

                     The work shall conform to these specifications and shall meet
                     the prescribed standards of acceptance.

Clause 2609          MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT
                     Insert the following as the second sentence of this clause:

                     “The expansion joint shall be measured along the width of the
                     deck slab from one end to the other, including length through
                     footpaths and parapets.”

 SECTION 2700          WEARING COAT AND APPURTENANCES

 CLAUSE 2702           WEARING COAT

 Clause 2702.1         Bituminous Wearing Coat

 Clause 2702.1.1       This Clause shall read as follows:

                       “Wearing coat shall be constructed as shown in drawings.”

 Clause 2702.1.2       This following shall be added under this sub-clause:

                       Measurement: The unit of measurement shall be square
                       metres.

                       Unit Rate: The contract unit rate for wearing coat shall
                       include the cost of prime coat, 15 mm thick mastic asphalt,
                       overlaid with 50 mm thick BC and all labour, material, tools
                       and plants and other costs necessary for construction of the
                       work as per specifications.

 CLAUSE 2703           RAILINGS AND PARAPETS

 Clause 2703.3         Cast-in-Situ Concrete Railings.

                       The heading shall be read as follows:

                       “Cast-in-Situ Railings and parapets”

                                        290
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       Last sentence of the third paragraph shall be replaced by the
                       following.

                       “Location of construction joints shall be determined in
                       advance and approved by the Engineer”

                       Add new sub-clause as follows.

 CLAUSE 2703.5         CONCRETE CRASH BARRIER BRIDGES

 Clause 2703.5.1       General

                       This work shall consist of construction, provision and
                       installation of concrete crash barrier on the bridge deck /
                       approach slab / approaches locations and of dimensions as
                       shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.


 Clause 2703.5.2       Materials

                       All materials shall conform to Section 1000, as applicable, and
                       relevant clauses in Section 1600 shall govern the steel
                       reinforcement. The concrete barriers shall be constructed
                       either by the “cast-in-place with fixed forms” method or the
                       “estrusion or slip form” method or a combination thereof with
                       the approval of the Engineer. Where “extrusion or slip form”
                       method is adopted, full details of the method and literature
                       shall be furnished.

                       Grade of concrete for crash barrier shall be as per BOQ or as
                       directed by Engineer.

                       An expansion joint with Polysulphide Joint sealants and
                       bituminous fibreboard shall be provided in the crash barriers
                       at the location of expansion joints / gaps on the bridge,
                       approaches etc.,

 Clause 2703.5.3       Construction Operations

                       The location of crash barrier shall be strictly adhered to as
                       shown in the drawing and as directed by the Engineer.
                       Concrete crash barriers shall present a smooth, uniform
                       appearance in their final position, conforming to the horizontal
                       and vertical lines shown on the plans or as ordered by the
                       Engineer and shall be free of lumps, sags or other
                       irregularities. The top and exposed faced of the barriers shall
                       conform to the specified tolerances, as defined in Clause
                       809.4, when tested with 3m straight edge, laid on the surface.


 Clause 2703.5.4       Tolerance

                       The overall horizontal alignment of crash barrier and rails

                                        291
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       shall not depart from the road alignment by more than
                       +30mm, nor deviate in any two successive lengths from
                       straight by more than 6mm and the faces shall not vary more
                       than 12mm from the edge of a 3m straight edge. Barriers
                       shall be at the specified height, as shown in the plans, above
                       the edge of the nearest adjacent carriageway or shoulder,
                       within a tolerance of +30mm.

 Clause 2703.5.5       Measurements for Payment

                       All barriers will be measured in running metre. The sealing of
                       opening in crash barrier at expansion joints with polysulphide
                       rubber sealant and bituminous fibreboard as per sub-clause
                       2703.6 shall be incidental to work. The painting over crash
                       barrier shall not be measured / paid separately and is
                       incidental to the work. The cost of GI pipe over crash barrier,
                       MS plate and painting over GI pipe shall be incidental to the
                       work.



 Clause 2703.5.6       Rate

                       The Contract unit rate shall include full compensation for
                       furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and
                       incidental costs necessary for doing all the work involved in
                       constructing the concrete barrier complete in place in all
                       respects as per these Specifications.

                       Add new sub-clause as follows:

 Clause 2703.6         Polysulphide Rubber Joint Sealant

                       Polysulphide Joint Sealants with bituminous fibreboard shall
                       be provided in the expansion joints / gaps in crash barriers.

                       Before Joint it shall be ensured that the top of the fiber board
                       and the concrete faces are dry, sound, free from dirt, grease
                       and other loose foreign matters. A thin coat of primer shall be
                       applied only on the concrete faces with a brush. The primer
                       shall be allowed to air dry before applying sealant. The
                       components of the sealant i.e., base and hardener shall be
                       mixed in the slow speed mechanical mixer till uniform clor is
                       obtained. Placement of the mixed sealant shall be done with
                       either catridge of fully enclosed gun barrels within 30 minutes
                       of mixing. Manufacture’s recommendation shall be followed.

                       The sealing compound shall be two packs, low modulus of
                       elasticity, polysulphide elastomer having no tar or bituminous
                       ingredients such as Cico T-680 or equivalent with following
                       properties of the cured compound.

                       Tensile strength                       : 0.4 Mpa +10%
                       Modulus of elasticity                  : At 100% elongation:
                                        292
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                                                               .15 Mpa
                       Elongation                              : Elongation at break
                                                               550%
                       Hardness                                : Shore “A” hardness
                                                               22+3 @250C

                       Operating temperature                   : -200C to + 800C
                       Shrinkage                               : Less than 1%
                       Permanent dynamic movement              : + 25%
                       Capability

                       Polysulphide material shall be approved by the Engineer prior
                       to procurement and use.

                       Measurements for Payment

                       Cost for providing Polysulphide Joint sealants and bituminous,
                       fibreboard in the Expansion Joints in Crash Barriers shall be
                       deemed to be included in the unit rate of Crash Barrier and
                       shall not be measured separately.


 Clause 2704           APPROACH SLAB

                       Replace first paragraph of this clause with the following:

                       “Provision of approach slab shall be in accordance with
                        “Guide lines regarding approach slab for bridges” given in
                        MOST circular no. RW/NH-34015/2/86-S&R dated 22 June
                        1994.”

                       Delete second sentence of the last paragraph of this clause.

 CLAUSE 2706           WEEP HOLES

                       This Clause shall be read as under:

                       “Weep holes shall be provided in solid plain
                       concrete/reinforced concrete, brick or stone masonry
                       abutments, wing walls, return walls as shown on the drawings
                       or as directed by the Engineer to drive moisture from the back
                       filling. Weep holes shall be provided with 100 mm diameter
                       A.C. pipe and shall extend through the full width of concrete
                       with slope of about 1 vertical: 20 horizontal towards the
                       draining face.

                       The spacing of weep holes shall generally be 1 m in either
                       direction or as shown on the drawing with the lowest at about
                       150 mm above the low water level or ground level whichever
                       is higher or as directed by the Engineer.”

 CLAUSE 2709           RATE


                                        293
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       The Second paragraph shall read as follows:

                       “The contract unit rate of parapets and railings shall include
                       the cost of all labour, materials, tools and plants required for
                       completing the unit in accordance with these specifications”.




                                        294
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

SECTION 2800         Repair of Structures

Clause 2809          DISMANTLING OF CONCRETE WEARING COAT

                     Read title as follows:

                     DISMANTLING   OF    EXISTING  WEARING                    COAT,
                     EXPANSION JOINTS AND DRAINAGE SPOUTS

Clause 2809.1        Commencement of Dismantling

                     Add the following as item (iv)

                     “(iv) The existing wearing coat, concrete as well as bituminous
                     overlay, shall be removed for the entire length including
                     approach slab for all minor bridges with solid slab
                     superstructure. Only damaged portion of wearing coat shall be
                     removed for major bridges and minor bridges with T-Beam and
                     slab superstructure.”

Clause 2809.2        This Clause shall read as follows:

                     The removal operations shall be carried out mechanically
                     using pavement breakers and compressors. Removal shall be
                     done carefully to avoid damage to any part of the existing
                     structure. In delicate locations, for example around spouts,
                     removal shall be done by manual methods. After removal, the
                     concrete deck surface shall be closely inspected for identifying
                     any distress such as cracks, pockets of loose or honeycombed
                     concrete etc. The deck surface shall be thoroughly cleaned
                     with special efforts to remove any loose material. Expansion
                     joints and spouts shall be removed carefully so that deck
                     concrete is not damaged.

Clause 2809.3        Precautions During Dismantling Work

                     Add the following at the end of this clause:

                     “Dismantled material shall not be stacked on the deck nor shall
                     it be thrown below the bridge. It shall be neatly piled at points
                     designated by the Engineer with all leads and lifts. Materials,
                     which can be used or auctioned, shall be stored in neat piles at
                     locations designated by Engineer with all leads and lifts.”

                     New clauses 2811 to 2831 shall be added after Clause
                     2810 as given below and existing clauses 2811, 2812 and
                     2813 shall be renumbered as 2832, 2833 and 2834

Clause 2811          DISMANTLING  OF    EXISTING RAILINGS,  KERBS,
                     FOOTPATH SLABS, PART OR COMPLETE DECK SLABS,
                     APPROACH SLABS AND DAMAGED CONCRETE IN WING
                     WALLS/RETURNS, PIERS AND ABUTMENTS, RCC/BRICK
                     MASONRY, ENCLOSURES OF BEARINGS
                                        295
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                     Railings, kerbs, footpath slabs, part or complete deck slabs,
                     approach slabs and damaged concrete in wing walls/returns,
                     piers and abutments, RCC/Brick Masonry, Enclosures of
                     Bearings of the existing structures shall be dismantled as
                     shown in drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

                     The work shall be executed in accordance with Section 200
                     clause 202. All damaged concrete in wing walls, returns, piers
                     and abutments shall be thoroughly inspected to identify the
                     extent of dismantling. The decision of the Engineer regarding
                     extent of dismantling shall be final. Care shall be taken to
                     avoid damage to any part of the existing structure. Dismantling
                     work for railings and kerbs shall be done carefully such that
                     the existing reinforcement, which will project into the new work,
                     is not damaged or lost. Reinforcement shall be cleaned
                     thoroughly.

                     Dismantled material shall not be stacked on the deck nor shall
                     it be thrown below the bridge. It shall be neatly piled at points
                     designated by the Engineer with all leads and lifts. Materials,
                     which can be used or auctioned, shall be stored in neat piles at
                     locations designated by Engineer with all leads and lifts..

                     Water shall be sprayed to reduce dust while dismantling work
                     is in progress. Dismantling work shall not be carried out at
                     night, during storms or heavy rain.

                     Goggles and gas masks shall be worn at the time of
                     dismantling. Leather gloves shall be worn by the workers at
                     the time of dismantling. Screens made of G.I. sheets shall be
                     placed wherever necessary to prevent the flying pieces from
                     injuring the workers.

                     Damage caused to any component of the bridge structure
                     during removal operations shall be restored by the Contractor
                     at his cost. The service lines, if any, shall be
                     disconnected/diverted before dismantling work commences.

Clause 2812          DISMANTLING OF EXISTING DAMAGED BRICK / COARSE
                     RUBBLE   MASONRY     IN  WING  WALLS/RETURNS,
                     PARAPET ETC.

                     Damaged brick / coarse rubble masonry in wing walls / returns
                     and all brick / coarse rubble parapets shall be dismantled as
                     shown in drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

                     The work shall be executed in accordance with Section 200
                     clause 202. Damaged brick / coarse rubble masonry in wing
                     walls / returns shall be thoroughly inspected to identify the
                     extent of dismantling. The decision of the Engineer shall be
                     final. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to any part of the
                     existing structure.

                                        296
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     Dismantled material shall not be stacked on the deck nor shall
                     it be thrown below the bridge. It shall be neatly piled at points
                     designated by the Engineer with all leads and lifts. Materials,
                     which can be used or auctioned, shall be stored in neat piles at
                     locations designated by Engineer with all leads and lifts.

                     Leather gloves shall be worn by the workers during
                     dismantling. Screens made of G.I. sheets shall be placed,
                     wherever necessary, to prevent the flying pieces from injuring
                     the workers.

                     Damage caused to any component of the bridge structure
                     during removal operations shall be restored by the Contractor
                     at his cost.

Clause 2813          DISMANTLING OF EXISTING WING WALL FOR
                     CONSTRUCTION OF ADJACENT 2 LANE BRIDGE – (a)
                     BRICK / COARSE RUBBLE MASONRY (b) CONCRETE

                     Existing brick / coarse rubble masonry / concrete wing wall
                     shall be dismantled for construction of adjacent 2 lane bridge
                     as shown in drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

                     The work shall be executed in accordance with Section 200
                     clause 202. Only portions which interfere with the construction
                     of the wing wall/return/median wall of the adjacent 2-lane
                     bridge shall be dismantled. The decision of the Engineer
                     regarding extent of dismantling shall be final.

                     During dismantling all precaution shall be taken to prevent
                     failure of the retained earth of the approaches.

                     Dismantled material shall not be stacked on the deck nor shall
                     it be thrown below the bridge. It shall be neatly piled at points
                     designated by the Engineer with all leads and lifts. Materials,
                     which can be used or auctioned, shall be stored in neat piles at
                     locations designated by the Engineer with all leads and lifts.

                     Goggles and gas masks shall be worn at the time of
                     dismantling. Leather gloves shall be worn by the workers.
                     Screens made of G.I. sheets shall be placed wherever
                     necessary to prevent flying pieces from injuring the workers.

                     Damage caused to any component of the bridge structure
                     during removal operations shall be restored by the Contractor
                     at his cost.




                                        297
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




Clause 2814          FIXING DOWEL BARS IN DECK SLAB AND GROUTING
                     WITH NON-SHRINK FREE FLOW CEMENT GROUT

                    1 Scope

                       The work shall consist of fixing TMT bars in the existing
                       concrete deck slab/other concrete components to facilitate
                       bonding of a structural component with an existing one.

                       At least 14 days before start of the work, the Contractor shall
                       furnish detailed methodology of construction including
                       sources of supply of material, tools, equipment and
                       appliances be used on work, details of personnel and
                       supervision.

                       The Contractor's personnel shall be qualified and experienced
                       in repair and rehabilitation work of such nature.

                    2 Materials

                       TMT bars shall conform to Section 1000 and IS-1786.
                       The grout material used for fixing TMT bars in drilled holes in
                       concrete shall be obtained from a reputed manufacturer and
                       grout mix shall be prepared in conformity with the
                       manufacturer's recommendations. The material shall be either
                       of the following:
                        (a) Two/three component low viscosity epoxy resin system,
                            having required characteristics of bonding with concrete
                            and resistance to moisture penetration (Resicrete 21 or
                            Resicrete 212 of MIS Structural Waterproofing Co. or
                            SIKADUR BTP of MIS Sika Qualcrete or equivalent).

                       (b) Cement grout in powder form consisting of cement, good
                           quality sand and admixtures when mixed with required
                           amount of water forms a pourable mix to be used for
                           bonding TMT bars in concrete (EXCEM - E1
                           manufactured by MIS Structural Water Proofing Company
                           or MIS SIKADUR or equivalent).

                       The epoxy resin system shall conform to Clause 2803.

                       The cement grout shall basically be shrinkage compensated,
                       chloride free and of very high strength (50 MPa at 28 days).
                       The mix should be capable of pumping or pouring and shall
                       have excellent bond strength with concrete and steel (bond
                       strength of 15 MPa with TMT bars at 28 days).

                    3 Construction Operations

                                       298
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                  ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       The construction operation shall be in the following sequence,
                       and shall be supervised by the Contractor's engineer well
                       experienced in such works:

                       (i)      Drill holes of required diameter and depth at desired
                               locations as shown on Drawings.

                       (ii)    Clean the hole with air blast through air nozzle of 6-mm
                               dia connected to air compressor to remove the drilled
                               powder, which may remain inside the drilled hole.

                       (iii)   Mix the required quantity of grout so that the work could
                               be completed within the normal setting time as specified
                               by the manufacturers.

                       (iv)    Pour required quantity of mixed grout in the holes.

                       (v)     Insert the dowel rod in the hole where grout has been
                               placed. Move the rod up and down several times to drive
                               out entrapped air, if any.

                       (vi)    Allow the curing       time    as     per   manufacturer's
                               specifications.

                       (vii) Inclined dowels shall be straightened to match their
                             intended profile only after the grout has finally set and
                             required strength has been achieved

                    4 Measurements for Payment

                       Measurement for fixing TMT bars in concrete involving drilling
                       in concrete and fixing TMT bar with suitable fixing agent shall
                       be measured in number of such TMT bars fixed in position.

                    5 Rate

                       The contract unit rate for fixing of TMT bars in existing
                       concrete slab/other components shall include cost of all
                       material, labor, tools and plants, drilling required diameter
                       hole in concrete, placing in position, temporary works, testing
                       and curing and other incidental expenses for the satisfactory
                       completion of the work as per the specifications.

Clause 2815          RAILINGS/PARAPETS

                     Cast-in-situ railings/parapets shall be constructed in
                     accordance with the requirements of structural concrete
                     Section 1700. The reinforcement shall conform to Section
                     1600. The formwork shall conform to Section 1500. The work
                     in general shall conform to Section 2700 clause 2703.




                                          299
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     The reinforcement of the railings/parapets shall be welded with
                     the existing reinforcement of the deck slab and with the dowel
                     bars as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

                     In case there are no old dowel bars, fresh dowel bars shall be
                     fixed into deck slab as per clause 2814.

Clause 2816          REPAIR OF CORRODED REINFORCEMENT

                     Repair of corroded reinforcement (where corrosion has
                     reduced the diameter of the bar by more than 20%) shall be
                     done by providing new reinforcement, which is either welded
                     or firmly secured with the old reinforcement.

                     1     Material

                     Steel which is to be used as additional reinforcement where
                     the diameter of existing main longitudinal reinforcement has
                     been reduced to 80% of the original, should satisfy the
                     requirements of IS: 226-1975 or IS: 1786-1976. However, the
                     BRC fabric or weld mesh, which are to replace/strengthen the
                     corroded stirrups, or tie bars, should be from reputed
                     manufacturers.

                     2     Repairing Procedure

                     The exposed reinforcement showing signs of deterioration by
                     corrosion shall be cleaned by grit blasting.

                     When corrosion products have been removed, the diameter of
                     the reinforcement shall be measured. If the diameter of the
                     reinforcement is found to be reduced to 80% of the original,
                     then additional reinforcement of equivalent diameter free from
                     rust shall be firmly secured with the old reinforcement,
                     preferably by welding, if existing reinforcement can be welded
                     or with a lap of at least 40 times the dia of the bar.

Clause 2817          PROVIDING AND FIXING DRAINAGE SPOUTS INCLUDING
                     SEALING WITH WATER PROOFING MATERIAL

                     For all existing bridge decks drainage spouts shall be replaced
                     and new drainage spouts shall be provided as shown in the
                     drawings.

                     The waterproofing material shall be provided around the area
                     of drainage spout from the top of the deck.

                     The work shall be executed in accordance with Section 2700
                     clause 2705 except to the extent modified below.

                     The work shall be carried out after the wearing coat is
                     removed. The existing spouts shall be removed carefully with
                     minimum damage to surrounding concrete. The pocket formed

                                       300
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     shall be sufficiently large to ensure good flow and compaction
                     of non-shrink cement grout around the new spout. In case the
                     earlier spouts were provided in railing kerb, holes shall be
                     drilled in slab without excessively damaging surrounding
                     concrete.

 Clause 2818         REPAIR TO        LEACHED,      HONEYCOMBED,          SPALLED
                     CONCRETE

                     Leached, honeycombed, spalled concrete (area of damage <
                     0.5 sq. m.) shall be repaired with 50mm thick (average) PMC
                     mortar in two or more layers with a bond coat of PMC slurry
                     between two successive layers.

                     All loose concrete shall be chipped off with a chipping machine
                     so that loose layers of concrete are removed exposing the
                     reinforcement. All loose concrete sticking with the
                     reinforcement shall be removed. Where reinforcement bars
                     are already exposed, the chipping shall continue so as to
                     expose half the diameter prior to further treatment. The
                     concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush
                     and oil free air blast. Where the damaged area is large, sand
                     blasting shall be done to clean the reinforcement and
                     surrounding concrete. If reinforcement is exposed, the same
                     shall also be cleaned thoroughly. The reinforcement shall be
                     coated with PMC slurry within one hour of cleaning to prevent
                     rusting. The PMC slurry shall be brush applied on the cleaned
                     reinforcement ensuring that full surface area is covered in
                     accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

                     Before applying PMC repair mortar, the prepared concrete
                     substrata shall be thoroughly soaked with clean water. Free
                     surface water shall be removed before priming. The substrata
                     shall be primed with PMC slurry.

                     The specifications for polymer modified cementations (PMC)
                     mortar / debonding slurry are as under:

                     The anti corrosive polymer latex, which is to be used should
                     consist of water based QA-Acrylic polymer incorporated with
                     non-alcoholic bipolar corrosion inhibitor. The polymer to be
                     used shall be MONOBOND-2000 or equivalent.

                     Colour: Milky white liquid

                     Solid content: The polymer solid content shall be 36           1
                     percent. The particles shall be of nearly spherical shape with a
                     diameter of 0.35      0.05 micrometer. The manufacture shall
                     certify the above requirements about solid content & grain
                     size. In order to keep control over quality, the manufacture
                     shall provide infrared absorption spectrum analysis for the
                     material to be supplied by them.


                                        301
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     Mixing proportion: Anti-corrosive polymer modified mortar

                     Cement                                - 100 parts by weight
                     Monobond 2000                         - 40 parts by weight
                     Mix no. 10 Silica Sand                - 300 parts by weight

                     The sand, which is to be used for constituting the PMC repair
                     mortar, should be silica sand as the basic material, which is
                     categorized in two groups.

                     a)    Coarse Silica and
                     b)    Fine Silica

                     The grading of the above groups should follow the limits
                     provided below.
                     Quartz sand mix No. 10

                                    I.S. Sieve    Percentage passing by
                                    No.           weight
                                    10 mm                   100
                                     4.75 mm                100
                                     2.36 mm                100
                                    1.18 mm                 85 - 90
                                    600 microns             45 - 55
                                    300 microns             15 - 20
                                    150 microns             5 - 10
                                     75 microns             0-3

                     In the event of using local sand, the sand to be used must
                     satisfy the limits of deleterious materials & the requirements of
                     soundness as given in Clause 3.2.1 & Clause 3.6 respectively
                     of IS: 383. Confirmatory test shall be conducted by the
                     contractor and sample kept for comparison by the engineer.

                     Curing:

                     Anti-corrosive polymer modified mortar curing procedure apply
                     to normal weather conditions. Under hot weather, precautions
                     shall be taken to avoid drying. PMC work should be carried out
                     at a temperature below 40o C.

                     Under unusual condition weather conditions e.g. high humidity
                     and / or high wind velocity or imposed constraints, special
                     curing procedure shall be followed for which approval shall be
                     obtained from the Engineer.

                     Air-drying shall be considered to have taken place only during
                     favourable uninterrupted weather condition existing throughout
                     the recommended drying period. Some judgments shall be
                     made in this respect and if conditions are deemed
                     unfavourable for drying to occur, then drying must be

                                          302
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     prolonged for the recommended full period after the weather
                     clears.

                     As PMC work proceeds, precautions shall be taken to prevent
                     rapid drying of the PMC repair mortar. This is usually
                     accomplished by covering the filled surfaces with an
                     impermeable sheet shortly after the work has been done. The
                     sheet shall be kept in place until further work is carried out
                     over the mortar or in case where the mortar is likely to be
                     disturbed, the sheet shall be kept in place for 24 hours.

                     No foot traffic for further work shall be allowed over mortar
                     until 12 hours from the time of the completion of work.
                     Curing compound may also be used as curing membrane.
                     Care shall be taken to ensure complete covering particularly
                     around the interface with the host concrete.

                     For the first day, the repaired concrete patch shall be
                     protected from harsh environment by laying a polythene sheet
                     over it, lapping down the edges.

                     Mixing PMC:

                     Methods of Mortar mixing

                     To mix PMC, it is necessary to have the following items:

                         A suitable sized non-ferrous mixing container, preferably
                         plastic;
                         A high-speed drill with mixing paddles; and
                         Promark batching containers for measuring out
                         components to be mixed.

                     Pour all the liquid polymers latex into mixing container.

                     Shake the latex to disperse the solid uniformly throughout the
                     liquid before use.

                     Begin mechanical mixing and while doing so, slowly add the
                     dry components, i.e. cement & sand.


                     Mix for about 5 minutes until solids have been well dispersed.
                     The resulting mix should look uniform, feel creamy and be free
                     from lumps & grits.
                     Precautions shall be taken not to entrap an excessive amount
                     of air into the mix during mixing.

                     Since the desired consistency depends on type & brand of
                     cement as well as weather conditions, start a trial mix with a
                     reduced amount of cement. Once all components are mixed,
                     add cement if necessary to achieve the desired consistency.
                     Record the amounts of cement required and use this for

                                        303
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     subsequent mixes. Do not reduce the quantity of cement noted
                     in the Mix Proportions.

                     In case the slurry sets before application of mortar, a fresh
                     coat of slurry shall be applied. Under no circumstances, water
                     shall be added in PMC repairs mortar mix. Unused mortar or
                     mortar which has partially set, shall not be re-mixed & used.



                     Mechanical Strength of Mortar:

                     Anti-corrosive polymer      modified mortar shall have the
                     following:

                                                       7 days       28 days
                             Compressive           18 N/mm2        38 N/mm2
                             strength
                             Flexural strength           -         10 N/mm2
                             (IS 5816 –1959)
                             Split tensile               -         6 N/mm2
                             strength
                             (IS 5816 –1959)

                     For anti –corrosion polymer modified bonding slurry:

                     The anti-corrosive polymer modified bonding slurry shall be
                     QA Acrylic base MONOBOND 2000 or equivalent.

                     The bonding slurry should remain in tacky state prior to placing
                     of the freshly mixed concrete or mortar with mechanical
                     strength of polymer modified bonding slurry.

                     Mixing proportions of Bonding Slurry shall be as follows:

                           Cement                            -      100 parts by
                           weight
                           MONOBOBD 2000           -         40 parts by weight
                           Fine Silica sand        -         100 parts by weight

                     The fine silica sand, which is to be used for consistency in
                     anti-corrosive polymer modified bonding slurry, should be with
                     fine silica sand with following sieve sizes.


                      I.S. Sieve No.    Percentage passing by weight
                           10 mm            100
                           4.75 mm          100
                           2.36 mm          100
                           1.18 mm          100
                           600 icrons       90-100
                           300 crons        40-60
                                        304
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                           150 icrons           0-10
                           75 microns           0-3

                     Mechanical Strength of Bonding Slurry

                             Bond Strength –

                                    WET     -          3-4 N/mm2
                                    DRY     -          7-8 N/mm2

                     Above bonding slurry should conform to the following
                     properties:

                         ASTM-C1059-86 (Latex agents for bonding fresh to old
                         concrete)

                         ASTM-C1042-86 (Bond strength of latex system with
                         cement)

                         Pot life: 1 hour for 5 kg bonding slurry mix.

Clause 2819          REPAIR TO VOID IN ARCHES WITH PMC MORTAR

                     The voids created in the masonry arches by dislodged stones
                     shall be filled with PMC mortar.

                     The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush and
                     oil free air blast. Before applying PMC repair mortar the
                     prepared substrata shall be thoroughly soaked with clean
                     water. Free surface water shall be removed before priming.
                     The substrata shall be primed with PMC slurry. Repair mortar
                     shall be applied before primer has set i.e. within 20-30
                     minutes. The mortar shall be applied with trowel and shall be
                     well worked inside and compacted. The surface shall be
                     smooth finished to match the adjacent surface. Unused mortar
                     or mortar which has partially set shall not be used. Mortar shall
                     be applied in layers to avoid sagging. Manufacturer’s
                     recommendation shall be followed.

Clause 2820          SEALING OF CRACKS IN CONCRETE IN PIER /
                     ABUTMENT CAPS, SLABS, GIRDERS, PEDESTAL WALLS
                     ETC. WITH EPOXY RESIN INJECTION

                     The work is to seal all cracks in concrete in pier/abutment
                     caps, slabs. girders, pedestal walls etc.

                     The work shall be executed in accordance with Section 2800,
                     clauses 2803 & 2804.

                     The cracks shall be sealed with epoxy mortar prior to injection.
                     Epoxy for mortar shall be Resicrete 2115 or equivalent. Epoxy
                     for injection shall be Resicrete 21 or equivalent.

                                        305
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                     The epoxy resin material shall be approved by the Engineer
                     prior to procurement and use.

Clause 2821          INSPECTION & CLEANING OF BRIDGE BEARINGS AND
                     GREASING OF STEEL ROCKER-ROLLER      / PLATE
                     BEARINGS AND REMOVAL OF ALL DEBRIS AROUND
                     BEARINGS

                     The work shall consist of inspection of bearings to check
                     whether the bearings are functioning properly and if any parts
                     of the bearing or nuts and bolts are missing, to replace them.
                     The work shall also include cleaning of bearings and oiling and
                     greasing of metallic bearings, wherever required. Realignment
                     / readjustment of bearings, and replacement of missing parts
                     of metallic bearings, requiring jacking up of superstructure is
                     excluded from the scope of work. Replacement of existing
                     bearings with new bearings is also excluded from the scope of
                     the work.

                     The area around the bearings and their pedestals shall be
                     cleared of all debris, vegetation, dust etc. and cleaned for
                     proper inspection.

                     When grease boxes are fixed around the metallic bearings, (a)
                     the same shall be permanently removed along with old grease
                     and (b) bearings shall be cleaned for proper inspection.

                     In case of elastomeric bearings, these shall be inspected for
                     their proper seating, rotation, bulging, cracking, splitting etc.
                     and a record thereof shall be provided to the Engineer for
                     necessary instructions.

                     In respect of metallic bearings, fresh graphite grease as
                     approved by the Engineer shall be applied to the surfaces,
                     which are sliding, rotating or moving due to movements in
                     bearings. The materials, specially, graphite grease, required
                     for oiling and greasing of metallic bearings, wherever required,
                     shall be as per approval of the Engineer. Grease used shall be
                     such that it retains its properties for long life and shall not
                     affect the bearing parts.

                     All other surfaces of the metallic bearings shall be cleaned of
                     all rusts, corrosion and a coat of anti corrosive oil paint applied
                     as per directions of the Engineer.

                     Missing parts of metallic bearings, nuts and bolts etc. shall be
                     replaced by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer.

Clause 2822          CONTROLLED JACKING UP OF SUPER STRUCTURE,
                     RESETTING / REPLACEMENT OF ROCKER AND ROCKER
                     CUM ROLLER BEARINGS, SEGMENTAL BEARINGS AND
                     ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS

                                        306
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                     The work shall be executed before laying of new wearing coat
                     and expansion joint. The superstructure shall be jacked up
                     nominally at abutment end for resetting of the bearings.
                     Jacking up of superstructure is a specialised work. Contractor
                     shall furnish a methodology statement with his proposal for
                     resetting/repair of bearings. Lifting shall be done through
                     hydraulically operated jacks. The jacks shall be placed under
                     cross diaphragm. Adequate distribution plates shall be placed
                     at top and bottom of the jack to reduce the stress on concrete.
                     If the soffit of the cross diaphragm is weak, the same shall be
                     first repaired with epoxy mortar and/or epoxy injection and
                     lifting will commence only after such repair is fully cured. In
                     addition to jacks, the span will also be supported on packing
                     plates which shall be placed under the cross diaphragm
                     between the jacks. The extent of lifting shall be decided by the
                     Engineer.

                     Only proven type of jacks shall be used. These jacks shall be
                     provided with lock-nut system. The jacks shall be randomly
                     tested for 1.5 times the capacity. In lifted condition the span
                     will be supported on the lock-nut arrangement of the jacks with
                     no pressure on the hydraulic circuit. The contact stress on
                     concrete shall not exceed 30 MPa. Suitable M.S. distribution
                     plates have to be provided at top and bottom of the jack for
                     this purpose. All jacks shall be connected to a common pump
                     and it will be ensured that the deck is rifted equally upstream &
                     downstream. For monitoring this, dial gauges shall be
                     provided. Only steel packing plates shall be used.
                     Specifications for epoxy mortar/epoxy injection shall be
                     followed for repair to soffit of cross diaphragm.

                     The cross diaphragms shall be closely watched during lifting
                     and also for the entire duration when the span is supported on
                     jacks and packings. If development of cracks is observed, the
                     lifting will be stopped and alternate arrangement for supporting
                     the superstructure shall be made subject to approval of the
                     Engineer.

                     The cost of all operations under this clause including all tools
                     and plants. Materials, jacks, pumps, labour etc. shall be
                     incidental to cost of resetting / replacement of bearings.




Clause 2823          APPLYING 1:3 CEMENT MORTAR TO EXPOSED SURFACE
                     OF MASONRY OF EXISTING WING WALLS / RETURNS,
                     ABUTMENT AND PIERS




                                        307
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     All exposed masonry surface of existing wing walls /returns,
                     abutments, piers etc. shall be provided with 20mm thick
                     plaster in two layers.

                     The work shall be in accordance with Section 1300.


Clause 2824          BUILDING UP OF EXISTING WING WALLS / RETURNS
                     AND RETAINING WALL AT SIDES OF APPROACH SLABS
                     WITH BRICK MASONRY AND FINISHING WITH 1:3
                     CEMENT MORTAR 20mm THICK

                     Existing wing walls and returns wherever deficient shall be
                     built up and retaining walls shall be constructed at sides of the
                     approach slabs as shown in the drawings or as directed by the
                     Engineer.

                     The work shall be done in accordance with Section 1300.
                     Masonry for construction of short retaining walls at sides of
                     approach slab shall be laid over a 100mm thick M 15 PCC
                     leveling course.


Clause 2825          SEALING OF WIDE GAPS AT JUNCTION OF WING WALL
                     AND ABUTMENT WITH BRICK BATS AND FINISHING WITH
                     1:3  CEMENT    MORTAR    INCLUDING    PROVIDING
                     BITUMINOUS DEBONDING LAYER

                     Due to settlement of wing wall, the gap created at the junction
                     of the wing wall and the abutment, shall be sealed by filling
                     with brickbats and finishing with plaster.

                     The abutment face of the gap shall be coated with one layer of
                     bituminous compound. The gap shall be filled with bricks bats
                     and rammed. The vertical exposed surface of the gap shall be
                     plastered. Thereafter cement slurry shall be poured from the
                     top under gravity till refusal. The top surface of the gap shall
                     then be plastered and finally finished.
 Clause 2826           EARTH FILLING BELOW APPROACH SLAB

                      This should include:

                       (a) Excavating the embankment, sub-grade etc. to the
                           required depth
                       (b) Refilling with suitable sub-grade fill, pavement base or sub
                           base to specifications




                                        308
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      The work shall be executed in accordance with Standard
                      Specifications Section 300 Clause 305. The cavities formed
                      below the approach slabs shall be filled with approved back fill
                      material. The filling shall be done in layers not exceeding
                      150mm. The masonry retaining wall shall also be built up in
                      companion layers of 150mm. The compaction shall be done
                      with the help of suitable equipment after necessary watering

                      Measurement for Payment

                      Measurement for payment shall be as per clause 305.8 of
                      standard Specification Section 300.

                      Rate

                      Rate shall be as per clause 305.9 of standard Specification
                      Section 300.

Clause 2827          CASTING OF APPROACH SLAB

                     The grade of concrete shall be as indicated in drawings / Bill of
                     Quantities / as directed by the Engineer.

                     Approach slabs which are cracked, missing or otherwise
                     damaged shall be recast.

                     The work shall be executed in accordance with Section 2700
                     clause 2704. The approach slab shall be laid over lean
                     concrete as per drawing. The base shall be consolidated to
                     proctor density 98%.

                       Measurement for Payment

                       The measurement shall be in cubic metre.


                       Rate

                       The contract unit rate for approach slab shall include the cost
                       of all reinforcement, labour, material, tools and plant and
                       other cost necessary for completion of the work as per these
                       Specifications. The rate for base shall include cost of all
                       reinforcement, labour, material, tools and plant required,
                       including preparation of surface and consolidation complete in
                       all respects


Clause 2828          STONE PITCHING ON SLOPES, 300mm THICK, GROUTED
                     WITH 1:3 CEMENT MORTAR

                     Slope protection with stone pitching shall be provided at
                     abutments.

                                        309
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     The work shall be executed in accordance with Section 2500.

                     Slope protection with stone pitching shall be provided at
                     abutments of particular bridge wherever disturbed or required.
                     This will include removing the disturbed slope pitching and
                     restoring the same and strengthening if required

                     Measurement for Payment

                     The stone pitching shall be measured in cubic metre.

                     Rate

                     The contract unit rate shall be as per Clause 2510 of
                     standard Specification Section 2500.

Clause 2829          PROVIDING AND PLACING IN POSITION MECHANICALLY
                     FABRICATED GABION WALL AROUND ABUTMENT AND
                     PIERS INCLUDING EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

                     The work shall be executed in accordance with Section 2500
                     clause 2503. Excavation and back filling shall be done in
                     accordance with Section 300.

                     Gabions shall consist of a double twisted Zinc & PVC coated
                     wire mesh container of variable sizes, uniformly partitioned into
                     internal cells. interconnected with other similar units, and filled
                     with stone at the site to form flexible, permeable, monolithic
                     structures. Mechanically fabricated double twisted hexagonal
                     mesh type gabion such as Maccaferri or equivalent conforming
                     to ASTM/ BS specifications shall be used.

                     Mechanically fabricated double twisted hexagonal mesh shall
                     be approved by the Engineer prior to procurement and use.

Clause 2830          COMPRESSIBLE PRE-MOULDED                    ASPHALT       FILLER
                     BOARD IN LONGITUDINAL JOINTS

                     The work shall be done in longitudinal joint between existing
                     and new bridge.

                     2 mm dia. wire shall be sewn on one face of the filler board as
                     shown in the drawings. The wire shall be at least 300 mm in
                     length and shall be tied to reinforcement wherever possible.
                     The other face shall be glued to the central verge concrete of
                     the existing bridge with approved adhesive. The filler board
                     shall be positioned vertically 25 mm below the top of the verge.


                     Premoulded filler board shall be 50mm thick with a tolerance
                     of 1.5mm and of a firm compressible material and complying
                     with the requirements of IS : 1838 or BS Specification clause
                     No. 2630.
                                        310
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                     Filler board material shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
                     procurement and use.

Clause 2831          POLY-SULPHIDE RUBBER JOINT SEALANT

                     The work shall be done in longitudinal joint between existing
                     and new bridge.

                     Before application it shall be ensured that the top of the fiber
                     board and the concrete faces are dry, sound, free from dirt,
                     grease and other loose foreign matters. A thin coat of primer
                     shall be applied only on the concrete faces with a brush. The
                     primer shall be allowed to air dry before applying sealant. The
                     components of the sealant i.e. base and hardener shall be
                     mixed in a slow speed mechanical mixer till uniform color is
                     obtained. Placement of the mixed sealant shall be done with
                     either cartridge of fully enclosed gun barrels within 30 minutes
                     of mixing. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed.

                     The sealing compound shall be two packs, low modulus of
                     elasticity, polysulphide elastomer having no tar or bituminous
                     ingredients such as Cico T -680 or equivalent with following
                     properties of the cured compound.

                     Tensile strength                -    0.4 Mpa 10%
                     Modulus of elasticity           -    At 100% elongation: 0.15
                     Mpa
                     Elongation                      -    Elongation at break 550%

                     Hardness                        -    Shore' A' hardness 22 3
                     @ 25°C
                     Operating temperature           -    -20°C to +80°C.
                     Shrinkage                       -    Less than 1%.
                     Permanent dynamic movement      -      25 %
                     capability

                     Polysulphide material shall be approved by the Engineer prior
                     to procurement and use.

Clause 2832          The existing clause 2811 of the Specifications shall be
                     renumbered as 2832.

Clause 2833          The existing clause 2812 of the Specifications shall be
                     renumbered as 2833.

                     Add the following as items (i) to (dd)
                     i)     Dismantling of existing railings, kerbs, footpaths,
                            approach slabs etc. shall be measured in cubic meter
                            of concrete dismantled;
                     j)     M-35 Concrete parapet with/ without footpath and steel
                            handrail shall be measured in linear meters;


                                        311
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     k)     Dismantling of existing damaged brick masonry shall
                            be measured in cubic metres of brick masonry
                            dismantled;
                     I)     Dismantling of wing walls shall be measured in cubic
                            metres;
                     m)     Provision of dowel bars shall be measured in numbers;
                     n)     Repair of corroded reinforcement shall be measured in
                            terms of weight of steel/reinforcement used, in tonne;
                     o)     Drainage spouts shall be measured in numbers;
                     p)     Repairs to concrete with PMC mortar shall be
                            measured in square metres with average thickness of
                            20 mm of mortar applied;
                     q)     Sealing of cracks in masonry by cement grouting shall
                            be measured in terms of weight of cement
                            consumption in kg;
                     r)     Building up of existing wing walls/return walls/returning
                            walls shall be measured in cubic metre;
                     s)     Repair of voids in arches shall be measured in cubic
                            metre of mortar applied;
                     t)     Sealing of cracks in piers, slabs etc. shall be measured
                            in kgs. of epoxy actually consumed for mortar and
                            injection;
                     u)     Sealing of gaps between abutment and wing walls shall
                            be measured in square metres of surface area in
                            elevation i.e. height x width of gap;
                     v)     Earth fill below approach slabs shall be measured in
                            cubic metre;
                     w)     Concrete M-30 in approach slab shall be measured in
                            cubic metre;
                     x)     Premoulded filler boards shall be measured in square
                            metre;
                     y)     Polysulphide joint sealants shall be measured in linear
                            metres;
                     z)     Cleaning and greasing of bearings shall be measured
                            in numbers;
                     aa)    Jacking up superstructure will be measured as a lump
                            sum;
                     bb)    Applying cement mortar to exposed surface of masonry
                            shall be measured in square metres;
                     cc)    Stone pitching shall be measured in cubic metre;
                     dd)    Gabion walls shall be measured in cubic metre.

Clause 2834          Existing Clause 2813 shall be renumbered as 2834.

                     Add the following at the end of the Clause.

                     i)     The contract unit rate for dismantling of existing railing
                            shall include the cost of all materials, labour, tools,
                            plants, disposal of dismantled materials, safety
                            measures and all other incidental expenses necessary
                            for completion of work as per specifications.
                     ii)    The contract unit rate for dismantling of existing wing
                            walls shall include the cost of all materials, labour,
                            tools, plants, disposal of dismantled materials, safety
                                       312
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                             measures and all other incidental expenses necessary
                             for completion of work as per specifications.
                     iii)    The contract unit rate for dismantling of existing railing,
                             kerbs, footpath slabs, approach slabs and damaged
                             concrete in wing walls/returns, piers and abutments
                             shall include all labour, tools, plants, disposal of
                             dismantled materials, safety measures and all other
                             incidental expenses necessary for completion of work
                             as per specification.
                     iv)     The contract unit rate for dismantling of existing
                             damaged brick masonry in wing walls/returns,
                             parapets, etc. shall include all labour, tools, plants,
                             disposal of dismantled materials, safety measures and
                             all other incidental expenses necessary for completion
                             of work as per specification.
                     v)      The contract unit rate for dismantling of existing wing
                             wall for construction of adjacent 2-lane bridge a) Brick
                             masonry b) Concrete shall include all labour, tools,
                             plants, disposal of dismantled materials, safety
                             measures and all other incidental expenses necessary
                             for completion of work as per specification.
                     vi)     The contract unit rate for dowel bars shall include the
                             cost of all materials excluding steel reinforcement bars,
                             labour, tools and plant, placing dowel bars in position,
                             wastage, sampling, testing and all other incidental
                             expenses necessary for completion of work as per
                             specifications.
                     vii)    The contract unit rate for providing drainage spouts
                             shall include the cost of all materials, labour, tools,
                             plants, disposal of dismantled materials, safety
                             measures and all other incidental expenses necessary
                             for the completion of work as per specification. The
                             cost of PMC brush topping shall not be paid separately.

                     viii)   The contract unit rate for Repair of corroded
                             reinforcement shall include the cost of all materials,
                             labour, tools, plants, disposal of dismantled materials,
                             safety measures and all other incidental expenses
                             necessary for the completion of work as per
                             specification.
                     ix)     The contract unit rate for repair to leached,
                             honeycombed, spalled concrete shall include the cost
                             of all materials, labour, tools, plants, disposal of
                             dismantled materials, safety measures and all other
                             incidental expenses necessary for the completion of
                             work as per specifications. The cost of PMC brush
                             topping shall not be paid separately.
                     x)      The contract unit rate for applying cement mortar to
                             exposed masonry surfaces shall include the cost of all
                             materials, labour, tools, plants, scaffolding, sampling,
                             testing, curing and all other incidental expenses
                             necessary for completion of work as per specifications.
                     xi)     The contract unit rate for building up of existing wing
                             walls / returns and retaining walls at sides of approach
                                        313
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                              slabs with brick masonry and finishing with 1:3 cement
                              mortar, 20 mm thick, shall include the cost of all
                              materials, labour, tools, plants, scaffolding, sampling,
                              testing, curing and all other incidental expenses
                              necessary for completion of work as per specifications.
                     xii)     The contract unit rate for sealing of gaps with cement
                              mortar shall include the cost of all materials, labour
                              tools, plants, scaffolding, sampling, testing, curing and
                              all other incidental expenses necessary for completion
                              of work as per specifications.
                     xiii)    The contract unit rate for earth filling below approach
                              slabs shall include the cost of all materials, labour,
                              tools, plants, and all other incidental expenses
                              necessary for completion of work as per specifications.
                     xiv)     The contract unit rate for approach slabs shall include
                              the cost of all materials, labour, tools, plants, and all
                              other incidental expenses necessary for completion of
                              work as per specifications.
                     xv)      The contract unit rate for providing compressible
                              premoulded asphalt filler board shall include the cost of
                              all materials, labour, tools, plants, safety measures and
                              all incidental expenses necessary for completion of
                              work as per specifications.
                     xvi)     The contract unit rate for providing polysulphide joint
                              sealant shall include the cost of all materials, labour,
                              tools, plants, and all other incidental expenses
                              necessary for completion of work as per specifications.
                     xvii)    The contract unit rate for cleaning of bearing shall
                              include the cost of all materials, labour, operations,
                              tools, plants, and all incidental expenses necessary for
                              completion of work as per specifications.
                     xviii)   The contract unit rate for controlled jacking up of bridge
                              superstructure shall include the cost of all materials,
                              Iabour, operations, tools, plants, safety measures and
                              all other incidental expenses necessary for completion
                              of work as per specifications,
                     xix)     The contract unit rate for stone pitching shall include
                              the cost of all materials, labour, tools, plants, and all
                              other incidental expenses necessary for completion of
                              work as per specifications.
                     xx)      The contract unit rate for gabion walls shall include the
                              cost of all materials, labour, tools, plants, and all other
                              incidental expenses necessary for completion of work
                              as per specifications.


 SECTION 2900           PIPE CULVERTS

 Clause 2904            Bedding for Pipe

                        Delete the word “rammed” in line 6 of paragraph (i) and
                        substitute it with “by Roller/or plate vibrator.”


                                         314
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 Clause 2906           JOINTING

                       Delete the first and second sentences of Para 1 of this Clause
                       and Substitute.
                       “The pipes shall be jointed by collar. The collars shall be of
                       RCC 150 to 200mm wide and having the same strength as
                       the pipes to be jointed”.

 Clause 2907           Backfilling

                       The Second sentence of this clause shall be replaced as
                       below:

                       “The backfill shall be with selected granular material of
                       approved quality.”

 Clause 2910           Measurement for payment

                       The first line of second para of this Sub Clause shall be read
                       as:
                       “Selected granular material for pipe bedding shall be
                       considered incidental to work and cement concrete bedding
                       shall be measured separately.”

 Clause 2911           Rate

                       The first paragraph under this Sub Clause shall be read as:
                       The Contract unit rate for the pipes shall include the cost of
                       pipes including loading, unloading, hauling, storing, laying in
                       position, jointing and cement concrete bedding below the pipe
                       complete and all incidental costs to complete the work as per
                       these specifications.


 SECTION 3000          MAINTENANCE OF ROAD

 Clause 3001           General

                       This Clause shall be read as under:

                       "The Specifications shall apply to all items of road
                       maintenance works as required to be carried out under the
                       Contract or as directed by the 'Engineer'. The works shall be
                       carried out in conformity with the relevant Specifications to the
                       required level, grade and lines using approved materials. The
                       works shall be carried out using light duty machinery or
                       manual means provided the quality of the end product does
                       not suffer. In execution of maintenance works, a reference is
                       made to the IRC publications: "Manual for Maintenance of
                       Roads" and "Code of Practice for Maintenance for Bituminous
                       Surfaces of Highways, IRC 82 - 1982" for guidance and
                       compliance wherever applicable. Wherever the Specification
                       is not clear, good engineering practice shall be adopted in the
                                        315
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       construction to the satisfaction of the Engineer."

 Clause 3005           THIS CLAUSE SHALL BE DELETED.


 SECTION 3100          REINFORCED SOIL EARTH STRUCTURES

 Section 3100          This Clause shall be substituted by Additional Specification.


Add new section 3200

SECTION 3200         UTILITY DUCTS

Clause 3201          Scope

                     The work shall consist of laying and jointing of RCC pipe NP-4
                     utility ducts in accordance with the requirements of Section
                     2900.

Clause 3202          Laying of Pipes

                     Laying of Pipes shall be carried out in accordance with clause
                     2905.

Clause 3203          Jointing

                     The provisions of clause 2906 of the specifications shall be
                     followed to the extent applicable. The Engineer's decision shall
                     be final and binding.

Clause 3204          Backfilling

                     Back filling, where directed by the Engineer, shall be carried
                     out in accordance with clause 2907 of the specifications.

Clause 3205          Closing of ends

                     The ends of pipes shall be closed with plastic covers to
                     prevent ingress of foreign materials after the construction.

Clause 3206          Measurement for Payments

                     The utility ducts shall be measured from end to end in linear
                     metres.

Clause 3207          Rate

                     The contract rate for ducts shall include the cost of pipes
                     including collars and covers, handling and storing of pipes,
                     laying in positions and jointing complete and all incidental
                     works necessary for completion. Excavation including back

                                        316
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     filling, where necessary, shall not be measured and paid
                     separately and shall be included in the rate for Utility ducts.




                   ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


 Clause A-1            DIVERSION OF EXISTING WATER COURSES

 Clause A-1.1          Scope

                       The work shall consist of excavation of new channels for
                       diverting watercourses existing along the road way alignment
                       or at cross drainage structures and depositing the excavated
                       materials for closing the existing channels. The location and
                       the extent of work to be carried out shall be shown on the
                       Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.


                                       317
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 Clause A-1.2          Construction Operations

                       Excavation of new channels and deposition of excavated
                       material shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 301.
                       The excavation shall be carried out to such widths and depths
                       and at such locations as shown on Drawings or as directed by
                       the Engineer. Deposition of the excavated material on the
                       existing channels shall be carried out in such a manner that
                       the latter gets closed and becomes non-operational. Any
                       surplus material, if found suitable shall be made use of in
                       embankment construction or sent to spoil as directed by the
                       Engineer.

 Clause A-1.3          Measurement of Payment

                       The excavation of new channels shall be measured in cum. as
                       road way and drain excavation in accordance with Clause
                       301.

CLAUSE A-2           PLANTATION OF LOW HEIGHT SHRUBS

Clause A-2.1         Scope

                     The work shall consist of:

                     a) Planting of saplings in median.
                     b) Planting of low height shrubs with in median area.

Clause A-2.2         Sapling for Low Height Shrubs

                     The saplings (not less than 300mm in height) shall be of
                     draught resistant variety normally grown for hedges in the
                     area, approved by the Engineer.

Clause A-2.3         Planting of Low Height Shrubs

                     The low height shrubs saplings shall be planted in two rows,
                     one each along each edge of the median. Bed for the saplings
                     shall be prepared with necessary manuring, and the live
                     saplings shall be planted in lines parallel to the median edge to
                     the directions of the Engineer. Spacing between saplings in a
                     row shall be such that a thick shrub can be grown, and this
                     shall generally be not farther away than 3m. The planting shall
                     be completed soon after completion of the medians.


Clause A-2.4         Maintenance




                                        318
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        The saplings of low height shrubs planted shall be watered
                        and maintained by the Contractor till issue of final taking over
                        certificate. Maintenance shall also include watering, weeding
                        out of undesirable plants, and replacement of dead plant,
                        manuring and trimming of the hedges.

Clause A-2.5            Measurement for Payment

                        Planting of low height shrubs along median edges including
                        maintenance shall be measured in numbers.

Clause A-2.6            Rates

                        The contract unit rate for planting of shrubs shall include the
                        cost of all labour and material involved in all the operations
                        described above including cost of saplings and maintenance
                        as mentioned above, the cost of supplying and stacking the
                        requisite quantity of manure and other incidentals.


CLAUSE A-3 INTER LOCKING CONCRETE BLOCKS

Clause A-3.1            Scope

                        The scope of work involves laying of interlocking concrete
                        blocks laid on 30 mm thick prepared sand bed conforming to
                        IRC: SP: 63 – 2004 and laid as shown in the drawings and as
                        directed by Engineer. The shape of blocks, the source of
                        supply, the methodology for laying of blocks shall be got
                        approved from Engineer.

Clause A-3.2            Unit of measurement

                        The unit of measurement shall be the area of the finished item
                        of work of interlocking blocks measured in plan in sq m.

Clause A-3.3            Rate

                        The unit cost includes full compensation for laying the sand
                        bed and laying the interlocking tiles including the cost of sand
                        and tiles.

 Clause A-4              RAIN WATER HARVESTING STRUCTURE

                   1.     Scope

                         This work shall consist of construction of Rain Water
                         Harvesting Structures along roadside drains and other
                         locations intended for ground water recharging, as shown in
                         the drawings or as ordered by the Engineer and in
                         accordance with the requirements of these Specifications.

                   2.     Materials
                                          319
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                       All materials shall meet commercial grade standards and
                       shall be approved by the Engineer before being used in the
                       work.

                   3. Construction Operations

                       General

                       Prior to the start of the relevant construction, the Contractor
                       shall submit to the Engineer for approval his schedules for
                       carrying out construction of Road Side Drains and Rain
                       Water Harvesting Structures. He shall also submit for
                       approval of his proposed method of construction.

                       Trench Excavation

                       Trench for rainwater harvesting structure shall be excavated
                       to the specified lines, grades and dimensions shown in the
                       drawings. Where unsuitable material is met with at the trench
                       bed, the same shall be removed to such depth as directed by
                       the Engineer and backfilled with approved material which
                       shall be thoroughly compacted to the specified degree.

                       Filter Material for Trench

                       Filter material shall be provided to the dimensions as shown
                       in the drawing and directions of the Engineer. The grading of
                       filter material shall be as per the table given below.

                           Table 1: Grading for 6 mm to 12 mm material

                            Sieve Size         Percent Passing by weight


                                 13.2                       100

                                 11.2                    90 – 100

                                 9.5                     70 – 100

                                 5.6                         0


                        Table 2: Grading for 12 mm to 20 mm material

                            Sieve Size         Percent Passing by weight


                                 26.5                       100

                                 13.2                        40

                                         320
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                      Sand shall be of coarse graded type with silt content not
                      more than 8 %.
                  3.1 Trench Slope Protection

                        The sloping sides of water courses along the trench shall,
                        where shown on the Drawings, be protected against the
                        action of water by rubble paving to form flat or curved surface
                        as indicated. The protection shall consist of rough dressed
                        square stones of size not less than 250 mm in depth nor less
                        than 0.02 cum in volume and no rounded boulders shall be
                        used.

                    4 Measurements For Payment

                        The work for rainwater harvesting trenches as stated above
                        shall be measured in terms of unit specified in Bill of
                        Quantities.

                    5 Rate

                        The Contract unit rate for rainwater harvesting structure shall
                        be payment in full for carrying out all the required operations
                        including full compensation for all materials, labour, tools and
                        incidentals.


 Clause A-5             REINFORCED CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS

                    1   Description

                        This work shall consist of stone masonry and reinforced
                        concrete retaining walls of the sizes and dimensions shown
                        on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer, installed at
                        the locations shown on the drawings or as directed by the
                        Engineer in accordance with these Specifications.

                    2   Materials

                  2.1 Concrete

                        Plain cement concrete shall be of grade M15 below the
                        foundation of the retaining wall as per Clause 1704 of
                        MOSRTH Specifications.

                        Structural concrete shall be of grade M30 as per Clause
                        1704 of MOSRTH Specifications.

                  2.2   Steel Reinforcement

                        The reinforcement for concrete structure shall be as shown
                        on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer and in
                        accordance with Clause 1009 of MOSRTH Specifications.
                                         321
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                        Formwork material shall conform to Clause 1500 of
                        MOSRTH Specifications.

                  2.4 Stone Masonry

                        Materials for stone masonry work shall conform to the
                        Clause 1004 of MOSRTH Specifications.

                  2.5   Mortar Materials

                        Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of
                        Clauses 1006 and 1304 of MOSRTH Specifications.

                    3   Construction

                  3.1   Excavation and Backfill

                        Excavation shall be performed in accordance with the
                        requirements of Clauses 304 of MOSRTH Specifications.

                        Backfill shall be performed in accordance with the
                        requirements of Clauses 305.4.4 of MOSRTH Specifications.

                  3.2   Formwork

                        Formwork shall be supplied and fixed in the position required
                        for the concrete to be cast as shown on the drawings or as
                        required by the Engineer and shall be supplied, erected and
                        removed as specified in Clause 1500 of MOSRTH
                        Specifications.

                  3.3   Steel Reinforcement

                        Steel reinforcement shall be furnished, bent and fixed where
                        shown on the drawings or where required by the Engineer
                        and its furnishing, bending and fixing shall be done in
                        accordance with Clause 1601 of MOSRTH Specifications.

                  3.4   Structural Concrete

                        Structural Concrete grade M30 and Plain cement concrete
                        grade M15 shall be supplied, placed, finished and cured as
                        specified in Clause 1700 of MOSRTH Specifications.



                   4.   Measurement and Payment

                        The excavation shall be measured in cubic metres and paid
                        as per Bill of Quantities.        .

                        Backfilling the trenches with excavated materials and
                                        322
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        selected materials shall be measured in cubic metres and
                        paid as per Bill of Quantities

                        The quantity of Plain cement concrete shall be measured in
                        cubic metres and paid as per Bill of Quantities

                        The structural concrete shall be measured in cubic metres
                        and paid as per Bill of Quantities.

                        The steel required shall be measured in tonnes and paid as
                        per Bill of Quantities.

                        The payment shall be in full compensation for furnishing and
                        placing all materials including mortar, formwork and for all
                        labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to
                        complete the work prescribed in this section.


 Clause A-6            REINFORCED SOIL/ EARTH STRUCTURES


              1.0    SCOPE

              1.1    All elements comprising the reinforced soil/ earth structure
                     such as the facia units, the reinforcement with
                     accessories/fittings and the select backfill material shall all be
                     laid in conformity with the specifications and in compliance
                     with the lines, grades, design and dimensions as per the
                     approved drawings.

              1.2    The reinforced soil/ earth structures shall be designed for a
                     service life of 100 years. The guarantee period for all types of
                     Reinforced Soil/ Earth Structures shall be ten (10) years from
                     the date of completion of flyover, underpass, overpass,
                     interchange, bridge works irrespective of defect liability period
                     specified elsewhere in the tender document. The contractor(s)
                     shall furnish the guarantee bond as directed by the
                     Engineer-in-Charge.

              1.3    The work shall be done in conformity with the MORT&H
                     Specifications for Road and Bridge works, Reprint 2002. The
                     design shall ensure internal and external stability of the
                     reinforced soil/ earth wall, meeting the requirements of B.S.
                     8006-1995. For external and internal stability analysis under
                     seismic loading French Standard NF 94-220 and AASHTO/ US
                     Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) design guidelines
                     (FHWA-NHI-00-043) shall be followed.

                     Traffic live loads, traffic impact loads on vehicle safety barrier
                     system shall be taken in accordance with the design
                     requirements and earthquake loads as per IS: 1893-2002.
              1.4    The Contractor shall submit within one month from the date of
                     commencement to the Engineer, the complete design,

                                        323
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     computation and working drawing, and also the methodology
                     proposed to be adopted for the works.

                     The submission shall include the following:

                      i.      Existing ground levels including cross-sections that
                      have been verified by the contractor for each location
                      involving the construction wholly or partially in the original
                      ground.
                      ii.     Layout of walls, detailed design calculations and
                      drawings,      material    specifications    and     construction
                      methodology including quality control and quality assurance
                      of different components.
                      iii.    Earthwork requirements, specifications for materials
                      and compaction of fill.
                      iv.     Details of drainage systems and any other facilities.
                      v.      Test results of soil reinforcing structural element from
                      manufacturers/ suppliers.
                      vi.     Test results of various materials from a reputed
                      independent laboratory in India or abroad.
                      vii.    Detail sub-soil investigation report including field and
                      laboratory test results in complete.
                      viii. Any other information required in the plans or special
                      provisions or requested by the Engineer.

              2.     Eligibility Conditions

                     Reinforced soil/ earth structure being a specialized technology,
                     the contractor shall furnish design for approval by the engineer
                     and make his own arrangements to secure the supplies and
                     services needed. The past experiences and credentials in
                     details of the specialized agency executing the reinforced wall
                     construction shall be submitted well in advance for the
                     approval of the Engineer.

                     The reinforced soil/ earth structure technology shall have a
                     proven adoption with regard to durability. The approved agency
                     shall furnish documentary proof of satisfactory performance of
                     their proposed methodology for at least 10 years. The
                     approved executing agency shall have successfully completed
                     at least one project of construction of reinforced soil structures
                     of height not less than 8.0 m. and a total minimum 30,000
                     sq.m. of reinforced soil structures in India. He should provide
                     authenticated details of licensing and collaboration
                     arrangement, where relevant for prior approval.

              3.0    REINFORCED SOIL/EARTH BACKFILL

              3.1    The reinforced earth backfill shall be a select granular fill
                     having high frictional resistance, low compressibility and free
                     draining. Coarse-grained soils with limited fines adequately
                     satisfy these requirements. Thus, the select granular fill may
                     contain fines content (passing 75 micron sieve) not exceeding
                     15%. Co-efficient of uniformity (Cu) of the backfill shall be

                                        324
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     greater 2 and the peak angle of internal friction should be
                     greater than or equal to 320. The plasticity index shall not
                     exceed 5%.

                     The backfill shall also be free from organic or otherwise
                     deleterious materials so as not to cause corrosion of the soil
                     reinforcement and the facia panels. It shall conform to the
                     following physicochemical requirements.
              2      Where metal reinforcement is proposed to be used, the backfill
                     material shall have a resistivity of 5000 ohm-cm or more
                     determined based on standard test as directed by Engineer
                     and materials with resistivity less than 1000 ohm-cm are
                     inadequate and shall not be used.

                     Materials with resistivity between 5000 & 1000 ohm-cm are
                     acceptable provided that in water extracted from soil-water mix,
                     the content of chlorides does not exceed 200 ppm, the content
                     of Sulphate does not exceed 1000 ppm, and the Ph value is in
                     the range of >5<10.

                     The foundation soil’s electrochemical requirements should also
                     meet the above criteria. If not, special consideration will be
                     given to the design of reinforcing element and facing material.

                     The above criteria applicable only for metal strip reinforcement.

              3.3    The select backfill shall be compacted to ensure achieving
                     peak angle of friction not lower than 32° as established from
                     test as per Annexure C, BS 8006 – 1995. For design, effective
                     cohesion of backfill shall be taken as zero.

              3.4    The compacted layer should not be more than 200mm thick.
                     The compaction of backfill material shall be 98% of maximum
                     laboratory density obtained from modified proctor compaction
                     test performed as per IS 2720 (Part-8).

              3.5    Where metal reinforcement is proposed to be used, water used
                     for compaction of the select fill should have minimum resistivity
                     exceeding 700 ohm-cm.

              3.6    Quality Control

                     For every 3000 cum of reinforced earth backfill material or
                     whenever the approved source is changed, one sieve analysis,
                     one measurement of resistivity, angle of internal friction and
                     modified Proctor density shall be carried out. Any further tests
                     on soil to confirm its suitability as “reinforced earth backfill” can
                     be decided based on the results of these tests. However,
                     organic and deleterious content, Ph, sulphate and chloride
                     content shall be carried out as decided by Engineer.


              4.0    REINFORCING ELEMENTS


                                         325
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                1    Either of the reinforcing materials such as high adherence hot
                     dip galvanized steel or polymeric geosynthetics may be used
                     for reinforcing the select fill. The reinforcement may be in the
                     form of steel strips, for steel reinforcement and geogrids in
                     case of polymeric geosynthetic reinforcement. The selection of
                     suitable reinforcing element shall be as per specifications
                     given in the document and shall be approved by the Engineer.

                1    Hot Dip Galvanised Soil Reinforcing Strips & Tie Strips

                     All metallic components buried in soil shall be made of
                     electrolytically compatible materials. Where this is not
                     possible, effective electrical insulation of durability equal to the
                     service life of the structure shall be provided between different
                     materials. Shapes and dimensions of these elements shall be
                     as shown on the approved drawings. The minimum width of
                     the individual steel strip must be 40mm and minimum
                     thickness must be 5 mm. Tie strips and High Adherence
                     Reinforcing (HAR) steel strips shall be hot rolled. Their
                     physical and mechanical properties shall conform to European
                     norms BSEN 10025 or equivalent IS 2062.

                     Tie strips shall be fabricated from the plain strips of 40 x 4mm
                     with same specification as of reinforcing strips.

                     Reinforcing and tie strips shall be cut to the lengths and
                     tolerances shown on approved drawings. Holes for bolts shall
                     be punched in the locations shown. They shall be carefully
                     inspected to ensure they are true to size and free from defects
                     that may impair their strength or durability.


                     Bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal in shape and high strength
                     screw conforming to European norm E25100 Class 10.9 or
                     equivalent IS. They shall be 12mm in diameter 40mm in length
                     with shank, hot dip galvanized conforming to BS 729 or ASTM
                     A153 or equivalent IS.

                     The manufacturer shall provide the test results of all physical
                     and mechanical properties of metallic reinforcement for each
                     lot or as required by Engineer.

            2         Geosynthetics

                      The maximum allowable design load of the geogrid type shall
                      be higher than the required tensile load defined by the
                      stability analysis in the Design of the wall structure. The
                      manufacturers of geosynthetic materials must be able to
                      supply creep test data/ results for the period of minimum 10
                      years over a temperature of 40o C minimum (Facing
                      temperature attained in most tropical Indian climates/
                      locations where geosynthetics is connected to the modular
                      block or facia panel). The post construction strains in
                      geosynthetics must be restricted below 1.0% for approach
                                         326
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      highway retaining walls and 0.5% for abutments (mixed or
                      pure type) to meet serviceability state requirements.

                      All quantity control strength of geosynthetics must represent
                      minimum average roll values (MARV) only corresponding to
                      95% confidence limit. Testing of geosynthetic for tensile
                      strength shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 4595
                      for every 5000 m2 and test data for each lot of material shall
                      accompany shipments.

            1         Geogrid Reinforcement

                      The geogrid shall be made from high molecular weight and
                      high tenacity polyester (PET) yarn or high-density
                      polyethylene (HDPE). Materials should be confirming to BIS,
                      ISO 9002, BBA or FHWA. The PET geogrids should satisfy
                      the following electrochemical conditions:

                            Minimum molecular weight no.           > 25000
                            Maximum carboxyl end group no. (CEG)   < 30
                            Minimum mass per unit area (ASTM D 5261) > 250 g/
                      sqm

                      Polyester geogrids shall be quoted with a protective PVC
                      coating to maximize the resistance to hydrolysis and enhance
                      durability during construction and in service.

                      High-density polyethylene geogrids shall be manufactured by
                      extruded, drawn sheets and by punched and orientation
                      process in one direction so that the resulting ribs shall have a
                      high degree of molecular orientation, which is continued
                      through the integral transverse bar. It shall contain adequate
                      stabilisers to enhance stability to environmental stress
                      cracking (ESC), photo oxidation (UV exposure) and thermal
                      oxidation. Materials should be confirming to ISO 9002, BBA,
                      and FHWA etc. HDPE geogrids must possess 100% junction
                      efficiency of QC strength (in accordance to GR1-GG2-87 test
                      requirements) between longitudinal ribs and transverse bars
                      for efficient load transfer mechanism. Minimum mass per unit
                      area (ASTM D 5261) of HDPE geogrids shall be 500 gsm.
                      The roll width shall be minimum 5m.

            2         Partial Factors

                      Partial factors as specified in BS 8006: 1995 shall be used to
                      calculate the long term design strength of geosynthetic
                      materials of any type proposed to be used as reinforcement.
                       Minimum partial FOS for             HDPE           PET Based
                       calculation of 100 years long       based          Geogrids
                       term design strength (LTDS) in      Geogrids
                       accordance with BS 8006:1995
                       requirement
                       1. Partial FOS for creep              2.6 – 5.0      1.6 – 2.5
                            deformation (Tu/Tcs)
                                        327
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                       2.   Partial FOS for variations in
                                                              1.0 (use      1.00 (use
                            manufacture from control
                                                            only MARV)     only MARV)
                            specimens (fm 11)
                       3.   Partial FOS for extrapolation     1.10 (10        1.10 (10
                            of creep test data (fm 12)      years creep     years creep
                                                            test results    test results
                                                              at 40°C)        at 40°C)
                       4.   Partial FOS for construction/
                            installation damage
                                                                1.18           1.22
                            (susceptibility to damage)
                            (fm 21)
                       5.   Partial FOS for potential
                            chemical (at 40°C) and
                                                                1.10           1.15
                            biological degradation
                            (environment) (fm 22)

                      In all cases, the long term design strength (LTDS) shall be
                      calculated by using the values of material partial factor of
                      safety based on 100 years service design life. All partial
                      factors for any type of geosynthetic material proposed in the
                      reinforced soil/ earth systems shall be provided by the
                      manufacturer and these shall be certified by a competent
                      independent certifying agency such as British Board of
                      Agreement (BBA). The specialist agency supplying geogrids
                      shall provide such certificate, before approval for the material
                      is accorded by the Engineer.

                      In the absence of values of partial factors as per BS
                      8006-1995, as specified above, the minimum partial factors
                      as given in table shall be used in the design, as default
                      values.

            5                   FACIA UNITS

                      The fascia units, which help maintain a vertical face of the
                      reinforced soil/ earth structure, control erosion of the fill and
                      provide aesthetic appearance to the reinforced soil/ earth
                      structure, shall be of the pre-cast reinforced concrete
                      slabs/panels or pre-cast cement concrete blocks or any other
                      proprietary material that may be approved by the engineer
                      and/ or as indicated in the drawings. The type and shape of
                      the facia units to be finally adopted shall be subject to
                      approval by the Engineer.

            1         Pre-cast Reinforced Concrete Panels/ Slabs

                      The pre-cast concrete facing units will be a discrete panel
                      having maximum longitudinal, transversal and rotational
                      flexibility to cater high static and dynamic loads, and ground
                      movements.

                      Pre-cast concrete facing elements shall conform to the details
                      and dimensions shown on the approved drawing. Concrete
                      shall be of grade shown on the drawings and shall conform to
                                        328
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      the requirements as specified in section 1700 “Structural
                      Concrete” of MORT&H Specifications.

                      The nominal thickness of the panel shall be 18 cm including
                      facing textures and design. The grade of concrete shall be
                      minimum M-35.

                      Reinforcement in panels shall be designed for the
                      connections with soil reinforcing structural elements and shall
                      be placed as shown on the drawing and shall conform to the
                      requirements specified in Section 1600 of the MORT&H
                      Specifications.

            1         Casting

                      The elements shall be cast on a flat area. Tie-strips
                      connecting pins, PVC pipes and lifting anchors shall be set in
                      plate to the dimensions and tolerances shown on the drawing
                      and reinforcing elements guides shall be set on the rear face,
                      prior to casting. The concrete in each unit shall be placed
                      without interruption and shall be compacted by the use of an
                      approved vibrator supplemented by such hand-tamping as
                      may be necessary to ensure that the concrete reaches into
                      the corners of the forms and prevent formation of stone
                      pockets or cleavage plans. Clear form oil of the same
                      manufacturer shall be used throughout the casting
                      operations.

            2         Curing

                      The precast elements shall be cured for a sufficient length of
                      time as approved by Engineer so that the concrete develops
                      the required compressive strength. Only fresh potable water
                      shall be used for curing.

            3         Removal of Forms

                      The forms shall remain in place until they can be removed
                      without damaging the elements. The scheme of removal of
                      formwork shall be as per relevant MORT&H Secifications.

            4         Scribing

                      The date of manufacture, batch number and panel
                      designation shall be clearly scribed on the rear face of each
                      unit.

            5         Concrete Finish

                      The front (exposed) face of the elements shall have the finish
                      approved by the Engineer and painted with cement based
                      waterproof paint or as decided by the Engineer. The rear face
                      shall have the finish of unformed surface and shall be roughly
                      screened to eliminate open pockets of aggregates.
                                        329
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




            6         Tolerances

                      All elements shall be manufactured within the following
                      tolerances:
                      - All dimensions within: ± 5mm
                      - Evenness of the front face: 5 mm over 1500mm
                      - Difference between lengths of two diagonals: maximum
                      5mm.
                      - Thickness: 2 mm

             7        Handling Storage and Transporting

                      All elements shall be handled, stored and transported in such
                      manner as to eliminate the danger of chipping, cracks,
                      fracture and excessive bending stresses. Elements in storage
                      shall be supported on firm blocks to be located adjacent to
                      the reinforcing elements to avoid bending.

             8        Acceptability

                      Acceptability of the precast elements shall be determined on
                      the basis of compression tests, as per MORT&H
                      Specifications.

             9        Rejection

                      Elements shall be subject to rejection in case of failure to
                      meet any of the requirements specified above. In addition,
                      defects, which indicate imperfect molding, or defects
                      indicating honeycombed or open textured concrete, shall be
                      sufficient cause for rejection.

             10       Pre-cast Cement Concrete Blocks

                      The facia material of geosynthetic reinforced soil retaining
                      wall shall be modular concrete block units, as alternate to
                      discrete slab/ panel facing.
                      Pre-cast Cement Concrete blocks shall conform to the details
                      and dimensions shown on the approved drawings. In case of
                      hollow blocks, the outer side of the block have a minimum
                      thickness of 95mm and inner side 50mm. The hollow area
                      shall not exceed 40% of the cross sectional area
                      (perpendicular to the wall) of the block. The grade of
                      Concrete shall be minimum M-35 as per IRC guidelines and
                      the minimum depth (perpendicular to wall) of these units shall
                      be 300mm.
             1        Casting

                      Modular concrete facing units will be manufactured by dry
                      casting process by block making machine to ensure
                                       330
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      consistent quality of concrete, dimensional tolerance, good
                      finish and aesthetic appearance.



             2        Curing

                      The pre-cast blocks shall be cured for a sufficient length of
                      time as approved by Engineer so that the concrete develops
                      the required compressive strength. Only fresh potable water
                      shall be used for curing. Steam curing is desirable.

             3        Scribing

                      The date of manufacture and batch number shall be clearly
                      scribed on the rear face of each unit.

             4        Concrete Finish

                      All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects
                      that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit or
                      significantly impair the strength of permanence of the
                      construction. Any block units with cracks or chips observed
                      during construction shall be rejected from use.

             5                 Tolerance

                      Modular concrete block units dimension shall not differ more
                      than 2.5mm except height, which shall not differ more than
                         1.5mm.
                      Modular concrete block units shall match the colour, surface
                      finish and dimension for height, width, depth and batter
                      between 1.50 to 50 to vertical.

             6                 Handling, Storage and Transporting

                      All elements shall be handled, stored and transported in such
                      manner as to eliminate the danger of chipping, cracks,
                      fracture and excessive breaking stresses. Elements in
                      storage shall be supported on firm blocking.

             7                 Acceptability

                      Acceptability of the pre-cast element shall be determined on
                      the basis of compression tests, as per MORT&H
                      Specifications.

             6                                        Drainage

                      The drainage provision shall be strictly followed as per the
                      approved working drawing and Technical Specification
                      Clause 305. Drainage outlets at the bottom level joints of
                      panels with provision of non-woven geotextile as per
                      IRC-SP-59 and backing shall be provided as per approved
                                        331
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      design and drawing along the fascia for drainage redundancy.
                      The retained fill shall have the drainage way, 600 mm wide
                      with well – graded crushed aggregate (materials of 19.5mm
                      to 9.1mm size as per IS: 383) to allow free drainage of the
                      reinforced fill along with the retained fill. The panel joints
                      above 300 mm of existing ground level shall be filled with joint
                      filler as per clause 7.5 of these specifications.

             7.       Construction Requirements

                      The construction of Reinforced Soil/ Earth Structures shall be
                      carried out in accordance with the specifications and in
                      conformity with the lines, grades, design and dimensions
                      shown on the approved drawings.

             1        Excavation

                      The Plan area of the of Reinforced Soil/ Earth Structures shall
                      be excavated in accordance with the requirements of General
                      and Special Specifications and in reasonably close conformity
                      to the limits and to the lines and grades during construction
                      stages as shown on the approved drawings. The contractor
                      shall take precautions to minimise over- excavation.
                      Excavation support, if required shall be designed by the
                      Contractor.

              2       Foundation Preparation

                      The foundation for Reinforced Soil/ Earth Structures shall be
                      graded level for width equal to or exceeding the length of
                      reinforcing geosynthetics. Prior to wall construction, if
                      required by the Engineer, the foundation shall be compacted
                      with a smooth wheeled roller. The depth of foundation below
                      the finished ground level shall not be less than as specified in
                      BS 8006-1995 or 600mm, whichever is greater.

             1        Ground Improvement

                      Where foundation soil is found to be unsuitable, either
                      removal and replacement technique or ground improvement
                      is required to be carried out, as required by the Engineer. The
                      need for ground improvement, design and ground
                      improvement methodology shall be verified and approved by
                      the Engineer prior to construction.

                      Suitable ground improvement technique shall be identified
                      based on the results of subsoil exploration. Foundation
                      preparatory works and foundation treatment/ improvement
                      shall be treated as integral part of the reinforced soil structure
                      and accordingly Contractor shall arrange for detailed sub-soil
                      investigation works and employ his resources to design and
                      construct the foundation/ ground improvement treatment,
                      wherever necessary to satisfy the requirements of reinforced
                      soil structure. The design check and validation for foundation
                                        332
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      treatment/ ground improvement and the methodology shall be
                      verified and approved by the Engineer prior to construction.




             7.3      Leveling Concrete

                      A leveling concrete pad shall be provided under the walls and
                      seat beams (for – bridge abutments). Concrete shall have a
                      minimum grade M-15 (150 kg/cm2). Maximum size of
                      aggregates shall be 20mm and the pad shall be cured for at
                      least 48 hours before placement of panels.

                      In case of facia panel, the foundation may be made trough
                      shaped, so that the first panel is placed in the trough. After
                      placing the panels, the gap in the trough, may be filled with
                      mixture of sand and bitumen.

             1        Batter

                      The reinforced earth/ soil wall face may be provided with an
                      initial inward batter specified by the system supplier or as
                      given in the drawings. Initial inward batter is required to
                      counter the outerward tilt that will occur as the wall height is
                      built up and also due to construction process. As a guideline
                      the initial batter is generally in the range of 40 to 60.

             4        Erection

             7.4.1    All reinforcements shall be installed at the proper elevation
                      and orientation as shown in the wall details of approved
                      drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The reinforcement
                      strips shall be placed normal to the face of the wall unless
                      otherwise shown on the drawings.

             2       Pre-cast Concrete Facia Panels/ Slabs

                      Pre-cast concrete slabs/ panels shall be placed vertically with
                      the aid of a light crane. For erection, panels are handled by
                      means of lifting devices set into the upper edge of the panels.
                      Panels shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts in the
                      sequence shown on the drawings as backfill placement
                      proceeds. As fill materials is placed behind a panel, the
                      panels shall be maintained in vertical positions by means of
                      temporary wooden wedges placed in the joint at the junction
                      of the two adjacent top rows of panels during construction. As
                      construction proceeds, and a fourth row is erected, the lowest
                      row of wedges can be removed and so on.

                      External bracing may also be needed for the initial lift.
                      However, bracings shall be placed in an area not more than
                      1.5m wide beyond the outer face of panels.

                                        333
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      Vertical tolerances (plumbness) and horizontal alignment
                      tolerance shall not exceed 25mm when measured along a 3
                      m straight edge. The maximum allowable offset in any panel
                      joint shall be 25mm.



             3        Cement Concrete Hollow Block units

                      These units will be dry stacked (without mortar) one over the
                      other in a running bond configuration, vertically. Adjacent
                      units shall be connected by dowels, shear keys or shear pins
                      to ensure positive connection with the reinforcing
                      geosynthetic.

                      Tongue and groove type connections are not acceptable.
                      Hollow area in the blocks shall be filled with aggregate of 10
                      to 18mm nominal size during constructions.

                      Dowels or pins used by the retaining wall supplier to
                      interconnect block units shall consist of a non-degrading
                      polymer or galvanized steel and be made for the use with the
                      block unit supplied.

                      All materials shall be installed at the proper elevation and
                      orientation as shown in the wall details on the construction
                      plans or as directed by the Engineer. The drawings shall
                      govern in any conflict between the two requirements.

                      Broken chipped, stained or otherwise damaged units shall not
                      be placed in the wall unless they are repaired and the repair
                      method and results are approved by the Engineer.

                      The spacing between primary reinforcing geosynthetic shall
                      not be more than 600mm or two block units, whichever is
                      greater.

                      Overlap of the geogrid in the design strength direction shall
                      not be permitted. The design strength direction is that length
                      of geogrid reinforcement perpendicular to the wall face and
                      shall consist of one continuous piece of material. Adjacent
                      sections of geogrid shall be placed in a manner to assure that
                      the horizontal coverage shown on the plans is provided.

                      Geogrid reinforcement should be installed under tension. A
                      nominal tension shall be applied to the reinforcement and
                      maintained by staples, stakes or hand tensioning until the
                      reinforcement has been covered by at least 200mm of soil fill.

             7.5      Joint Fillers

                      Fillers of vertical joints between panels shall be flexible open /
                      close cell polyurethane foam strips or non-woven fabric strips
                      (the latter used as joint cover instead of filter) as approved by

                                        334
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      Engineer. Bearing pads for horizontal joints between panels
                      shall be made of elastomer with vulcanised EPDM.

             7.6      Reinforced Earth Backfill Placement

                      The reinforcing elements shall be laid free from all kinks,
                      damage and displacement during deposition, spreading,
                      leveling and compaction of the fill. The programme of filling
                      shall be such that no construction plant runs directly on the
                      reinforcement. It shall be ensured that the exposure of soil
                      reinforcement to ultraviolet rays is minimal and should be
                      covered with earth within one day of placement.

                      All construction plant having a mass exceeding 1000 kg shall
                      be kept at least 1.5m away from the face of slope or wall. In
                      this area (upto 1.5m from the face of slope or wall), the
                      following compaction plant shall be used.

                      i)       Vibratory roller having a weight per meter width of roll
                               not exceeding 1300 kg with total weight not exceeding
                               1000 kg.
                      ii)      Vibratory plate compactor of maximum weight 1000 kg.
                      iii)     Vibro tamper having a weight not exceeding 75 kg.

                      During construction of reinforced backfill, the retained
                      material beyond the reinforcement at the rear of the structure
                      shall be maintained at the same level as reinforced fill. The
                      entire works related to compaction should be carried out
                      generally in a direction parallel to the facing. Fill placement
                      methods near the facing shall ensure that no voids exist
                      below the reinforcing elements.

                      Temporary formwork shall be used to support the
                      construction as per specified details given in the drawing. The
                      forms, scaffolding and props shall be sufficient in numbers to
                      allow taking up of a sectoral construction schedule as
                      specified in the design.

                      At the end of each day’s operations, the contractor shall
                      shape the last level of backfill as to permit run-off rainwater
                      away from the wall face.

             7               Drainage Fill Placement

                      Drainage fill shall be placed to the minimum finished
                      thickness and widths shown on the construction plans or as
                      modified by the Engineer. During placement and compaction
                      of drainage material, care must be taken to ensure that there
                      is no contamination with undesirable materials. Vertical layers
                      of drainage layer material shall be brought up at the same
                      rate as the adjoining fill material.

                      Drainage collection pipes shall be installed to maintain gravity
                      flow of water outside of the reinforced soil zone. The drainage

                                          335
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      collection pipe should discharge into a storm sewer, manhole
                      or along a slope at an elevation lower than the lowest point of
                      the pipe within the aggregate drain.

                      The main collection drainpipe just behind the precast facing, if
                      used, shall be a minimum of 150mm in diameter. The
                      secondary collection drain pipes should be sloped a minimum
                      of two percent to provide gravity flow into the main collection
                      drainpipe. Drainage laterals shall be spaced at a maximum 15
                      meters spacing along the wall face. The drainage collection
                      pipe shall be a perforated or slotted, PVC or corrugated
                      HDPE pipe. The pipe and drainage aggregate shall be
                      wrapped with a geotextile that will function as a filter.

                      More efficient drainage system, if possible, may be suggested
                      by the proprietary Supplier/ Contractor for the review and
                      approval of Engineer.

             8        Cap Block Placement

                      The cap block and or top concrete block unit shall be bonded
                      to the modular concrete block units below using cap
                      adhesive.

             8.0      Design, Working Drawing, Detailing and Supervision

                      The scope of work will also cover the supply of detailed
                      design, engineering submission of working drawings by the
                      specialized agency for reinforced soil/ earth works. The
                      designs and drawings shall be got approved from the
                      Engineer and/or its representative before execution of work.

             9.0      Inspection

                      Engineer and/or the representative shall verify the materials
                      supplied by the contractor to ensure that all the requirements
                      of the specifications are satisfactorily met with. This includes
                      all submittals and proper installation of the system.

                      The reinforced soil/ earth structure system supplier shall
                      provide one qualified and experienced representative at site
                      on full time basis during the entire working phase to ensure
                      that the quality of the works performed by the Contractor is in
                      accordance with the specifications and to assist the
                      Contractor regarding proper wall installation.

                      The Contractor’s field construction supervisor shall have
                      demonstrated experience and should be qualified to direct all
                      work at the site. All expenses relating to this presence on site
                      shall be deemed to have been included in the rate and no
                      extra claim on this account shall be admissible.

             10.      Testing of Materials


                                        336
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      Testing shall be done as stated elsewhere in this specification
                      on all materials required for reinforced soil/ earth structure
                      construction. The tests shall be done from a reputed
                      independent agency as approved by Engineer as and when
                      required. Tests on materials and during construction shall not
                      be limited to the following types.

                      i)        Testing of soils for evaluating their index and
                                engineering properties. Soil report may be consulted
                                with regard to this requirement.

                      ii)       Testing of friction angle between the reinforcement and
                                soil using direct shear test.

                      iii)      Testing of Reinforcements

                             (a) For design of reinforced soil/ earth structure, tensile
                                 strength, yield stress, elongation and modulus of
                                 elasticity of the reinforcement material are required.
                                 Both these properties for the steel reinforcement can
                                 be obtained from standard tensile test.

                             (b) For connection strength between geogrid /metallic
                                 reinforcement and facing where connection strength
                                 should have appropriate factor of safety against the
                                 connection load calculated as per BS 8006: 1995.

                             (c) The geosynthetic properties can be determined using
                                 standards as summarized below:

                   Tensile        ASTM 1682,       A 50mm x 300mm sample clamped to
                   strength       1975             give a gauge length of 200mm and
                   test           BS 2576          stretched at constant rate of 200mm per
                                  IS 1969-1985     minute till breakage. Breaking load and
                                                   extension at breakage are recorded.
                   Grab           ASTM 1682,       200mm wide sample with gauge length
                   tensile        1975             of 100mm is tensioned at constant rate
                   test                            until failure.
                   Wide           ASTM D-4596      A sample of 200mm or 500mmx200mm
                   width                           clamped across width to give a gauge
                   tensile                         length of 100mm, which is tensioned at
                   test                            200mm per minute breaking load and
                                                   extension at breakage recorded.
                   Tear           ASTMD            Fabric’s resistance to propagating a
                   Tests          4533-85          tear is given by this test.

                   Muller’s       ASTMD            Burst resistance is the resistance of the
                   Burst test     3786-77 & BS     fabric to withstand the localized
                                  4768             pressure.
                   Ball burst     ASTMD            -DO-
                   test           3787-77
                   CBR            ASTM STP         -DO-
                   push           952 P.57-68

                                            337
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                    through
                    test

                        Note: Although some of the above tests are applicable to
                       geo-textiles, the use of geo-textiles is envisaged as only
                       filter fabric.

             11.      Measurement for Payments

             11.1     The measurement for Reinforced Earth Structures, Reinforced
                      soil, Mechanically Stabilized Earth or similar soil reinforcing
                      system of Reinforced Soil Retaining wall shall be measured as
                      follows:

                       a)      Measurement for facia material (Panel or Blocks) shall
                       be in vertical Sq. meters. This shall       be measured on
                       each face of the ramp and closing wall from top of the
                       levelling concrete to bottom of the crash barrier.
                       b)      Measurement of backfill placement and compacting for
                       the reinforced soil/ earth wall shall be in cubic meters for
                       compacted soil. This shall be measured separately by taking
                       cross sections at intervals in the original position before the
                       work starts and after its completion.

             11.2      The payment for excavation, foundation concrete, reinforcing
                       element, fasteners, filter media, drainage layer, drainpipe,
                       coping beam and other accessories shall not be measured
                       separately. It is deemed to have been included in the facia
                       material rates for the project.

             11.3      The measurement for crash barrier and friction slab at
                       reinforced   soil/   earth  structure   location   including
                       reinforcement shall be measured in running meter in relevant
                       item of BoQ.

             12.       Rate

             12.1      The overall rate for reinforced earth shall include detailed
                       engineering including designs, drawings, all specified quality
                       control tests, approval from Engineer, furnishing, fabricating
                       and providing all materials for the walls including fascia
                       panels, reinforcing elements and all its accessories,
                       excavation and foundation construction; setting out and
                       erection of wall materials including fascia panels with all joint
                       fillers/ materials, reinforcement etc., supplying and placing of
                       drainage works, filter medium and filter fabric, foundation pad
                       including any supplementary arrangement to receive the first
                       panel and capping beam, any foundation treatment/ ground
                       improvement as deemed necessary and approved by the
                       Engineer etc. Cost involved for any field investigation and
                       sub-soil exploration as directed by the Engineer to determine
                       the extent of ground improvement shall be borne by the
                       Contractor. The rate shall include the cost of labour, plant/


                                         338
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      machinery, material storage and handling expenses, as
                      required for all the above activities for completing the works.
                      The rate shall also cover the cost of all materials, castings,
                      curing, and quality control tests, stacking, transporting and
                      placing of facia. Cost of joints, all necessary temporary
                      formwork, scaffolding and all lifts and leads complete as per
                      approved design/ drawing of the specialised firm shall also be
                      included.

                      The rate shall also include material cost, all transportation
                      costs and storage of the same as per special provisions for
                      reinforcement element. The rate shall also include cost of
                      quality control tests, laying of the reinforcing elements
                      including all overlaps, jointing or stitching, heat bonding or
                      extension and jointing them with reinforcing elements of
                      concrete discrete panels along with all accessories.

                      The rate also shall include all items of excavation, concrete,
                      reinforcing steel, formwork, curing etc for foundation and
                      capping beam.

                      The rate shall also cover providing, placing and compacting
                      drainage aggregate, filter medium including drainage
                      collection pipe, filter fabric and conducting quality control tests
                      etc for drainage.

                      The rate shall also include patentee charges (if any) and
                      supervision by the specialised supplier (manufacturer /
                      agency).

             2        The rate for soil fill shall include selection, supply, placing,
                      compaction, and quality control tests etc. for approved earth
                      fill. The rate shall also include the cost of labour, plant/
                      machinery, transportation for all leads and lifts etc. as
                      required for the completion of the works, dressing and
                      levelling of slopes, including special measures for edge
                      reinforcement in accordance with the drawings.

             3        The rate for crash barrier and friction slab shall include the
                      cost of all materials, labour, plant/ machinery, transportation
                      for all leads and lifts etc. as required for completing the work.
 CLAUSE A-7             REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS (ROAD STUDS)

                     1 GENERAL

                        Reflective pavement marker (RPM) or road stud is a device
                        which is bonded to or anchored within the road surface for
                        lane marking and delineation for night-time visibility. It
                        reflects incident light in directions close to the directions
                        from which it came

                     2 DEFINITION

                   2.1 DESCRIPTION          OF     TERMS      SPECIFIC       TO     THIS

                                         339
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        STANDARD

                 2.1.1 Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL) or specific intensity –
                       the ratio of luminous intensity of the retro-reflector in the
                       direction of observation to illuminace at the retro-reflector on
                       a place perpendicular to the direction of the incident light
                       expressed in terms of millicandelas per incident lux (mcd/lx).

                 2.1.2 Horizontal entrance angle – the angle in the horizontal plane
                       between the direction of incident light and the normal to the
                       leading edge of the marker.

                 2.1.3 Observation angle – the angle at the reflector between the
                       illumination axis and observation axis.

                 2.1.4 Retro-reflection – reflection in which the radiation is returned
                       in direction close to the directions from which it came. This
                       property being maintained over wide variations of the
                       directions of incident radiation.

                 2.1.5 Head – that part of a road stud which is above the road
                       surface when the road stud is fixed in position in the road.

                 2.1.6 Upper surface – that part of the external surface of road
                       stud which is visible when the road stud is fixed in position
                       in the road.

                 2.1.7 Anchorage – that part of a road stud which is below the road
                       surface when the road stud is fixed in position in the road.

                     3 MATERIAL

                   3.1 Plastic body of RPM / road stud shall be moulded from ASA
                       (Acrylic Strene Acrylonitrite) or HIPS (Hi-impact
                       Polystyrene) or ABS or any other suitable material approved
                       by the Engineer-in-Charge. The markers shall support a
                       load of 13635 kg tested in accordance with ASTM D4280.

                   3.2 Reflective panels shall consist of number of lenses
                       containing single or dual prismatic cubes capable of
                       providing total internal reflection of the light entering the lens
                       face. Lenses shall be moulded of methyl methecrylate
                       conforming to ASTMD 788 or equivalent.

                     4 DESIGN

                   4.1 The slope or retro-reflecting surface shall preferably be 35 +
                       5 degree to base.

                   4.2 The area of each retro-reflecting surface shall not be less
                       than 13.0 sqcm.

                   5.0 Optical Performance


                                         340
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                  5.1. Unidirectional and bi-directional studs

                 5.1.1 Each reflector or combination of reflectors on each face of
                       the stud shall have a C.I.L. not less than that given in Table
                       1.

              Table 1- Minimum C.I.L. Values for category ‘ A’ Studs

                               Observation                   C.I.L. in mcd/1x
        Entrance angle
                                 angle              White             Amber             Red
          00U 50 L&R
                                    0.30             220              110               44

         00U 100 L&R
                                    0.50             120               60               24


Note: The entrance angle of 00U corresponds to the normal aspect of the reflectors
      when the reflecting road stud is installed in horizontal road surface.

                 5.1.2 A stud or pavement marker that incorporates one or more
                       corner cube reflectors shall be considered to be included in
                       category ‘A’. A stud that incorporates one more bi-convex
                       reflectors shall be considered to be included in category ‘B’.

                 5.1.3 OMNI-DIRECTIONAL STUDS

                         Each omni-directional stud shall have a minimum C.I.L. of
                         not less than 2 mcd/1x.



                  5.2    TESTS

                 5.2.1 Coefficient of luminance intensity can be measured by
                       procedure described in ASTM E 809 “Practice for Measuring
                       Photometric Characteristics” or as recommended in BS :
                       873 – Part 4: 1973.

                 5.2.2 Under test conditions, a stud shall not be considered to fail
                       the photometric requirements if the measured C.I.L. at any
                       one position of measurement is less than the values
                       specified in Table 1 provided that

                         (i)  the value is not less than 80% of the specified
                              minimum, and
                         (ii) average of the left and right measurements for the
                              specific angle is greater than the specified minimum.

                    6. FIXING OF REFLECTIVE MARKERS

                   6.1 Requirements

                 6.1.1 The enveloping profile of the head of the stud shall be

                                           341
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        smooth and the studs shall not present any sharp edges to
                        traffic.

                 6.1.2 The reflecting portions of the studs shall be free from
                       crevice or ledges where dirt might accumulate.

                 6.1.3 All road studs shall be legibly marked with the name,
                       trademark or other means of identification of the
                       manufacturer.

                 6.1.4 Marker height shall not exceed 20 mm.

                 6.1.5 Marker width shall not exceed 130 mm.

                 6.1.6 The base of the marker shall be flat within 1.3 mm. If the
                       bottom of the marker is configurated, the outermost faces of
                       the configurations shall not deviate more than 1.3 mm from
                       a flat surface.

                   6.2 Placement

                    1. The reflective marker shall be fixed to the road surface
                       using the adhesives and the procedure recommended by
                       the manufacturer. No nails shall be used to affix the marker
                       as nails are hazardous for the roads.

                    2. Regardless of the type of adhesive used, the markers shall
                       not be fixed if the pavement is not surface dry and on new
                       asphalt concrete surfacing until the surfacing has been
                       opened to traffic for a period of not less than 14 hours.

                    3. The portions of the highway surface, to which the marker is
                       to be bonded by the adhesive, shall be free of dirt, curing
                       compound, grease, oil, moisture, loose or unsound layers,
                       paint and any other material which would adversely affect
                       the bond of the adhesive.

                    4. Use a wire brush, if necessary to loosen and remove dirt,
                       then brush or blow clean.

                    5. The adhesive shall be placed uniformly on the cleaned
                       pavement surface or on the bottom of the marker in a
                       quantity sufficient to result in complete coverage of the area
                       of contact of the market with no voids present and with a
                       slight excess after the market has been lightly pressed in
                       place.

                    6. For epoxy installations, excess adhesive around the edge of
                       the marker, excess adhesive on the pavement and adhesive
                       on the exposed surfaces of the markers shall be
                       immediately removed. Soft rags moistened with mineral
                       spirits or kerosene may be used, if necessary to remove
                       adhesive from exposed faces of pavement markers.

                                       342
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                    7. Warranty and durability

                        The contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a
                        two-year warranty for satisfactory field performance
                        including stipulated retro-reflectance of the reflecting panel
                        and submit the same to the Engineer. In addition, a
                        two-year warranty for satisfactory infield performance of the
                        finished road marker shall also be given by the contractor
                        who carries out the work of fixing of reflective road markers.
                         In case the markers are displaced, damaged, get worn out
                        or lose their reflectivity compared to stipulated standards,
                        the contractor would be required to replace all such markers
                        within 15 days of the intimation from the Engineer at his own
                        cost and with no extra cost to be paid for such works.

                    8. Measurement for Payment

                        The measurement of reflective road markers shall be in
                        numbers of different types of markers supplied and fixed.



                    9. Rate

                        The contract unit rate for reflective road markers shall be
                        payment in full compensation for furnishing all labour,
                        material, tools, equipment including incidental costs
                        necessary for carrying out the work at site conforming to the
                        specifications complete as per approved drawings or as
                        directed by the Engineer.

 CLAUSE A-8           RUMBLE STRIPS

                  1. Scope

                      The scope of work involves provision of 15 numbers of
                      rumble strips across minor roads meeting the Outer Ring
                      Road with DBM material and providing thermoplastic
                      markings on either side of the rumble strips as shown in the
                      drawing and as directed by Engineer.

                  2. Unit of measurement

                     The unit of measurement is per linear meter of the road
                     across which speed breaker and markings are provided.
                  3. Rate

                      The unit rate for includes full compensation for providing
                      speed breaker and providing thermoplastic pavement
                      markings as shown in the drawings and as directed by
                      Engineer.


                                       343
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 CLAUSE A-9           SPEED BREAKERS

                  1. Scope

                      The scope of work involves provision of speed breaker
                      across minor roads meeting the Outer Ring Road with DBM
                      material and providing thermoplastic markings on either side
                      of the speed breaker as shown in the drawing and as
                      directed by Engineer.

                  2. Unit of measurement

                      The unit of measurement is per linear meter of the road
                      across which speed breaker and markings are provided.

                  3. Rate

                      The unit rate for includes full compensation for laying, to the
                      required shape and compacting speed breaker as shown in
                      the drawings and as directed by Engineer and providing
                      thermoplastic pavement markings on either end.


 CLAUSE A-10           CHUTE DRAIN FOR HIGH EMBANKMENT SECTIONS

                  1. SCOPE

                      This work shall consist of construction of chute drain on the
                      slope of the road embankment including erosion protection
                      works at the locations and to dimensions shown on the
                      Drawings or as directed by Engineer. Schedule of works
                      shall be so arranged that the drains are completed in proper
                      sequence with roadway to ensure that no damage is caused
                      due to lack of drainage.

                  2. MATERIALS

                      The drains shall be of half round pipe of 300mm dia. formed
                      by joining half RCC pipe of NP2 type as shown in the
                      drawings. The RCC work shall conform to the relevant
                      clauses of these specifications.

                      The toe wall below ground level shall be of Plain cement
                      concrete of M15 grade conforming to clause 1700, as
                      shown in the drawings.

                      Dumped riprap for erosion protection at ground level, it shall
                      be constructed as shown in the drawing with hard,
                      unweathered and durable rubble stone of size 150 to 250
                      mm.

                  3. CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS


                                        344
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      At the locations where the chute drains are to be installed, a
                      rectangular cut on the side slope of the embankment along
                      the line of the chute drain shall be made. The Concrete bed
                      with PCC M15 shall be laid with semi circle in the middle.
                      The laying & jointing of pipe shall be done with Cement
                      Mortar 1:3, when concrete in bed is still green. The sloping
                      bed of the drain shall be to a regular line and suitably
                      compacted to provide a firm bed.

                      The water collection arrangement shall be constructed with
                      cement concrete of grades as shown in drawings at
                      shoulder edge between two chutes for guiding the surface
                      water into the chute.

                      The Toe wall shall be constructed with PCC M15 as shown
                      in drawings. The Rip-Rap/ Stone pitching 300mm thick shall
                      be constructed upto 1m. on either sides of the drain and at
                      ground level as shown in the drawings.

                  4. Measurements for Payment
                     The Chute drain shall be measured and paid in running
                     metre. The contract unit rates specified for chute drain shall
                     be inclusive of all leads and lifts for excavations, concreting
                     of pipe bed, placing and jointing of pipes with cement
                     Mortar, Construction of PCC toe wall, rip-rap/stone pitching
                     for erosion protection and drainage arrangement between
                     two chutes at shoulder edge, etc. for completing the chute
                     construction.

 CLAUSE A-11         GRATING ACROSS DRAIN

                  1 Scope
                    The scope of work includes provision of mild steel gratings
                    across drain provided near petrol pumps, service stations and
                    other locations as directed by Engineer.

                     The material used for grating and welding procedure should
                     conform to Clause 1900 and the dimensions of the steel flats
                     used in the gratings should conform to the drawings or as
                     directed by Engineer. Suitable anti theft mechanism as
                     approved by Engineer has to be provided for the gratings.

                  2 Unit of measurement

                     The unit of measurement shall be area of the finished grating
                     measured in Sq. m.

                  3 Rate

                     The unit of payment shall be full compensation for the cost of
                     material, fabrication, welding, and transportation to site and
                     installation including the cost of anti theft mechanism.


                                       345
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

 CLAUSE A-12         TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT     AND                SAFETY       DURING
                     CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS

 CLAUSE A-12.1       TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT AND SAFETY

                     Any construction activity on the project will pose a hazardous
                     situation to the road users. For least disturbance to safe
                     passage of public traffic appropriate traffic management and
                     safety measures should be adopted throughout the
                     construction period. In this regard, the construction zone in
                     which conflict from safety angle may arise between the road
                     users on one hand and the construction activities on the other
                     shall be divided into 4 sub zones, and safety measures as
                     appropriate for each sub-zone shall be ensured. The
                     sub-zones and the safety measures to be adopted therefore
                     shall be as described hereunder:

                 a. Advance Warning Zone

                     This warning sub-zone is meant to inform, alert and prepare
                     the approaching driver well in advance by providing information
                     regarding the distance and extent/type of hazard ahead so that
                     he is able to reduce the speed and be in readiness to carry out
                     the necessary manoeuvres as he meets with the changed
                     situation. For the operating speeds on the project road, length
                     of this sub-zone shall be 100mtr. And 500m, in plain and hilly
                     terrain respectively. Information in this sub-zone will be
                     conveyed through a series of traffic signs, which will include
                     “Men at Work” and the speed reduction signs at the start and
                     middle of this sub-zone.

                 b. Transition Sub-Zone

                     This sub-zone is the area in which the traffic is steered and
                     guided into and out of the diverted path around the work
                     sub-zone. This is the most crucial subzone from safety angle
                     as vehicles have to be guided on to the diverted path, and
                     most of the movements will be of turning type. The elements
                     for designing this sub-zone are speed of the vehicles, extent of
                     lateral shift and elevation difference between the normal and
                     the diverted paths. The essential safety measures shall include
                     delineation of the travel path and prevention of wayward
                     movements of vehicles by means of barricades, channelizers,
                     red cones, red lamps during hours of darkness etc., as
                     appropriate.

                     In the design of this sub-zone adequate attention shall be paid
                     for providing necessary turning radius of the curves, grade to
                     permit for safe passage of animal driven vehicles, drainage
                     and dust-proofing. Where necessary traffic control shall be
                     effected through manual flagging and by battery operated
                     traffic lights during hours of darkness. Where vehicles have to
                     wait, the waiting area shall be demarcated by stop lines.
                     Length of the sub-zone will generally be between 50 and
                                       346
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     100m.

                 c. Work Sub-Zone

                     This is the area where construction activity takes place, and
                     the main concern relates to safety of workers as also
                     prevention of public traffic from entering the work area. In this
                     sub-zone, path of traffic shall be clearly delineated to avoid
                     intrusion of public traffic moving on to the work area or
                     construction equipment moving on to the public traffic. It shall
                     be ensured that adequate distance is available between 2
                     consecutive work zones          (2 km. on urban section and 5-10
                     km. in rural sections) so that vehicles get sufficient breather
                     space for overtaking slow vehicles, lane adjustment etc. Traffic
                     across this sub-zone shall be guided through with the help of
                     various traffic control devices, such as signs, delineation of
                     travel path by cones/drums, barricades, luminous tapes etc. as
                     appropriate.

                 d. Termination Sub-zones

                     The sub-zone is intended to inform the road users of the end
                     of the construction zone. This shall be effected through
                     suitable informatory sign boards.

 CLAUSE A-12.2       TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

                     Traffic control devices in the construction zones perform the
                     crucial task of warning, informing and alerting drivers apart
                     from guiding the vehicle movements so that the drivers of the
                     vehicles as well as the workers on site are not faced with
                     situations posing surprise/hazard, and safe passage to traffic
                     is effected.

                     The primary traffic control devices used in work sub-zones are
                     signs, delineators, barricades, cones, pylons, pavement
                     marking, flashing lights etc. They shall be such that they are
                     easily understood without any confusion, are clearly visible
                     during day and night, conform to the prevailing speeds in
                     immediate vicinity, stable against sudden adverse weather
                     conditions and are easy in installation, renewal and
                     maintenance. Broad details of the different devices are
                     hereunder:

                 a) Signs

                     The construction signs fall into 3 major categories namely,
                     regulatory signs, warning signs and guide or informatory sign
                     as defined and detailed in IRC:67-1977, Code of Practice for
                     Road Signs. These signs shall be placed on the left hand side
                     of the travel path.

                     The common Regulatory signs used in the construction zones
                     are “No Entry”, “Road Closed”, “Speed Limit” etc. These shall
                                       347
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     be used in consultation with the local police and / or
                     authorities.

                     The warning signs to alert the drivers of the possible danger
                     ahead in the construction zones are “Lane Closed”, “Diversion
                     to other carriageway”, “Divided carriageway Starts”, “Divided
                     carriageway Ends”, ‘Two way Traffic” etc. It will be advisable to
                     explain the signs with the help of a rectangular definition plate
                     of size of appropriate to the size of warning triangle and placed
                     0.15m. below, from the bottom of the triangle.

                     Guide signs in construction zones shall have different
                     background colour than the normal informatory signs of
                     IRC:67-1977, These signs shall have black messages and
                     arrows on yellow (Traffic Yellow of IS: 5-1978) background.
                     The guide signs to be commonly used are “Diversion”, “Road
                     Ahead Closed”, “Sharp Deviation of Route” etc.

                     The commonly used temporary signs during construction are
                     depicted in the Drawings. These should preferably be of
                     reflectorised type to be visible during hours of darkness.

                 b) Delineators

                     Delineators are channelising devices such as cones, traffic
                     cylinders, tapes, drums etc. which are placed in or adjacent to
                     the roadway to guide the driver along a safe path and to
                     control the flow of traffic. These shall normally be
                     retro-refelectorised  for    night    visibility. IRC:79-1981
                     (Recommended Practice for Road Delineators) gives details of
                     some of the delineators. The other types of delineators
                     commonly used are traffic cones, drums and barricades.

                 c) Traffic Cones

                     Traffic cones shall normally be 0.5m to 0.75m high and 0.3m
                     to 0.4m diameter or in square shape at the base. These shall
                     be made of plastic or rubber with retro reflectorised red and
                     white band and have suitable anchoring so that they are not
                     easily blown over or displaced. The cones shall be placed
                     close enough together (spacing 3-9m) to give an impression of
                     the continuity. Larger size cones shall be used for high speeds
                     or where more conspicuous guidance is required.

                 d) Empty Bitumen Drums

                     Empty bitumen drums can be used as channelising device
                     since they are highly visible, give the appearance of being
                     formidable objects, thereby commanding the respect of the
                     drivers. These drums can also be of plastic which are lighter,
                     easy to transport and store. As delineators, these drums shall
                     be painted in circumferential strips 0.10m to 0.15m wide,
                     alternatively in black and white colours.

                                       348
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                 e) Barricades

                     When ever the traffic has to be restricted from entering the
                     work areas such as excavations or material storage sites so
                     that harzardous locations are barred for public and protection
                     to workers is provided, or there is need for separating the two
                     way traffic, barricades shall be used. The barricades may be of
                     portable or fixed type and can be made of wooden planks,
                     metal or other suitable material. The horizontal component
                     facing the traffic shall be made of 0.30m wide wooden planks
                     joined together and painted in alternate yellow and white strips
                     of 0.15m width and sloping down at an angle of 45° in the
                     direction of traffic. Suitable support or ballasting shall be
                     provided so that they do not over turn or are not blown away in
                     strong winds. In case of fixed type barricades, a gate or
                     moveable section shall be separately provided to allow the
                     movement of the construction/supervision vehicles.

                     Sketches of typical portable and fixed barricades are provided
                     in drawings document.

                  f) Flagmen

                     In large construction sites, flagmen with flags and sign paddles
                     shall be effectively used to guide the safe movements. The
                     flags for andaling shall be 0.60m x 0.60m size, made of good
                     red cloth and securely fastened to a staff of approximately 1
                     meter in length. The sign paddles shall conform to
                     IRC:67-1977 and provided with a rigid handle. For one-way
                     operation at a time during hours of darkness, battery operated
                     red/green lights shall be used at either end of the affected
                     section.

                  g) Solar Blinkers
                    The following technical specifications shall be adopted. The
                    Number of blinkers shall be installed as per the approved
                    drawings and as directed by the Engineer.




                      Solar Module

                         High efficiency Mono/Multi-crystalline 40Wp Solar Module

                      Battery

                         Maintenance free VRLA Batteries
                         Provides 2 days autonomy

                      LAMP

                         Cluster of High intensity Ultra bright LEDs
                                        349
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         Visibility greater than 500 mts.
                         Size of the light source – 200mm/300mm diameter
                         (Typical)
                         Red or Amber Option available
                         Flashing duty cycle upto 50%

                     Electronics Regulator

                         Rating – 5A Charging 5A Load.
                         Nominal system voltage 12V DC.
                         Automatic over charge & deep discharge protection for
                         battery.
                         Discharge of battery through array during night time.

                     Aspect

                         Weather proof construction with hinged door
                         Powder coated sheet metal body

                     Pole & Structure

                         Galvanised pipe with corrosion resistant paint.
                         Designed to meet 145kmph wind load.

                     Operating temperature 0o to 50o C
                     Humidity: 95% rh ( N.C.)

                     Solar Powered Flasher – 24 Hours of single aspect &
                     double aspect.

                 h) Solar Stud

                     Supply and installation of solar studs of size 125 mm x 125 mm
                     x 90 mm or any suitable dimensions comprises of ultra bright
                     LEDs with micro controller, all electronics and reflector strip
                     housed in the cast. The stud should be unidirectional with three
                     LEDs. The system shall be water proof and withstand the
                     weight of fully loaded tuck-trailer and provide 35-40 per minute
                     with two years warranty. The system shall work in weather
                     condition in temperature range of -4oC to +55oC necessary
                     structure to be provided for mounting the stud on the road. The
                     system shall comply with the technical specification provided in
                     the contract agreement.

                         Automatic dusk to dawn operation required.
                         The stud should be of unidirectional with three LEDs.
                         Ultra bright LEDs are required to give the clear vision.
                         Colours shall be RED/ AMBER in colour as required.
                         Controller shall be of micro controller based.
                         Visibility shall be minimum 800 mtrs at test condition.
                         It Shall withstand all weather conditions with aluminium die
                         cast.
                         All electronic and LEDs shall house in the case with reflector

                                        350
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         strips in addition with to LEDs.
                         The system shall be completely waterproof.
                         It shall withstand the weight of fully loaded truck- trailer.
                         Flashing rate shall be 35 to 40 flashes per minute.
                         The working temperature shall be of – 4oC to + 55oC.
                         Each unit shall be independent unit.
                         Each stud shall have anti-twist ribs for firm grip.
                         Size shall be 125mm x 125mm x 90mm or any suitable
                         dimensions.
                         Battery voltage shall be 2 volts.
                         Solar Panel voltage shall be 2 volts.
                          Warranty two years.


 CLAUSE A-12.3          SAFETY AND MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

                        Measures for providing safe movement of traffic in some of
                        the most commonly occurring work-zones on highways shall
                        be as follows:

                    a) Detour on Temporary Diversion

                        In certain situations during the project construction period it
                        may become necessary to pass the traffic on temporary
                        diversion constructed parallel to highway.

                        A temporary diversion road shall basically satisfy the
                        following requirements

                           It shall have smooth horizontal and vertical profile for
                           easy negotiation by vehicles.

                           It shall not get overtopped by flood or drainage discharge
                           under any circumstances.

                           It shall have adequate capacity to

                            cater for the diverted traffic.


                            It shall be dust free and shall ensure clear visibility at all
                            times of the day and night.

                            Pavement and riding surface for the diversion will depend
                            on the duration over which the diversion will be used, and
                            shall be as directed by the Engineer. The commonly used
                            specifications are SDBC surfacing over 150-200mm thick
                            WMM constructed on completed sub-grade.

                           It shall be provided with the required safety standards
                           and the warning for the construction ahead shall be
                           provided by the sign “Men at Work” about 1 km. in
                           advance of the work zone. In addition a supplementary
                           plate indicating “Diversion 1 km. Ahead” and a sign “Road
                                        351
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                           closed Ahead” shall be placed. It shall be followed by
                           “Compulsory Turn right / Left Sign”. The “Detour” and
                           “Sharp Deviation” sign shall be used to guide the traffic
                           on to the diversion. Hazard markers shall be placed
                           where the railings for the cross drainage structures on the
                           diversion start.

                    b) Partial Closure of Existing Two Lane Carriageway

                        Such an eventuality will arise only in a special situation where
                        the existing 2 lanes in use for the main traffic need
                        emergency repairs and the new lanes under construction are
                        not available for diversion of the traffic. It will become
                        necessary to carryout special repairs through partial closure
                        of the existing 2 lane facility. In such a situation care shall be
                        taken that the traffic is guided away from the closed lane into
                        the operating lane without conflicting with the traffic from
                        opposite direction. The warning sign for “Men At Work” shall
                        be the first sign to be seen by the drivers of the approaching
                        vehicles. This sign shall have supplementary plate also
                        showing the distance of work zone. The next warning sign
                        shall be for the “Road Narrowing” (depending upon the lane
                        closure). Compulsory “Keep Right” or “Keep Left” sign
                        depending upon the situation shall be provided at the
                        beginning of the transition zone and taper. The point where
                        traffic is to deviate from its normal path, the channel for the
                        traffic shall be clearly marked with the aid of painted drums
                        of traffic cones. “The traffic lane or carriageway closed” sign
                        shall also be provided at the barricades along with the “Keep
                        Right / Left” sign.

                    c) Switch over of traffic from widened to unwidened
                       section and vice-versa

                        In the course of construction, widening of the carriageway
                        will have to be taken up in stretches with intervening space
                        between two such stretches. This will bring about the
                        situations in which the traffic passing through the widened
                        road would have to pass on and merge with the un-widened
                        section and vice-versa.

                        For such cases, apart from “Men At Work” signs with
                        distance plate in the advance warning zone, the signs
                        indicating “Road Narrowing” or “Road widening” as
                        appropriate shall be installed.

                        The arrangement to be made while the service roads are
                        under construction in urban stretches is shown in the
                        Drawings.

                    d) Switch over of traffic when the New Highway crosses
                       the National Highway or State Highway or Cart track

                        In Certain situations during the project construction period,
                                        352
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        when the ORR crosses the existing National Highway/ State
                        Highway/ Car track, it may be necessary to construct a
                        temporary diversion for the existing highway to allow the
                        traffic on the existing roads with out any disruption to the
                        traffic.

                        Where the New Highway crosses /Joins with an existing
                        National Highway or State highway or cart track, the highway
                        road or cart track shall be kept open at all times duly
                        providing and maintaining the diversion roads.

                        It shall be provided with the required safety standards and
                        the warning for the construction ahead shall be provided by
                        the sign “Men at Work” about 1 km. in advance of the work
                        zone. In addition a supplementary plate indicating “Diversion
                        1 km. Ahead” and a sign “Road closed Ahead” shall be
                        placed. It shall be followed by “Compulsory Turn right / Left
                        Sign”. The “Detour” and “Sharp Deviation” sign shall be used
                        to guide the traffic on to the diversion. Hazard markers shall
                        be placed where the railings for the cross drainage structures
                        on the diversion start.

                        After completion of the main carriageway of the project
                        highway according to plans, the existing road shall be
                        brought back to the original standards and the main traffic
                        from the cross roads shall be restored on them.

 CLAUSE A-12.4          PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY

                        The following general precautions shall apply to all the work
                        sites.

                        a) General Measures

                             (i) All the signs and delineators shall be maintained in
                                 a clean and brightly painted conditions at all times.


                             (ii) Adequate lighting arrangements shall be made for
                                  proper visibility during night travel through the work
                                  area.

                             (iii) Adequate arrangements for frequent sprinkling of
                                   water shall be made to keep the area dust free.

                        b) For Safety of Workmen

                             (i) Workmen shall be trained in use of tools and plant.
                             (ii) Bitumen handling labour shall be given gum boots,
                                   spectacles etc.
                             (iii) First –aids kits shall be provided.
                             (iv) Workers required on site during night hours shall be
                                   provided with      fluorescent jackets with reflective
                                   tapes.
                                        353
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                        c) For Safety of Road User

                             (i) As far as possible ,the material, equipment and
                                   machinery shall be installed parked in places
                                   sufficient away from the berms in the available road
                                   land. Only in avoidable cases the same be allowed
                                   near the edge of berms.
                             (ii) Machinery shall be parked at appropriate places
                                   away from the path of public traffic, and shall be
                                   provided with red flags and red lights.
                             (iii) Only minimum quantity of material required for the
                                   construction operations shall be collected at site
                                   near the public travelled way.


 CLAUSE A-12.5          SAFETY AUDIT

                         Safety audit shall be conducted periodically on the safety
                         measures adopted during the constructions operations. The
                         main aspects to be covered shall include:

                               Manpower and their safety
                               Machinery
                               Temporary works
                               Equipment &Vehicles
                               Material storage and handling
                               Construction procedures
                               Environment
                               Site safety guidelines
                               Miscellaneous services

                        The Contractor shall constitute special teams from his staff
                        for the above audit, and shall take appropriate corrective
                        measures to the directions of the Engineer.

 CLAUSE A-12.6          MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

                         Construction of service roads shall be measured for the
                         involved work items such as earth work, sub –base, WMM
                         base, SDBC surfacing etc. according to respective
                         specifications

                         Traffic management and safety during the construction shall
                         be measured as per the items provided in the Bill of
                         Quantities. For items which are not covered in the BOQ are
                         deemed to be included under other items of work provided
                         in the Bill of Quantities.

 CLAUSE A-12.7           RATES

                         The rate for traffic management and safety during
                         construction will be in full compensation for providing all the
                         necessary arrangements          as   described in these
                                        354
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                         specifications or as ordered by the Engineer, including
                         provision and installation of signs, pavement markings,
                         delineators, barricades, flagmen, red lamps/ blinking lights
                         etc. The rate will also include for removal of the above
                         installation after completion of the construction work in a
                         particular stretch.

                         Payment for traffic management and safety during
                         construction shall be regulated in 2 stages as follows:

                        Stage 1: Number and type of safety devices shall be as per
                                 the requirement shown in the drawings or as
                                 directed by the engineer during construction and
                                 maintenance of the same for the entire period of
                                 particular construction zone.

                        Stage 2: Continuous maintenance of the above, with all
                                 barricades, traffic cones, reflective tapes, signs,
                                 flagmen, lamps/blinkers etc., as per the drawings
                                 or as directed by the engineer. Measurement shall
                                 be made on the basis of respective units shown in
                                 the BOQ for the periods the safety equipment are
                                 maintained in a condition deemed satisfactory by
                                 the Engineer. In the event of removal of required
                                 signs or other safety fixtures, or not replacing the
                                 damaged safety fixtures with the new ones during
                                 the construction, proportionate payment shall be
                                 deducted from the contractor’s bill or otherwise,
                                 Engineer himself may arrange to install those signs
                                 or safety fixtures by deploying any other agency
                                 and the cost incurred thereof shall be deducted
                                 from the contractor’s bill for not maintaining
                                 properly.


 CLAUSE A-12.8          SOLAR POWERED BLINKER SIGNAL

                        Scope of work

                        Supplying and installation of Solar Powered Blinker Signals
                        with LED Signal Array of ultra bright silicon based LED signal
                        with amber in colour, the dia of the signal shall be 300mm for
                        clear vision with the distance of visibility not less than 800 m,
                        life of LED signal greater than 10 years, system shall be with
                        complete automatic mechanism including provision for
                        on-site modification, complying with Electronic Specifications
                        that the system shall operate for          24 hours, designed for
                        48 Volts, temperature range of working is -4°C to +55°C ,
                        frequency of blinking shall be 24 to 30 cycles per minute for
                        clear vision with open circuit protection, with Solar Photo
                        Voltaic Modules with panel capacity of 48 V, each module
                        shall contain manufacturer’s name, trade mark, model name,
                        model number, serial number, date of manufacture, etc., the
                        model shall either crystalline or amorphous based, warranty
                                        355
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        on life of panel shall be 10 years with Sealed Maintenance
                        Free (SMF) storage Battery of capacity 48 V, single pack
                        and the LED signal module shall be protected against dust
                        and moisture intrusion as per the requirements of NEMA
                        Standard 250 -1991. Material used for the lens and signal
                        module shall conform to ASTM specification for the
                        materials. Pole should be 5 m height for distant vision with
                        arrangement for the panel to rotate for the appropriate
                        direction and the structure shall be vapo cured finish to
                        protect against rust with provision for mounting the battery at
                        the bottom of the pole with vandal proof structure. Blinker
                        shall comply with specifications and drawings provided in the
                        Contract Agreement.



                        TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SOLAR POWERED
                        BLINKER SIGNAL

                        L.E.D SIGNAL ARRAY

                           LED signal should be ultra bright silicon based LED
                           signal with amber in colour.
                           The diameter of the signal should be 300mm for clear
                           vision
                           The distance of the visibility should be greater than 800 m
                           Life of LED signal should be greater than 10 years
                           System should operate completely with automatic
                           operation
                           Provision should be given for on-site modification.
                           The signal array should contain manufacture’s name,
                           trade mark, model number, serial number, date of
                           manufacture.

                        Electronic Specifications

                           The system should operate for 24 hours.
                           The system should be designed for 48 Volts.
                           Charge controller should be 24 / 36 V, 18 Amps.
                           The inbuilt charge controlling should be provided for
                           better life of battery. The battery high, battery low should
                           be provided with the charge controller.
                           The temperature compensation should be designed such
                           that -6Mv / °C raise in temperature.
                           No load current of the system should not exceed 5m Amp
                           Temperature range of working is -4°C + 55°C
                           Enough time to be given for LEDs to cool down for
                           normal temperature by giving 50% on cycle.
                           Frequency of blinking should be 24 to 30 cycles per
                           minute for clear vision.

                        Protection

                           Open circuit protection, short circuit, over load protection
                                       356
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                           required
                           Protection for reverse polarity of battery is required
                           Protection for reverse polarity of panel is required

                        Solar Photo Voltaic Module Specification

                           Panel capacity should be 48 V, 80 Watt.
                           Each module should contain manufacturer’s name, trade
                           mark, model name, model number, serial number, date of
                           manufacture, etc.
                           The model should either crystalline or amorphous based.
                           Warranty on life of panel should be 10 years
                           Peak power, peak current, open circuit voltage should be
                           mentioned on panel


                        Storage Battery

                           Battery should be either Sealed Maintenance Free (SMF)
                           or Lead Acid Type with aqua turf vent plug with indication
                           of electrolyte.
                           Capacity of battery should be 48 V.
                           The battery should be of low discharge type are C/20
                           type
                           Terminal voltage should be of 48 V only in a single pack.
                           Autonomy of battery should be two / three days.
                           Maximum depth of discharge less than 80%.

                        Environmental Requirement

                            The LED signal module shall be rated for use in the
                            operating temperature range of -4°C to +55°C. The
                            modules shall meet all specifications throughout this
                            range.
                            The LED signal module shall be protected against dust
                            and moisture intrusion as per the requirements of NEMA
                            Standard 250 -1991 for Type 4 enclosures to protect all
                            internal components

                        Standard specification for Enclosure

                        Enclosure / Housing           NEMA 12/ IP 66 Standard
                        Material              Glass Fiber reinforced polyester
                                                       / MS steel box
                        Impact Resistance             > 7 Nm
                        Flammability                  Self extinguishing
                        Protective insulation         Fully insulated
                        Seal                          -40 C + 100 C
                        Dry electric strength         > 10 Kv per mm
                        Water absorption              maximum 0.7%
                        Surface resistance            > 1012 ohm
                        Colour                Traffic amber

                        Construction
                                       357
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                           The LED signal module shall be a single, self contained,
                           inside the module. The circuit board and power supply
                           shall be contained inside the module.

                           The assembly and manufacturing process for the LED
                           signal assembly shall be designed to assure all internal
                           components are adequately supported to withstand
                           mechanical shock and vibration from high winds and
                           other sources.

                        Materials

                           Material used for the lens and signal module construction
                           shall conform to ASTM specification for the materials.

                           Enclosure containing either the power supply or electronic
                           components of the signal module shall be made of
                           UL94VO flame retardant materials. The lens of the signal
                           module is excluded from this requirement.

                        Mounting structures

                           Pole should be 5 mtr height for distant vision
                           Provision should be provided for mounting the panel and
                           to rotate for the appropriate direction.
                           Structure should be vapour cured finish to protect against
                           rust.
                           Provision should be provided for grouting the pole.
                           Provision should be provided mounting the battery at the
                           bottom of the pole with vandal proof structure.

                        Measurement for Payments:

                        Unit: The unit of measurement shall be in “ Numbers”

                        Rate: The unit cost of Solar Powered Blinker Signal is
                             inclusive supply and erection with all the equipment
                             and full compensation for labour and material, cost of
                             foundation, fabrication, welding and transportation to
                             site and installation, testing including cost of anti-theft
                             mechanism and all incidental charges necessary for
                             carrying out the work at site confirming to the
                             specifications complete including meeting the warranty
                             requirements. 75% of cost is payable after trial run
                             of 1 week and the balance 25% after 6 months.




                                        358
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

CLAUSE A-13          UTILITY DUCTS AND CROSSING

         1            Utility Ducts

                     Utility ducts should be laid below the footpath, shall comprise
                     of a set of 8 nos. of 110mm. dia. HDPE pipes (5.3 mm thick)
                     of approved quality for carrying the utility cables on one side
                     and 160 mm dia HDPE pipes (7.7 mm thick) shall be laid on
                     the other side of the service road for carrying the electrical
                     cables separately, which shall be laid in appropriately shaped
                     granular bed and compacted, as shown in the drawing or as
                     directed by the Engineer.

                     Specifications of the Permanently lubricated HDPE telecom
                     ducts shall conform to the generic requirements no.
                     G/CDS-08/01.DEC 99 specified by the Telecommunication
                     engineering centre, Delhi.

                     The installation of the ducts along the highways shall also
                     require supply and installation of RCC utility chambers as
                     shown in the drawings. The contractor shall make the
                     provision of providing 1 No. of utility chamber at every 1 Km.
                     for each ducts as shown in the drawings. Specifications of the
                     RCC Utility chambers shall conform to the section 1700 of the
                     MOST specification.

                     Utility ducts of 160mm diameter HDPE pipes (7.7 mm thick)
                     shall be laid in the median and 110mm diameter HDPE pipes
                     (5.3 mm thick) in both the earthen shoulders of the main
                     carriageway, on compacted and appropriately shaped granular
                     bed as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
                     Care should be taken to compact the fill material above and
                     around the duct pipe with power rammer.

         2                  Utility Crossing

                     For cross connection, two (2) numbers of utility ducts shall be
                     provided at an interval of 500m for cross connection. A
                     provision shall be made with 0.6m diameter pipe of NP-4
                     grade, for facilitating crossing of utilities from one side to the
                     other. Location, size and design of the cross pipes for utilities
                     shall be finalized at the detailed design stage in consultation
                     with the Independent Consultant and HGCL and shall confirm
                     to IS: 458-2000 and MoRTH specification Clause 2100.

                     At all junctions, provision shall be made for 0.6m diameter
                     NP-4 pipe for facilitating crossing of utilities from one side to
                     the other. Location, size and design of the cross pipes for
                     utilities shall be finalized at the detailed design stage in
                     consultation with the Independent Consultant and HGCL and
                     shall confirm to IS: 458-2000 and MoRTH specification Clause
                     2100.


                                        359
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

         3            Utility Protective Work

                     The contractor shall carry out the protective work for the
                     underground utilities to be retained as decided by the
                     engineer. The work shall be taken up with the express
                     approval of the Engineer and under strict supervision of
                     respective line agencies. The work shall comprise digging
                     trenches around the underground cables to the size and depth
                     required to accommodate the RCC half pipes (arches). The
                     grade and size of the arches shall be as directed by the
                     Engineer and should confirm to the specifications of full RCC
                     pipe of NP-4 grade. The foundation and bedding concrete
                     shall confirm to IS: 458-2000 and MoRTH specification Clause
                     2100.


CLAUSE A-14          RE-CONSTRUCTION            OF   TEMPLES      OR     RELIGIOUS
                     PLACES

         1.1.        For the Temples or Religious places of worship falling in the
                     project alignment a new structure shall be constructed at a
                     new location within a distance of 1000 meters. The Engineer
                     shall finalize the new location after consultation with the local
                     representatives of the area.

         1.2.        The contractor shall take photographs of existing religious
                     structures and maintain a record of specification of existing
                     structure before dismantling.

         1.3.        The construction of the new structure shall be carried out as
                     per drawing and Specifications for Building works of Central
                     Public Works Department.

         1.4.        The following items of work are included to be executed:

                       a) The plinth height of the structure shall be 1.5 meters
                          above G.L. The walls shall be constructed in R.R. Stone
                          masonry in C.M. 1:4.
                       b) Flooring shall be of marble stone topping laid over
                          cement concrete base of 1:2:4.
                       c) Plaster shall be in cement mortar 1:4 with andal coat.
                       d) Shikar shall be constructed as per drawing.
                       e) The idol (Murti) of God shall be shifted from the original
                          Temple/Religious structure to the new location with full
                          religious rites.
                       f) Steel grill / wooden gates shall be provided.
                       g) Electric fittings shall be provided inside the structure.
                       h) Polished stone pavement shall be provided all around the
                          pedestal in a width of about 3 meters.

         5.          Mode of Payment


                                        360
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     The mode of payment shall be the outer plan plinth
                     measurements of the structure in sq meters. The complete
                     work shall be executed as per drawing and direction of the
                     Engineer. The rate should include the works specified in
                     para-4 including cost material, labour, equipment and
                     incidentals.

CLAUSE A-15 CURING USING LIQUID MEMBRANE FORMING COMPOUND

        1            General

                     Liquid membrane forming compound are sometimes permitted
                     to be used by the engineer for curing concrete for part or
                     whole of the total curing period as specified in sections dealing
                     with concrete construction. These membranes reduce the loss
                     of water from concrete during early hardening period and
                     some type of compounds also help in reducing the
                     temperature-rise of concrete exposed to the radiation from the
                     sun. These specifications cover the type and use of such
                     compounds. However, the use of the same will need specific
                     permission from the engineer, who may require a number of
                     tests to be carried out for establishing the conformity of the
                     product to these specifications and to establish that the curing
                     compound and its method of use does not have any
                     unacceptable effect on the quality of concrete. The cost of the
                     initial acceptance testing and the quality control testing will be
                     borne by the owner, if the method has been specified as a
                     requirement by the engineer. If on the other hand, it is
                     suggested by the contractor as an alternative to wet-curing,
                     the full cost of testing will be borne by him and deemed to be
                     included in his rates for concreting. The cost of curing in any
                     case will be deemed to be part of the concrete rates and will
                     not be paid extra.

                     All equipment, material etc., needed for curing and protection
                     of concrete shall be at hand and ready for installing before
                     actual concreting beings. Detailed plans, methods and
                     procedures shall be firmly established, shall be settled and got
                     approved in writing from the Engineer-in-charge sufficiently in
                     advance of the actual concreting.

                     The equipment and method proposed to be utilised shall
                     provide for adequate control and avoid interruption or damage
                     to the work of other agencies.

       1      Curing Compound

                     The curing compound shall be conforming to ASTM-C-309-81,
                     Type-2, white pigmented compound. The solids dissolved in
                     vehicle shall be either A (no restrictions) or Class B (resin as
                     defined in ASTM D-883) as approved by the engineer.
                     White pigmented compound (Type-2) shall consist of finely
                     divided white pigments and vehicle solids, ready mixed for
                                        361
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     immediate use without alteration. The compound shall present
                     a uniform white appearance when applied uniformly to a fresh
                     concrete surface at a specified rate of application. It shall be of
                     such consistency that it can be readily applied by spraying to
                     provide uniform coating at temperatures above 4 C. If two
                     coats are to be applied then it should be applied at an interval
                     of approximately one hour. They shall adhere to freshly placed
                     concrete that has stiffened or sufficient resist marking during
                     the application and to damp hardened concrete and shall form
                     a continuous film when applied at a rate of 5 m²/litre. When
                     dry, the covering shall be continuous flexible and without
                     visible breaks or pin holes and shall remain as unbroken film
                     at least 28 days after application. It shall not react
                     deleteriously with the concrete.
                     The compound shall meet with the requirement of water
                     retention test as per ASTM designation C-156-80. The loss of
                     water in this test shall be restricted to not more than 0.55
                     kg/m² of exposed surface in 72 hours.
                     The white pigmented compound (Type 2) when rested as
                     specified in accordance with method E-79 of ASTM shall
                     exhibit a day light reflectance of not less than 60% of that of
                     magnesium oxide.
                     It shall fulfil the requirement of drying time when tested in
                     accordance with ASTM-C-309-81. The compound applied shall
                     be dry to touch in not more than 4 hours. After 12 hours it shall
                     not be tacky or tack off (peel off) concrete when walked upon
                     nor it shall impart a slippery surface.
                     The liquid compound should be of a sprayable consistency.

       2             Supply and Testing

                     Acceptance Testing

                     Prior to the approval of the bran/trade name of compound and
                     the source of supply and manufacturer acceptance testing
                     shall be carried out to demonstrate the conformance of the
                     compound to Clause 5502. In addition, testing shall be
                     performed to demonstrate that on adverse/undesirable change
                     in quality of concrete or concrete surface takes place as a
                     result/by-product of the use of the compound. These tests
                     should be designed to check properties such as loss of
                     strength at 28 days of surface layer, or of concrete cube,
                     change in surface texture, change in adhesion to subsequently
                     applied layers like plaster, flooring, tiling etc. The type and
                     number of tests are to be as specified by the engineer.

       3             Routine Testing

                     1. The liquid membrane forming curing compound should be
                     brought in the manufacturer’s original clear containers. Each
                     container shall be legibly marked with the name of the
                     manufacture, the trade name of the compound, the type of
                     compound and class of vehicle/solids, the nominal percentage
                                        362
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     of volatile material and batch or lot number. The lot numbers
                     will be assigned to the quantity of compound mixed, sampled
                     and tested as single product. The manufacturer shall exercise
                     the care in filling the container so that all are equally
                     representative of the compound produced.
                      2. Curing compound to be used on site shall be got tested at
                     least 14 days in advance so that the result of water retention
                     tests, reflectance test, drying etc, are available before it can
                     bee permitted for use. All of the filled containers represented
                     by the approved sample shall then be sealed to prevent
                     leakage, substitution or dilution. The engineer-in-charge or
                     authorised representative should mark each container
                     represented by the samples with a suitable identification mark
                     for later identification and correlation and shall be kept in store
                     with double lock arrangements. One key shall be kept with the
                     Contractor and the other with Engineer. Random samples shall
                     be collected from every batch of the compound. Frequency of
                     random sampling shall be done as directed by the Engineer.
                     The contractor shall provide samples and labour for collecting
                     samples free of cost. Testing shall be carried out by agency
                     approved by the engineer and in presence of his
                     representative.

       4             Method of Application

                     The compound shall be sprayed using mechanical sprayer of
                     approved design to ensure uniform and continuous membrane
                     on the concrete surface. The coverage shall be at the rate
                     specified by the manufacturer or at the rate of 4m² per litre or
                     as specified by the manufacturer and approved by the
                     engineer. Field trials shall be conducted to decide effective
                     coverage rate, which depends upon surface finish. The
                     engineer after verification of the field trails and based on the
                     actual experience shall order the rate of application as needed
                     for achieving the proper curing. With a view to ensure
                     thorough and complete coverage, approximately one half of
                     the compound for a given area should be applied by moving
                     the spray gun back and forth in one direction and the
                     remaining half at right angles to this direction. In case the
                     application is still not found uniform, the contractor shall have
                     to apply the second coat as and when directed by the
                     Engineer. If a second coat is to be applied, it should be applied
                     approximately after an interval of one hour. The curing
                     compound shall generally be applied as soon as the bleeding
                     water or shine disappears, leaving dull appearance.


                     If surface treatment by roughing, hand brushing etc., is
                     required (e.g. as in case of road pavements) the curing
                     compound should be applied immediately after the same.
                     Equipment for spraying curing compound shall be of pressure
                     tank type (5 to 7 kg/cm²) with provision of continuous agitation.
                     A curing jumbo with multiple travelling spray fans shall be

                                        363
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     provided for effective spray. Spraying on concrete lining shall
                     be done in such a way that the green concrete is not disturbed
                     or damaged or any foot impression left. Necessary schemes or
                     spraying by mechanised means shall be got approved by the
                     Engineer-in-charge. However, in emergency for very small
                     areas/ patches) it can be applied with wire or bristled brush.



CLAUSE A-16 VOID FORMER

                     Void formers are to be supplied with suitable end blockers to
                     seal the void former ends.

                     Specialised form work shall be manufactured by use of form
                     lining materials with ring stiffeners as per design requirements.
                      The form lining may either be Marine Plywood, PVC/HDPE
                     sheet or steel sheet of appropriate thickness and the ring
                     stiffeners should preferably be of structural steel sections.
                     Manufactured void formers shall be absolutely leak proof.

                     The contractor may use PVC/ HDPE pipes, Galvanised
                     corrugated light metal tubes of required sizes from market or
                     specially manufactured for use as void formers. However, the
                     specifications & design for such pipes/ tubes shall be
                     submitted for approval of Engineer.
                     The Void Formers shall be strong enough to withstand all
                     pressure, ramming and vibration during placing of concrete
                     and handling / erection stresses. The void formers shall be
                     placed and tied in position so that they are not displaced
                     during concreting.

                     All the steel surfaces shall be painted with Zinc Rich Paint in
                     accordance with Section 1900 of the Technical Specification,
                     before use of Void Formers.
                     Standard R.C.C. Hume pipes are not to be used as void
                     formers.

                     The contractor shall furnish the design and drawing along with
                     detailed specifications of the proposed Void Formers for
                     approval of Engineer before taking up the work.
                     The payment for void former shall not be made separately. It
                     is deemed to have been included in the concrete rates for
                     voided slab which shall include cost of supply of void formers,
                     transport, fitting fixing in position and all other incidental
                     expenditure complete.




                                        364
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

CLAUSE A-17 WATER PROOF CEMENT PAINTING

                     Water proof cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities as
                     can be used up within an hour of its mixing as otherwise
                     mixture will set and thicken affecting flow and finish. Water
                     proof cement paint shall be mixed with water in two stages.
                     The first stage shall comprise of two parts of water proof
                     cement paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly and
                     allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall be taken to add the
                     water proof cement paint gradually to the water and not vice
                     versa. The second stage shall comprise of adding further one
                     part of water to the mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a
                     liquid of workable and uniform consistency.

                     The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar
                     droppings, dirt, algae, grease and other foreign matter by
                     brushing and washing. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted
                     with clean water before the water proof cement paint is
                     applied.

                     The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface
                     with brushes or spraying machine. The solution shall be kept
                     well stirred during the period of application.


 CLAUSE A-18          FILLING OF OPEN WELLS

                      Scope

                      The work shall consist of removal and disposal of all unsuitable
                      and obstructing materials, demolition of well lining, placing of
                      selected materials in layers, and compaction in layers for filling
                      of open wells originally used as sources for potable water. The
                      work shall be carried out in accordance with the Specifications
                      and as directed by the Engineer.

                      These specifications would be applicable for open wells over
                      which the road embankments would be built. These would not
                      be applicable for plugging of open wells, which are outside the
                      limits of embankments. These open wells would require
                      plugging using suitable materials so as to protect against
                      contamination of water. These specifications would also not be
                      applicable for filling of ponds and water reservoirs.


                      Classification of Wells

                      The open wells shall be classified as under:
                      Unlined
                      Lined
                      The casing/lining of wells may be of masonry, burnt clay,
                      concrete rings or any other type.


                                        365
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      Materials

                      The fill materials shall be sand, gravel, selected soil and such
                      materials free from logs, stumps, roots, rubbish, compressible
                      materials or any other ingredient likely to deteriorate, or affect
                      the filling and shall be free from any hazardous material such
                      as harmful chemicals, sewage etc., which could cause
                      contamination of ground water. A mixture of sand and gravel
                      would be acceptable as filling material because little settling
                      would occur afterwards.

                      The types of material to be used shall be as per Table-1 and
                      as directed by the Engineer.




                      Table-1: Material for Filling of Open Wells

                       SL.   Description                    Material Type
                       No.
                        1    Well with         Mixture of sand and gravel upto 1.5m
                             standing          height below natural ground level. The
                             water             selected granular soil with Plasticity
                                               Index (PI) < 6 for the remaining depth
                                               of well. To achieve the desired
                                               compaction, the top 1.5m shall be
                                               executed by lowering the standing
                                               water level by more than 1.5m below
                                               natural ground level.

                        2    Dry well with     Mixture of sand and gravel upto 1.5m
                             depth             height below natural ground level. The
                                               selected granular soil with Plasticity
                                               Index (PI) < 6 for the remaining depth
                                               of well.

                   Note:
                   (1)     Materials for filling of wells of sizes less than 1m in
                   diameter shall be mixture of natural sand and gravel.
                   (2) The selected materials (soils and sand-gravel mixtures)
                   shall have MDD (as per IS2720, Part-8) not less than 16.0 Kn/m3.
                   The sand-gravel mix shall be as per sub clause 2504.

                   The size of the coarse material in soil shall not exceed 25 mm. In
                   case of sand-gravel mixtures, the maximum particle size shall not
                   be more than 75 mm. Sand-gravel mixtures with excessive
                   amounts of gravel (>30%) shall not be permitted
                                         366
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                       These should be capped with 300 mm thick M-15 grade PCC
                       slab on granular material.

                  1.   Construction Operations

                 (a) Removal of Obstructing Materials

                       (i)   All debris such as pump, metal wires and rods, pipes, any
                             other equipment, floating materials and logs, degradable
                             and also not degradable materials that would cause
                             incomplete filling of the voids shall be removed from the
                             bed of wells so that the selected fill materials do not slump
                             or settle afterwards. The removal and disposal shall also
                             cover all plastic materials (e.g. used polythene bags, pipes
                             etc.), sewage, dead animals, boulders etc. as directed by
                             the Engineer.

                       (ii) All debris such as pump, metal wires and rods, pipes, any
                             other equipment, floating materials and logs, degradable
                             and also not degradable materials that would cause
                             incomplete filling of the voids shall be removed from the
                             bed of wells so that the selected fill materials do not slump
                             or settle afterwards. The removal and disposal shall also
                             cover all plastic materials (e.g. used polythene bags, pipes
                             etc.), sewage, dead animals, boulders etc. as directed by
                             the Engineer.
                       (iii) In case of lined open wells, the lining shall be dismantled
                             up to the level of natural ground level or one metre in
                             height, whichever is higher.

                 (b)   Disinfect Standing Water in Open Wells

                       All open wells with standing water shall be disinfected to kill
                       micro organisms. This can be accomplished using by adding
                       chlorine bleach @ 5 litres of chlorine bleach for every 2,500
                       litres of standing water and as directed by the Engineer.

                 (c) Removal of Well Lining

                       The upper 1m of well casing/lining shall be removed when the
                       fill material reaches within 1m of the existing ground surface

                 (d) Placing and Compaction

                       (i)   The placing and compaction operations would commence
                             after completion of the preceding tasks, (a) and (b), to the
                             satisfaction of the Engineer.

                       (ii) The fill material as specified in Table-1 above shall be
                            placed in the well in layer of 500 mm using shovels and as
                            directed by the Engineer. Dumping of materials from dump
                            trucks and front-

                                          367
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                      (iii) end loaders into the abandoned wells shall not be allowed.

                      (iv) Each layer of fill material shall be compacted with the help
                           of plate compactor or power hammer and as directed by
                           the Engineer.

                      (v) Before allowing the next layer, it shall be ensured that the
                          earlier layer is at the desired compaction and as directed
                          by the Engineer.

                      (vi) It shall be ensured that no further consolidation/settlement
                           takes place while in service after filling of open wells. The
                           site over the filled open well shall be shaped as directed
                           by the Engineer to stop ponding of water and also to
                           absorb any settling of filling material.

                      (vii) These should be capped with 300 mm thick M-15 grade
                            PCC slab on granular material.

                  2. Measurements

                      Measurement of well filling shall be in cum for finish work for
                      the following items.

                      (b) Mixture of sand, gravel and selected granular soil.
                      (b) PCC M –15 grade.

                  3. Rates

                      The contact unit rates for filling of open wells shall include
                      removal of debris, dismantling of lining, cost of fill materials,
                      machinery, labour, all compaction works, environmental
                      protection works, if so directed by the Engineer, and disposal
                      of unsuitable materials complete with all leads and lifts and as
                      directed by the Engineer.

 CLAUSE A – 19        Levelling and Grading Road side Land

                   1 Description

                      The work shall consist of levelling and grading of roadside land
                      for purposes of chaining the land and as a landscaping
                      measure in accordance with the requirements of these
                      specifications or as directed by the Engineer.

                   2 Construction Operations

                      The construction operations shall follow the following sequence

                      (1)    The roadside land from the toe of the road embankment
                             to the outer open drain shall be cleaned and grubbed in
                             accordance with Clause 201. Except for trees and

                                        368
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                             large-sized plants designated to be retained, all shrubs
                             and plants shall be removed.

                      (2)    The land area shall be levelled by cutting high spots and
                             filling low spots, and sloped towards the outer drain by
                             means of dozer/grader. The graded slope shall at least
                             be 0.5% falling towards the ROW boundaries. Grading
                             shall be in such a manner that the rainwater from the
                             roadway and roadside land gets drains into the outer
                             open drains. The graded area shall be rolled with at
                             least two passes of 8-10 ton roller, and the areas
                             finished clean and tidy.

                      (3)    In case the land contours require construction of lateral
                             drains to drain out the water, the same shall be
                             excavated as excavation in ordinary soil to Clause 301.

                   3 Measurement for Payment

                      The work of levelling and grading the roadside land shall be
                      measured as area over which the work is performed in sq.m.

                      Cleaning and grabbing the area shall be measured and paid
                      for under Clause 201.

                   4 Rates

                      The contract unit rate for levelling and grading roadside land
                      shall be payment in full for all the operations including all
                      labour, equipment and incidentals required to complete the
                      work to the requirements of the specification.

 CLAUSE A – 20        CONTROLLED BLASTING

                      GENERAL

                      The specifications for excavation in rock are covered by
                      MoRT&H “Specifications for Road & Bridge Works” (4th
                      revision 2001), vide section 300. The following specifications
                      are additional and supplementary to the same.

                      CONTROLLED BLASTING

                      Whenever required by the Engineer, the rock blasting shall be
                      controlled so that vibration generated during the blasting do
                      not cause damage to the building and installation around built
                      up areas. Similarly, the rock pieces should not fly off the pits
                      and thus damage the buildings and installation and life and
                      limb of people around. Apart from the general precautions
                      mentioned in the MoRT&H specifications, following protective
                      measures and limits for use of explosives are suggested as
                      guidelines.
                      PROTECTIVE MEASURES
                                        369
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                      a) Short delay blasting with light charges shall be used.

                      b) The blast hole shall be covered with 0.6 to 1.0 sq.m. Mild
                         steel plate of minimum 6 mm thickness.

                      c) Reinforcement rod mesh not less than 20 mm dia at 150
                         mm centers in both directions shall be placed over the
                         steel plates.

                      d) Steel plate and reinforcements shall be inspected after
                         every blasting operation and all twists shall be removed
                         before reuse to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

                      e) The thickness of the covering plate and the kind of dead
                         weight is to be duly approved by the Engineer.

                      f)     When blasting is necessary adjacent in partially of
                            completely built structures the contractor shall take all
                            precautions necessary to prevent flying rock from causing
                            damage to the structures.

                      BLASTING WITHIN CERTAIN LIMITS

                      No blasting shall be allowed for any of the excavation until
                      freshly placed concrete of nearby structures has reached a
                      minimum strength of 7 Mpa.

                      Normally, blasting shall be resorted to only after 7 days of
                      concreting work in case of OPC (10 days in case of PPC) in
                      adjacent structures.

                      In no case shall blasting be allowed closer than 15m to any
                      structure after concrete placing has started

                      When minor blasting is necessary after concrete placing has
                      started in any structure, the maximum size of charge for
                      distance from 100m and above shall be limited to the following:


                       Distan        Safe particle velocity 10          Safe particle
                       ce in        mm/sec. Charge in kgs per        velocity 3 mm/sec.
                         m                    delay                  Charge in kgs per
                                                                            delay.
                           100                  10.7                          2.6
                           150                  24.2                          5.8
                           200                  43.0                         10.3
                           250                  67.3                         16.7
                           300                  96.9                         23.2
                           350                 131.9                         31.6
                           400                 172.3                         41.2
                           450                 218.2                         52.2

                                         370
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                        500                   269.3                        64.5

                      Any deviation in the above-recommended limits will be adopted
                      only after the specific approval of the Engineer. The contractor
                      shall submit the scheme with charges and delays he proposed
                      to use for blasting, for approval of the Engineer.

                      It is generally recommended that where the blasting is to be
                      done, within 20 m of the nearest point of permanent building,
                      the area shall be line drilled on periphery before blasting.

                      The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by
                      blasting whether to permanent or temporary structures and
                      shall replace or repair the structures at his own cost.

                      PRECAUTIONS AFTER BLASTING

                      After the blast, the supervisor must carefully inspect the work
                      and satisfy himself that all the charges have exploded. After
                      the blast takes place in underground works, the workmen shall
                      not be allowed to go to the face till toxic gases have
                      disappeared from the face.

                      If it is suspected that part of the blast has failed to fire or is
                      delayed, sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse before
                      entering the danger zone. When fuse and blasting caps are
                      used, a safe time should be allowed and then the supervisor
                      alone shall leave the shelter to inspect the blasting zone.

                      None of the drillers are to work near the misfired hole until one
                      of the two following operations have been carried out by the
                      Supervisor:

                      Either (i) the Supervisor should very carefully (when the
                      tamping is of damp clay) extract the tamping with a wooden
                      scraper or jet of water or compressed air (using a pipe of soft
                      material) and withdraw the fuse with the primer and a fresh
                      detonator with fuse should be placed in these holes and fired
                      out, or (ii) the hole may be cleared of 30 cm of tamping and its
                      direction then be ascertained by placing a stick in the hole.
                      Another hole may then be drilled at least 60 centimeters away
                      and parallel to it and about 30 cm less in depth, this hole shall
                      them be charged and fired. The balance of the cartridges and
                      detonators found in the muck shall be removed.

                      Before leaving his work, the Supervisor of the concluding shift
                      shall inform the Supervisor of the relieving shift of any case of
                      misfires and should point out the position with a red cross
                      denoting the same and also stating what action, if any, he has
                      taken in the matter.

                      The Supervisor should also at once report at the office of the
                      Contractor and the Engineer all cases of misfire, the cause of

                                        371
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      the same and what steps were taken in connection with these.

                      The names of the day and night shift Supervisors must be
                      noted daily in the Contractor’s office.

                      If a misfire has been found to be due to a defective detonator of
                      dynamite the whole quantity or box from which the defective
                      article was taken, must be thoroughly inspected by the
                      Contractor.

                      Drilling in holes not completely exploded by blasting shall not be
                      permitted.

                      PERSONNEL

                      Excavation by blasting will be permitted only under the personal
                      supervision of competent and licensed blasters and trained
                      workmen.

                      All supervisors and workmen in-charge of preparation, handling,
                      storage and blasting work shall be adequately insured by the
                      Contractor.

                      Storage shall be in charge of a very reliable person approved by
                      the Engineer, who may, if necessary conduct police enquiries
                      as to his reliability, antecedents etc. The contractor shall have
                      to produce a security for the person in-charge of the explosives,
                      if and when required by the Engineer, of the civil authorities of
                      the district.

                      The Contractor shall make sure that his supervisors and
                      workmen are fully conversant with all the rules to be observed
                      in storing, handling and use of the explosives. It shall be
                      ensured that the supervisors in charge are thoroughly
                      acquainted with the details of the handling of explosives and
                      blasting operations.


Clause A-21 INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISIONING OF HIGH MAST
               LIGHTING

        1.0         Scope




                                        372
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                    The work of Supply, Installation and commissioning of 20
                    Meters High Mast complete with 12 Nos.2x400 Watts Metal
                    Halide flood light luminaries, Electrical Connections and
                    electrical cables, foundations with foundation accessories, lamp
                    carriage with pulley and stainless steel wire ropes,
                    compensating disc, double drum winch, provision for attaching
                    power tool (with power tool), Lighting arrestor, aviation light
                    earthing, including foundations etc. shall be carried out as per
                    IS-1944 and other relevant IS codes for the same and as per
                    drawings supplied by the Concessionaire and approved by the
                    Engineer.




        2.0         Materials

                a) 20 Meters long, High Mast, in two sections made from special
                   steel plates as per BSEN 10025/IS S986 with excellent ultimate
                   tensile strength, yield stress and elongation and corrosion
                   Resistance properties and suitable weldability. Plates to be cut
                   and folded to form a telescopic polygonal cross section (20
                   sides) and welded longitudinally as per IS 9595/IS10178 and
                   continuously tapered, and having no circumferential welds.

                b) Hot Dip Galvanisation of both internal and external surface with
                   minimum 86 Microns more than 600 gm/m2 as per IS
                   specification.

                c) The thickness of sections shall be 6mm. for bottom section and
                   5mm top section. With a bottom diameter than 480mm and top
                   diameter than 200mm.

                d) The two sections should fit telescopically and the length of
                   overlap shall be at least 1.5times the diameter.

                e) The stress slip fit jointed without any welding at site and length
                   of overlap should be at least 1.5 times the Diameter.

                f) The high mast shall be designed as per IS 875 (Part-Ill) to
                   withstand a wind pressure of 250 Km/Hr with maximum gust
                   speed time of 3 seconds.

                g) The factor of safety for wind load shall be at least 1.25 and for
                   other loads shall be 1.15

                h) The base plate shall be made of hot-rolled MS. Plate as per
                   IS:2062 and of minimum 700mm diameter and 30 mm. thick
                   with at least 8 Nos. foundation Bolts of high tensile steel of
                   1200mm Length and M30 Category with Nuts for grouting in
                   concrete.
                                        373
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                i) The high mast shall be provided with lantern carriage of 1200
                   mm diameter made out of 75mmx400mm MS Channel or
                   60mmx60mm Square tube in 3 segments and having Rubber
                   Padded Guide ring as buffer between carriage and Mast with a
                   load carrying capacity of 750 Kgs, raising and lowering type
                   with three wire suspension system with a double drum winch for
                   optimum balancing of the lantern carriage and self lubricating
                   winch gear assembly made of phosphor bronze.


                j) The Wires used shall be of Stainless steel, minimum diameter
                   of 6mm and breaking load capacity of 2350 Kgs. per SS wires.

                k) Three nos. of SS wires shall be used for lantern carriage and 2
                   Nos. for Double Drum Winch.

                l) The luminaries shall be mounted on the lantern carriage by
                   mounting arm assembly to achieve desired lighting
                   performance.

               m) The mast shall be provided with lighting arrestor with spikes
                  and aviation obstruction light

                n) The high mast shall also be provided with compensating disc
                   and safety wires for maximum safety and flexibility.

        3.0         Earthing

                    Installation and fixing of 2 Nos. Standard earthing with 50mm
                    dia G.l. pipe, Class B, Medium Quality, 3 meters long and the
                    pipe shall have 12mm diameter holes at 15 Cms c/c up to a
                    height of 2.5 meters from the bottom and a clamp made out of
                    40mmx5mm G.l. flat at the top for taking earth connection
                    complete with excavation of earth pit chamber of depth
                    3000mm in all kind of soil including rock of all variety,
                    installation of earth electrode and masonry work for earth pit
                    chamber       with    brick      cast    iron   cover      of   size
                    300mmx300mmxl0mm thick for covering the earth pit chamber.
                    The pit shall have alternate layer of 105mm of charcoal and
                    50mm of salt up to a height of 465mm from the bottom of the
                    pit and the rest shall be filled up with charcoal to a further depth
                    of 2035mm. and the balance shall be filled up with earth. (The
                    earth pit chamber shall be erected after the earth has settled
                    and has became firm. Otherwise the earth shall be watered and
                    rammed to make it compact and then the masonry work shall
                    be done with 1:6 cement sand mortar and 1st Class bricks shall
                    be plastered with 1/2“        thick plaster of cement mortar both
                    inside and outside the chamber. Further the level of the Cast
                    iron Cover shall be same as adjacent ground / pavement level
                    including connection with the help of 40mmx5mm GI strip from
                    earth electrode to earth electrode and from earth electrode to
                    the high mast.
                                         374
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


        4.0         Fixing and Installation

                    12 Nos. 2x400watts, Metal Halide Lamp, High efficiency low
                    glare asymmetrical floodlighting luminaries complete with 2x400
                    watts, Metal Halide lamp, housing made of die-cast aluminium
                    with black powder coated finish and the lamp compartment
                    consisting of electro chemically brightened, high purity,
                    pre-anodised aluminium reflector, heat resistant toughened
                    front glass fixed to the housing with specially designed hinged
                    mechanism for quick and easy lamp replacement, complete
                    with external / internal control gear box consisting of energy
                    efficient, low watt loss, open construction copper ballast, power
                    factor improvement capacitor, ignitor etc., including power tool
                    for lowering and raising the lamp carriage the High mast with
                    movable packing and all tools and accessories complete.


        5.0         Measurement and Rates
                    The payment shall be made on number of High Masts fixed in
                    position.
                    All fitments such as High Mast, Luminaries, Accessories and
                    Cables etc shall be approved by the Engineer along with the
                    manufaturer’s details. The Firm must submit the details of the
                    manufacturers of fitments proposed to be used in the works
                    along with the other supporting documents to the Engineer for
                    approval before execution.

                    The unit rate includes all necessary materials and other
                    fixtures, earthing, wires, lighting lamps, tools and plants,
                    equipment required to complete the work. The required
                    excavation and fixing of High Mast and backfilling and
                    concreting etc., shall be considered incidental to work. No extra
                    payment shall be admissible.

 CLAUSE A-22       LIGHTING ARRANGEMENTS

                   Scope :

                   The work of supplying, installing, testing and fixing properly in
                   position external light poles including clamps, fixtures, cables
                   earthing etc., shall be carried out as per relevant I.S. codes for
                   the same and as per detailed drawings supplied by the
                   Contractor and approved by the Engineer as indicated below.

        1)         Poles and Cross arms:

               a) MS. Galvanised Octagonal Poles with base plate fabricated from
                  special steel plates as per BSEN 10025/IS 5986 with excellent
                  ultimate tensile strength, yield stress and elongation and
                  corrosion resistance properties and suitable weldability. Plates to
                  be cut and folded to form a octagonal cross section and welded
                  longitudinally as per IS 9595/1S10178. The pole shall withstand
                                        375
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                    wind pressure of 180 Km/Hr as per IS:875 and of 9.5 Meters
                    Length in single section, continuously tapered profile for stability
                    and aesthetics with face to face dimension being 190mm at
                    bottom and 90mm at top and 4.5mm wall thickness with
                    foundation base plate made of Hot rolled M.S. Plate as per
                    IS:2062 and 300mmx300mmx2Omm thick duly welded to the
                    base of the pole with foundation Bolts of 800mm Length and
                    M24 Category with Nuts for grouting in concrete.

               b)    Hot Dip Galvanisation of both internal and external surface with
                    minimum 86 Microns—more than 600 gm/m2 as per IS
                    specification.

               c) 1500mm long (Galvanised as above) Cross arms made out of
                  60mm outer diameter MS. G.l. tubular pipes of Class B and
                  welded with a cap to fit the top of the above pole and MS Plate
                  for rigidity between cap and pipe with provision of passing the
                  electrical cable from the pole to the end of cross arm for
                  connection of the luminaries.

               d) Electrical Termination box fixed at a height of 500mm from the
                  bottom of pole, made out of weather resistant fibre glass having
                  arrangement for fixing the box on the pole with clamps, 4 way 25
                  Amps / 400 Volts connector, 6/10 Amps / 230 Volts / 10 KA, SP,
                  MCB, Cable gland at bottom of suitable size for entry & exit of 16
                  Sq-mm, 4 Core, Armoured Aluminium Cable with 6/10 Amps

               e)    Excavation of Pole pit in all kind of soil including rock of all
                    variety of size 600mmx600mm and depth 1200mm with filling of
                    sand to a height of 300mm and then laying foundation of
                    Reinforced cement concrete (1:2:4) of 600mm x 600mm x
                    900mm high with granite metal of nominal size 20mm to 25mm
                    including side shuttering and grouting of foundation bolts and
                    supply and erection of pole as specified above including watering
                    and ramming it as required including provision for passage of
                    Cables and finishing the surface with 1:4 ratio cement plaster

        2)          Luminaries :

                    Supply, Installation and Commissioning of 250 Watts, Metal
                    Halide/H.P.S.V. Street light luminaries including lamps as
                    specified below on the ends of cross arms mounted on the MS
                    tubular poles complete with connection from terminal box at the
                    pole base to the luminaries with the help of 1.5 Sq-mm,
                    650/1100 Volt grade, twin core, flexible copper wire, PVC
                    insulated and sheathed conforming to IS:694, complete with
                    supply of all materials such as luminaries with control gear,
                    lamp, connecting wires and all accessories and sundries as
                    required for the work and as per direction of Engineer as
                    detailed below.

               a) The housing shall be made of single piece pressure die cast
                  LM6 aluminium / aluminium alloy with low copper content and

                                         376
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                   epoxy powder coated finish from outside.

               b) The lamp compartment shall consist of electrochemically
                  brightened and anodized, high purity STEP Precision Optics
                  Tech (POT) reflector.

               c) The luminaries shall have a Heat-resistant toughened flat glass
                  cover for the lamp compartment to ensure ingress protection of
                  IP66 for the lamp compartment and IP65 for control gear
                  compartment.

               d) The luminaries shall be complete with control gear such as
                  energy efficient, low watt loss, open construction copper ballast,
                  power factor improvement capacitor, ignitor etc.

        3)         Highmast lights:

                   Supply, Installation and commissioning of 20 Meters High Mast
                   complete with 12 Nos.2x400 W Metal Halide flood light
                   luminaries, Electrical Connections and electrical cables,
                   foundations with foundation accessories, lamp carriage with
                   pulley and stainless steel wire ropes, compensating disc, double
                   drum winch, provision for attaching power tool (without power
                   tool), Lighting arrestor, aviation light earthing etc. as detailed
                   below complete with all materials, accessories and sundries as
                   required for the work and as per the direction of Engineer as
                   detailed below.

               a) 20 Meters long, High Mast, in two sections made from special
                  steel plates as per BSEN 10025/IS 5986 with excellent ultimate
                  tensile strength, yield stress and elongation and corrosion
                  Resistance properties and suitable weldability. Plates to be cut
                  and folded to form a telescopic polygonal cross section      (20
                  sides) and welded longitudinally as per IS 9595/IS10178 and
                  continuously tapered, and having no circumferential welds.

               b) Hot Dip Galvanisation of both internal and external surface with
                  minimum 86 Microns-more than 600 gm/m2 as per IS
                  specification.

               c) The thickness of sections shall be 6mm. for bottom section and
                  5mm top section. With a bottom diameter not less than 480mm
                  and top diameter not less than 200mm.

               d) The two sections should fit telescopically and the length of
                  overlap shall be at least 1.5times the diameter.
               e) Stress slip fit jointed without any welding at site and length of
                  overlap should be at least 1.5 times the Diameter.

                f) Shall be designed as per IS 875 (Part-Ill) to withstand a wind
                   pressure of 250 Km/Hr with maximum gust speed time of 3
                   seconds.


                                       377
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

               g) The factor of safety for wind load shall be at least 1.25 and for
                  other loads shall be 1.15

               h) The base plate shall be made rolled MS. Plate as per IS:2062
                  minimum 700mm diameter and 30mm. thick with at least 8 Nos.
                  foundation Bolts of high tensile steel of 1200mm Length and
                  M30 Category with Nuts for grouting in concrete.

                i) Shall be provided with lantern carriage of 1200 mm diameter
                   made out of 75mmx400mm MS Channel or 60mmx60mm
                   Square tube in 3 segments and having Rubber Padded Guide
                   ring as buffer between carriage and Mast with a load carrying
                   capacity of 750 Kgs, raising and lowering type with three wire
                   suspension system with a double drum winch for optimum
                   balancing of the lantern carriage and self lubricating winch gear
                   assembly made of phosphor bronze.

                j) The Wires used shall be of Stainless steel, minimum diameter of
                   6mm and breaking load capacity of 2350 Kgs. per SS wires.

               k) Three nos. of SS wires shall be used for lantern carriage and 2
                  Nos. for Double Drum Winch.

                l) The luminaries shall be mounted on the lantern carriage by
                   mounting arm assembly to achieve desired lighting performance.

               m) Shall be provided with lighting arrestor with spikes.

               n) Shall be provided with aviation obstruction light.

               o) Shall be provided with compensating disc and safety wires for
                  maximum safety and flexibility.

               p) Installation and fixing of 2 Nos. Standard earthing with 50mm dia
                  G.l. pipe, Class B, Medium Quality, 3 meters long and the pipe
                  shall have 12mm diameter holes at 15 Cms c/c up to a height of
                  2.5 meters from the bottom and a clamp made out of
                  40mmx5mm G.l. flat at the top for taking earth connection
                  complete with excavation of earth pit chamber of depth 3000mm
                  in all kind of soil including rock of all variety, installation of earth
                  electrode and masonry work for earth pit chamber with brick cast
                  iron cover of size 300mmx300mmxl0mm thick for covering the
                  earth pit chamber. The pit shall have alternate layer of 105mm of
                  charcoal and 50mm of salt up to a height of 465mm from the
                  bottom of the pit and the rest shall be filled up with charcoal to a
                  further depth of 2035mm and the balance shall be filled up with
                  earth. (The earth pit chamber shall be erected after the earth has
                  settled and has became firm. Otherwise the earth shall be
                  watered and rammed to make it compact and then the masonry
                  work shall be done with 1:6 cement sand mortar and 1st Class
                  bricks shall be plastered with 1/2“         thick plaster of cement
                  mortar both inside and outside the chamber. Further the level of
                  the Cast iron Cover shall be same as adjacent ground /

                                         378
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                   pavement level including connection with the help of
                   40mmx5mm GI strip from earth electrode to earth electrode and
                   from earth electrode to the high mast.

               q) 12 Nos. 2x400watts, Metal Halide Lamp, High efficiency low
                  glare asymmetrical floodlighting luminaries complete with 2x400
                  watts, Metal Halide lamp, housing made of die-cast aluminium
                  with black powder coated finish and the lamp compartment
                  consisting of electro chemically brightened, high purity, pre
                  anodised aluminium reflector, heat resistant toughened front
                  glass fixed to the housing with specially designed hinged
                  mechanism for quick and easy lamp replacement, complete with
                  external / internal control gear box consisting of energy efficient,
                  low watt loss, open construction copper ballast, power factor
                  improvement capacitor, ignitor etc.

        4)         Power Tool :

                   Supplying of Power tool for lowering or raising the lamp carriage
                   the High Mast as at Sl. No. 3 above, complete with movable
                   packing and all tools and accessories.

        5)         Multicore Cables :

                   Supplying and Laying of round multi core armoured cable of
                   Aluminium / copper conductor as per lS:1554(Pt-l) of 1988 of
                   sizes as mentioned below in ground in cable trench of depth
                   900mm and width 300 mm. (The bottom of the Gable trench
                   shall be filled with 150mm of sand then cable laid and then filled
                   with sand to further height of 300mm and then the balance with
                   excavated earth and in pre laid pipes for road crossings from the
                   Transformer’s L.T. Panel to the Feeder panel and from feeder
                   panel to the pole terminal box complete with all materials &
                   connections, accessories and sundries as required for the work
                   and as per the direction of Engineer.

               a) Supplying and laying of 16 Sq-mm, 4 Core, Aluminium Armoured
                  cable as above from transformer panel to feeder panel
               b) Supplying and laying of 16 Sq-mm, 4 Core, Armoured cable of
                  Aluminium as above from feeder panel to pole terminal box and
                  loop cable from pole to pole.

        6)         End Terminations of Cables:

                   Crimpling / soldering and end socketing with proper sockets of
                   cable of various sizes and cores as mentioned below including
                   provision of double compression brass glands

                       a) End termination of 16 Sq-mm, 4 core, Aluminium
                          Armoured cable as above.

                       b) End termination of 16 Sq-mm, 4 core, Aluminium
                          armoured cable as above.

                                        379
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                           ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


        7)         Transformer with D.P. Structures

                    Supply, Erection, Testing, Commissioning of 11KV/415V 100
                    KVA, 50Hz Delta/Star connected outdoor Transformer with tap
                    changer on HV side and distribution panel. The transformer
                    should be oil cooled with tappings + 5% to -5% in 4 steps of
                    2.5% each, with HT bushings, LT gland cable box suitable for
                    120 Sqmm x 4 core PVC insulated armoured aluminum cable
                    and the transformer shall be designed and manufactured as per
                    IS 2026 of 1977 and will be supplied with first filling of
                    transformer oil conforming to IS 335 of 1993 and as per the
                    specification given below

                   Rated KVA                :   100 KVA

                   Service                  :   Outdoor
                   Mounting                     DP
                   Wound                    :   Double
                   Type                     :   Core
                   Cooling                  :   ONAN
                   Temp raise               :   500C of oil
                                                550C of winding
                   Vector group             :   DYNII
                   Primary connection       :   Delta
                   Primary Volts            :   11000 V
                   Primary frequency        :   50 hz
                   Primary phases           :   3
                   Primary wires            :   3
                   Secondary connection     :   Star
                   Secondary volts          :   415
                   Secondary phase          :   3
                   Secondary wires          :   4
                   Taps     on   primary    :   + or – 2.5 %
                   winding
                   Terminal arrangement     :
                   H.V                      :   Three bare terminal sturdy through
                                                weather proof porcelain bushings
                   LV                       :   Three terminology one separate
                                                neutral terminal for earthing with
                                                cable terminal box and with
                                                required fittings and accessories of
                                                the Transformer.

                   The Guaranteed max losses of No Load condition are 195 watts
                   and Full Load condition is 1650 watts.

                   1) The LT bushings of the CSP Transformers shall be so located
                      that even under the hottest condition the level of the
                      Transformer oil shall be below the opening meant for fixing
                      the LV bushing.

                   2) For 100 KVA the four walls of the tank shall be made of two
                                      380
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                          ‘L’ shaped sheets (without joints) and shall be fully welded
                          from inside and outside of tank withstand a pressure of 1
                          kg/cm2 for 10 minutes.

               a) Installation and Commissioning of 11/0.4 K.V., 100 KVA,
                  Sub-Station for Power, supply to Street lighting on the stretch of
                  outer ring road including liaison for obtaining permission from
                  APCPDCL and Office of the Electrical inspector for Power
                  Supply to the above and energising the Sub-Station

               b) Installation and Commissioning of 11/0.4 K.V., 100 KVA,
                  Sub-Station, D.P. Structure to be erected below the existing 11
                  K.V. line, 2 Nos. H.T., G.l. Stay Sets for each sub-Station if
                  required, including cost for supplying all materials, labour, T&P
                  and Sundries, Storage, Transportation of material to site of work
                  and all accessories as required for smooth completion of the
                  work and as detailed below and including cost of 11/0.4 K.V.,
                  160 KVA transformer and outdoor Electrical Panel

               c) Supplying and fixing of 11 K.V. –“V” cross arm made out of
                  75mmx40mm size MS. Channel as per R.E.C. Construction
                  Standard A-6, Complete with supply and fixing of back clamp for
                  cross arm with required numbers of nuts and bolts of size 16mm
                  diameter and of required length, all duly painted with two coats
                  of Aluminium paint over a coat of red-oxide paint (paints to
                  confirm to relevant ISS) with fixing of the same on 12.00 Meters
                  long MS. Pole top of DP Structure.

               d) Supplying and fixing of 11 K.V. lines pole top bracket made out
                  of 50mmx8mm MS. Flat as per R.E.C. Construction standard
                  A-7, complete with all accessories duly painted with coats of
                  Aluminium paint over a coat of red-oxide paint (paints to confirm
                  to relevant ISS) with fixing of the same on 12.00 Meters long
                  MS. Pole top of DP Structure.

               e) Supplying and fixing of 11 K.V. Insulators and hardware fittings
                  complete with all accessories, required for fixing of the insulator
                  of various types as specified below [as per R.E.C. Specification
                  3/1971 (as amended upto date) for insulators and IS:2486
                  (Pt-1/1993 and IS:2486 (Pt-ll)/1989 (as amended upto date)] on
                  11 K.V. “V’ Cross arm/ Pole top bracket / D.P. Structure etc.

                     i)   11 K.V. Pin insulator complete with all hardware fitting and
                           accessories.

                     ii) 11 K.V. String / Disc insulator (T&C type) complete with all
                          hardware fitting and accessories

                f)   Supplying, Fabrication and erection of Double Pole Structure for
                     11/0.4 K.V., Sub-Station, complete with the following members
                     of R.S. joists, MS. Channels, MS. Angles, Nuts, Bolts and
                     washers etc. of various sizes and lengths including fabrication
                     and erection as detailed below with all the members of the D.P.
                                          381
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                                ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                      Structure duly painted with two coats of Aluminium paint over a
                      coat of red-oxide paint (paints to confirm to relevant ISS)

               g)     Excavation of Pole pit in all kind of soil including rock of all
                      variety of size 600x900m and depth 1800mm with filling of sand
                      to a height of 150mm and then laying base pad of cement
                      concrete (1:3:6) of 150mm thickness with granite metal of
                      nominal size 20mm to 40mm and supply and erection of 12.00
                      Meters long (or as required at site) R.S. joists of size
                      200mmx100mm for D.P. Structure in the pit above the base pad
                      and filling the rest of the pit with cement concrete of 1:3:6 ratio
                      with granite metal as specified above including watering and
                      ramming it as required—2 numbers, at a distance of 2800mm
                      (approx.) from each other.

                      The work of fabrication & Erection of D.P. Structure
                      involves:

                i) MS. Channel of size 100mx50mm of length 3000mm
                   (approx)–10 Numbers, fixed in pairs of two each on the D.P.
                   Structure for fixing String Disc Insulator, Lighting Arrestor,
                   transformer and A.B. Switch.

                ii)   MS. Channel of size 100mx50mm of length 250mm (approx.)-20
                      numbers, fixed as supports to channels for mounting A.B. Switch
                      and Lighting Arrestor.

               iii)   MS. Channel of size 75mmx40mm of length 1000mm
                      (approx.)-2 Numbers, fixed on 11.00 Meters long R.S. Joist as
                      cantilever projection for mounting HG. Fuse unit — 2 Numbers,
                      one on each Joist.

               iv)    MS. Angle of size 50mmx50mmx6mm of length 1500mm
                      (approx.)-2 Numbers fixed as bracing for supporting H.G. Fuse
                      unit.

                v) MS. Channel of size 75mmx40mm of length 3000mm (approx.)
                   — 4 Numbers fixed on the Cantilever projection for mounting the
                   H.G. Fuse unit and mounting the 100 KVA Transformer.

               vi) MS. Angle of size of 50mmx50mmx6mm length 3000mm
                   (approx.) - 2 Numbers to be fixed on R.S. Joists as clamping of
                   transformer.

               vii) Clamp made out of 50mm x 6mm MS. Flat for fixing the MS.
                    Angle to the joist (used as bracing for supporting the H.G. Fuse
                    unit)-2 Numbers.

              viii) Supplying and fixing of one number in each sub one-station 12
                    K.V., 400 Amps. out door type, manually gang operated A.B.
                    Switch, triple pole, 3 post pin type insulator per bar mounted in
                    horizontal position on existing MS. Channel of size 100mx50mm
                    on D.P. Structure for 11/0.4 K.V. Sub-Station, complete with
                    supplying and fixing of adequate length of G.l. Pipe as operating
                                          382
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                   handle erected on extended square shaft and supported by
                   external bushy bearing with locking arrangement at a suitable
                   height from ground level and with all hardware fittings like Nuts,
                   Bolts and washers etc. (The A.B. Switch shall generally confirm
                   to R.E.C. Specification No.43/1987 and ISS:9920 (Pt.I to IV) as
                   amended upto date).

               ix) Supplying and fixing of 11 K.V., 200 Amps outdoor type HG.
                   Fuse Set of 3 Nos. as per R.E.C. Construction Standard F-6 and
                   F-7, mounted horizontally on existing MS. Channel of Size
                   75mmx40mm and 2800mm long on D.P. Structure for 11/0.4
                   K.V. Substation, complete with all hardware fitting like nut, Bolt
                   and washer etc. and base channel of size 75mmx40mm for HG.
                   Fuse.

                x) Supplying and fixing of 12KV. Lighting Arrestor set of 3 Nos.
                   confirming to IS:3070 /1974, mounted on D.P. Structure for
                   11/0.4 K.V. Sub-Station complete with all hardware fitting like
                   Nut, Bolt, Clamp etc.

               xi) Supplying and Installation and fixing of Six Numbers (in each
                   sub-Station) Standard earthing device with 50mm dia G.l. pipe,
                   Class-‘B’ Medium Quality, 3000mm long and the pipe shall have
                   12mm dia. holes at 15 cms c/c upto a height of 2500mm from
                   the bottom and with a clamp made out of 40mmx6mm G.l. flat
                   with G.l. Nuts, Bolts and Washers at the top for taking earth
                   continuity connection complete with excavation of earth pit
                   chamber 3000mm deep in all kind of soil including rock of all
                   variety & installation of earth electrode as above in the pit. The
                   pit shall have alternate layer of 105mm of charcoal and 50mm of
                   salt upto a height of 465mm from the bottom of the pit and the
                   rest shall be filled up with charcoal to a further depth of 2035mm
                   (measured from the bottom of the pit) and the balance shall be
                   filled up with earth.

              xii) Supplying and fixing of required length of 40mm x 6mm size G.l.
                    Flat for earth connection between two earth electrode and from
                    earth electrode to D.P. Structure, Body of Transformer etc.
                    complete with all connections with G.l. Nuts, Bolts and washers
                    etc. with supply of G.l. Nuts, Bolts, Washers etc. complete with
                    all other accessories.
              xiii) Supplying and fixing of required length of No. 4 S.W.G. G.l. wire
                    as earth connection from earth electrode/bus to the body of the
                    transformer, all lightning arrestor, all members of the D.P.
                    structure including the joist from top to bottom, Neutral of the
                    transformer, L.T. Panel Box etc. All the terminals end of the G.l.
                    wire shall be soldered to cable Sockets / lugs of Copper of
                    proper size and the connection made with proper size of Nut,
                    Bolt and washer etc. complete with all other accessories and
                    connections.

              xiv) Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of 11/0.4 K.V.,
                   100 K.V.A, transformer, Delta/Star, oil cooled type (Natural
                   Cooled) with Copper winding on the DP Structure (as mentioned
                                        383
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                              ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                     in this schedule elsewhere) with proper alignment and providing
                     all connections on 11 K.V. side of the Sub-Station from
                     Insulators on the D.P. Structure to the H.T. (11 K.V.) bushing of
                     the transformer through Lightning arrestor, A.B. Switch, HG.
                     Fuse Set etc. with the help of A.A.C./A.C.S.R. Conductor for
                     connections as above

              xv) Supply and fixing of 95 Sq.mm, 3-1/2 Core, Armoured cable
                  from the L.T. Bushing of the Transformer to the M.C.C.B in the
                  L.T. out-door Panel for transformer.

                     Installation of Out-Door type Electrical Panel consisting of 160
                     Amps, 400 Volts, 50 KA, Four Pole MCCB for transformer
                     protection on the DP Structure:

              xvi) Excavation of Foundation Trench along the boundary of the
                   Sub-Station Area and erection of 10” thick and 2” deep retaining
                   wall all along the periphery of the Sub-Station, the top of such
                   wall shall be 300mm or 12” high than the surrounding ground
                   level and Cleaning, Dressing and levelling of the Ground in the
                   11/0.4 K.V. Sub-Station area and supplying and spreading
                   machine broken Granite metal of 20mm to 40mm Nominal size
                   on the ground to a thickness of 100mm within the boundaries of
                   the Sub-Station.

             xvii)   Supply and erection of 11 KV HT Metering unit complete with
                     energy meter, metering CT’s and control cable.

        8            Panels :

                     Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of pole mounted
                     panel to be fixed on the DP consists of:

                     Supplying and Fabrication of Out door electrical Panel , Pole /
                     Plinth Mounting type with slope roof and double door type made
                     out of 16 SWG Steel sheets, duly painted with one coat of red
                     oxide paint and two coats of smoke grey enamel paint spray
                     painted after fabrication and due treatment of sheets with acid to
                     remove any rust and dust. The Panel doors must have thumb
                     screws with bakelite knob and rubber gaskets so as to render
                     the panel dust and vermin proof. The clearance between the
                     various phases and the earth should be minimum 30mm and
                     that from the body of the panel should be at least 30mm. The
                     Bus Bars shall be mounted on cast resin insulators of drum type
                     and should be properly insulated with insulating tape/sleeve of
                     proper colour i.e. Red, Yellow and Blue for Phases and Black for
                     Neutral. The panel shall also have a base fabricated out of
                     75mmx40mm MS. channel of light category (ISJC category).
                     (Before fabrication the final drawings should be approved by the
                     Engineer. Any fabrication done without the approval of drawing
                     shall be at the risk of the panel manufacturer) The panel shall
                     consist of the following incoming and outgoing:

              (i) : INCOMING:
                                         384
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                               ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II


                    one number 160 Amps., 400 Volts, 50 KA Breaking Capacity,
                    Four Pole MCCB for each transformer protection. The Incoming
                    of the MCCB shall be from the top and the out going i.e.
                    connection to the outgoing shall be from the bottom only.

              (ii) : OUTGOING for each Transformer:

               a) One number 160 Amps, 400 Volts Contactor with 1NO+1NC
                  auxiliary contact after the MCCB

               b) One number 24 Hours timer controlling the ON-OFF position of
                  the contactor

               c) One number 20 Amps, 400 Volts, 10 KA TP&N, MCB for
                  outgoing feeders of High Mast.

               d) Six Numbers 63 Amps, 230 Volts, 10 KA, SP&N, MCB for
                  outgoing feeders.

        9           Earthing of the Poles comprises of:

                    Supplying and fixing of Coil Earthing (as per REC Construction
                    Standard J-1) with No.8 SWG G.l. wire closely wound in form of
                    helical coil of 50mm diameter and having 115 Nos. turns with
                    excavation of earth pit at a distance of 0.5 meter from the pole in
                    all kind of soil including rock of all variety of size 600mmx600m
                    and upto a depth of 1500mm, installing the coil earth, filling of pit
                    with available excavated earth in the pit and connecting the coil
                    to the earth nut of the street light pole complete with all
                    accessories and including cost of all material and labour with
                    necessary T&P and sundries etc. as required for the work.




        10          HDPE Pipes:

               (a) Supply, delivery and laying of 50mm internal diameter HDPE
                   pipe inside road for road crossing of cable by Hydraulic Drilling
                   Device without opening of the road top surface laid at a depth of
                   at least 900mm below the road surface from the transformer
                   feeding point to the feeder pillar box in meridian including cost of
                   all accessories, masonry inspection chamber at both ends etc.
                   complete with for road crossing for laying of cables as in item
                   No.5 above for cable protection.

               (b) Supply, delivery and laying of 50mm internal diameter HDPE
                   pipe in median laid at a depth of at least 900mm below the
                   ground surface by excavation of earth and refilling the same
                   after laying of pipe and cable from pole to pole for laying of cable
                   in meridian including cost of all accessories, masonry inspection
                   chamber at both ends etc. complete with for road crossing for

                                         385
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                             ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                   laying of cables as in item No. 5 above for cable protection.




        11         Other Charges:

                   Liaison Charges and Statutory charges for Inspection by the
                   Electrical Inspector and obtain necessary clearance certificate to
                   energise the Sub-Station, building and Liaison and statutory
                   charges for obtaining clearance for power supply from
                   APCPDCL, excluding deposits to be paid to APCPDCL are all
                   inclusive.

        12         Notes:

               1. The Highway Crossing by the Hydraulic Drilling Device Boring
                  and the construction of manholes for all types of cable laying
                  through HDPE Pipe, if any, would be incidental to the work and
                  no extra charges will be borne by Hyderabad Growth Corridor
                  Limited. It is to be noted that Open Digging is strictly prohibited
                  under the road crust.


               2. The streetlights, Transformers and High Masts shall be handed
                  over directly to the Hyderabad growth corridor limited along with
                  all warrantees obtained from the firms. Till the section is handed
                  over all the maintenance including electricity charges shall be
                  borne by the Contractor and is incidental to the work.

               3. All fitments such as Poles, Luminaries, Accessories, High Masts,
                  and Cables etc. shall be approved by the Engineer along with
                  the Manufacturers details. The firm must submit the details of
                  the manufacturers of the fitments proposed to be used in the
                  work along with the other supporting documents to the Engineer
                  for approval.

               4. The agencies should take utmost care to protect the
                  beautification work in the median such as plantation, lawn etc.
                  and should replace the damaged parts, if any within seven days
                  from the date of damage without claiming any extra cost from
                  Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited. to the satisfaction of the
                  Engineer.

                5 The staff of the contractor shall wear safety jackets, shoes,
                  helmets, shock proof hand gloves etc.

        13         Measurement of Payment

                   The various items of Street Lighting shall be measured as
                   follows:


                                       386
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

               a) Poles with single cross arm and double cross arm shall be in
                  numbers.

               b) The Measurement for High Mast shall be in numbers.

               c)   The Measurement for power tool for lowering or raising the lamp
                    carriage of the high mast shall be in numbers.

               d) The Measurement for Metal Halide street light fittings with starter
                  connections bulbs shall be in numbers.

               e) The Measurement for HPSV light fittings with starter connections
                  bulbs shall be in numbers.

                f) The Measurement for Street light control box with timer and all
                   other accessories shall be as each number.

               g) The Measurement for Armoured Aluminium Cables and PVC
                  armoured cables and other cables shall be in running meters.

               h) The Measurement for Pipes shall be in running meters.

                i) The Measurement for making of cable end terminations with
                   necessary glands, lugs shall be in numbers.

                j) The Measurement for Transformers including all accessories
                   shall be in numbers.




                                       387
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                      ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

               k) The Measurement for DP structure including all accessories
                  shall be in numbers.




                                    388
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited         ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




                                    389
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                      ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

                l) The Measurement for run of earth lead shall be in running
                   meters.




                                    390
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited         ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II




                                    391
Hyderabad Growth Corridor Limited                            ORR/JBIC/Pkg 3/Vol II

               m) The Measurement for Copper Plate Earth station including brick
                  pedestal meshed funnel, CI cover shall be in numbers.




        14         Rates
                   The contract unit rate for items of street lighting shall be the
                   payment in full for carrying out required operations including all
                   equipment, plant, tools, spares, labour, supervision, overheads,
                   consumables, materials, erection, maintenance, testing of input
                   material delivered, profit, taxes and duties together with all
                   general risks, patent charges (if any) and supervision by the
                   specialized     supplier/manufacturer/agency,    liabilities  and
                   obligations set out and implied in the Contract and other
                   incidentals to comply with the requirement of Technical
                   Specifications.




                                       392

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:44
posted:2/18/2012
language:English
pages:241